EDR 5000 Manual PDF

IM02602007E
Rev. A
EDR-5000 EATON DISTRIBUTION RELAY

Instruction Manual for Installing, Operating, and Maintaining the EDR-5000
IM02602007E EDR-5000
EDR-5000 Application Overview
EDR -5000
1
Metering ,
79 27A
Statistics and
Demand
59A Current and Volt .:
74 50 unbalance
46 50R 51R 50P 51P 67P 67R LOP %THD and THD
TC BF
59N Fund . and RMS
min./max ./avg.
phasors and
angles
3
CTS SOTF CLPU
Power :
25
Fund . and RMS
1 55
47 67X MVA , Mwatt , Mvar ,
A/D PF
3 Waveform recorder
81 * Fault recorder
27M 59M 81R 78V 50X 51X 51V 32 32V
U/O
Event recorder
SNTP Zone Interlocking Breaker Wear Programmable Logic Trend recorder

IRIG-B00X
standard
2 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Key Features, Functions and Benefits..........................................................................................8

General Description.........................................................................................................................................8
Features...........................................................................................................................................................9
Comments on the Manual.............................................................................................................14
What Is Included with the Device...................................................................................................................17
Storage..........................................................................................................................................................17
Important Information.....................................................................................................................................17
Symbols.........................................................................................................................................................18
General Conventions.....................................................................................................................................23
Device.............................................................................................................................................24
Device Planning.............................................................................................................................................24
Device Planning Parameters of the Device....................................................................................................24
Installation and Wiring..................................................................................................................27
Three-Side-View............................................................................................................................................27
Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups............................................................................................................28
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs..............................................................................................30
Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock..................................................................................................33
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................35
Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................45
Typical Connection Diagrams........................................................................................................................49
Slot X5: Relay Output Card............................................................................................................................53
Slot X6: Digital Inputs.....................................................................................................................................54
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface.........................................................................................................................56
Slot X103: Data Communication....................................................................................................................57
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact............................................................................................61
X120 - PC Interface.......................................................................................................................................62
Control Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................................................63
Input, Output, and LED Settings..................................................................................................64
Digital Input Configuration..............................................................................................................................64
DI-8P X..........................................................................................................................................................65
DI-8 X Settings...............................................................................................................................................67
Wired Inputs (Aliases)....................................................................................................................................69
Relay Output Configuration............................................................................................................................70
RO-4ZI X - Settings........................................................................................................................................74
RO-6 X Settings.............................................................................................................................................90
LED Configuration........................................................................................................................................101
The »System OK (Operational) « LED.........................................................................................................104
LED Settings................................................................................................................................................104
Front Panel...................................................................................................................................116
Basic Menu Control......................................................................................................................................120
PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands.............................................................................................................121
PowerPort-E.................................................................................................................................123
Installation of PowerPort-E...........................................................................................................................123
Uninstalling PowerPort-E.............................................................................................................................124
Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device..............................................................................................124
Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E......................................................................................134
Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E........................................................................................134
Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E...............................................................................135
Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E...................................................................................................136
Measuring Values........................................................................................................................137
Read Out Measured Values.........................................................................................................................137
Current - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................138
Voltage - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................140
Power - Measured Values............................................................................................................................143
Energy Counter...........................................................................................................................144
Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module.......................................................................................144
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module........................................................................................144
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)....................................................................144
Statistics......................................................................................................................................146
Read Out Statistics......................................................................................................................................146
Statistics (Configuration)..............................................................................................................................146
www.eaton.com 3
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Direct Commands........................................................................................................................................147
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module................................................................................147
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module................................................................................................149
Signals of the Statistics Module...................................................................................................................150
Counters of the Module Statistics.................................................................................................................150
System Alarms.............................................................................................................................156
Demand Management.................................................................................................................................156
Peak Demand..............................................................................................................................................158
Min. and Max. Values...................................................................................................................................158
THD Protection............................................................................................................................................158
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management.........................................................................158
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)......................................................................158
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management..........................................................................159
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management........................................................................................161
Resets..........................................................................................................................................162
Manual Acknowledgment.............................................................................................................................163
Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................163
External Acknowledgments..........................................................................................................................163
External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E.......................................................................................................164
External LED - Acknowledgment Signals.....................................................................................................164
Manual Resets.............................................................................................................................................173
Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................................173
Reset to Factory Defaults.............................................................................................................................174
Status Display..............................................................................................................................175
Status Display via PowerPort E....................................................................................................................175
Operating Panel (HMI).................................................................................................................176
Special Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................................176
Direct Commands of the Panel....................................................................................................................176
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................176
Recorders....................................................................................................................................177
Waveform Recorder.....................................................................................................................................177
Fault Recorder.............................................................................................................................................184
Event Recorder............................................................................................................................................188
Trend Recorder............................................................................................................................................190
Communication Protocols..........................................................................................................194
Modbus®.....................................................................................................................................................194
IEC 61850....................................................................................................................................................199
Time Synchronization.................................................................................................................206
SNTP...........................................................................................................................................................210
IRIG-B00X...................................................................................................................................................214
Parameters...................................................................................................................................218
Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................................................218
Adaptive Parameters via HMI......................................................................................................................221
Operational Modes (Access Authorization)..................................................................................................233
Password.....................................................................................................................................................234
Changing of Parameters - Example.............................................................................................................235
Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example.............................................................236
Protection Parameters.................................................................................................................................238
Setting Groups.............................................................................................................................................238
Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................249
Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................249
Program Mode.............................................................................................................................................250
Device Parameters......................................................................................................................251
Date and Time.............................................................................................................................................251
Version.........................................................................................................................................................251
Version Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................................................251
TCP/IP Settings...........................................................................................................................................252
Direct Commands of the System Module.....................................................................................................252
Global Protection Parameters of the System...............................................................................................253
System Module Input States........................................................................................................................255
System Module Signals................................................................................................................................255
4 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Special Values of the System Module..........................................................................................................256

System Parameters.....................................................................................................................257
General System Parameters........................................................................................................................257
Voltage depending System Parameters.......................................................................................................257
Current Depending System Parameters......................................................................................................258
Blocking.......................................................................................................................................260
Permanent Blocking.....................................................................................................................................260
Temporary Blocking.....................................................................................................................................260
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module....................................................262
Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection Functions...............................................263
Protection (Prot) Module............................................................................................................265
How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions................................................................................265
Direct Commands of the Protection Module.................................................................................................272
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module...............................................................................272
Protection Module Input States....................................................................................................................272
Protection Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................................272
Protection Module Values.............................................................................................................................273
Switchgear/Breaker - Manager...................................................................................................274
Breaker Configuration..................................................................................................................................274
Switching the Breaker at the Panel..............................................................................................................289
Breaker Wear...............................................................................................................................................290
Control - Example: Switching of a Breaker...................................................................................................303
Protective Elements....................................................................................................................306
Directional Feature – Phase Current............................................................................................................306
50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection.......................................................................................................309
51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection.........................................................................................................315
Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X....................................................328
50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection.....................................................................................331
51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection.........................................................................................336
Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R..................................................342
50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection....................................................................................345
51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection.......................................................................................350
ZI - Zone Interlocking...................................................................................................................................356
79 - Automatic Reclosure.............................................................................................................................367
46 - Current Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................391
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection...........................................................................................................396
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup............................................................................................401
27M - Undervoltage Protection.....................................................................................................................408
59M - Overvoltage Protection.......................................................................................................................413
27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection.......................................................................................................419
59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection.........................................................................................................423
59N - Neutral Overvoltage...........................................................................................................................427
25 - Sync-check...........................................................................................................................................431
47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................451
81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection.......................................................................................................457
32 - Power Protection...................................................................................................................................478
32V - Reactive Power Protection.................................................................................................................488
55A and 55D - PF Protection.......................................................................................................................498
ExP - External Protection.............................................................................................................................505
Supervision..................................................................................................................................510
50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision............................................................................................................510
CTS – Current Transformer Supervision......................................................................................................526
74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring......................................................................................................................531
LOP – Loss of Potential...............................................................................................................................535
Self Supervision...........................................................................................................................................540
Programmable Logic...................................................................................................................542
General Description.....................................................................................................................................542
Programmable Logic at the Panel................................................................................................................546
Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E.........................................................................................................546
Commissioning...........................................................................................................................568
Commissioning/Protection Test....................................................................................................................568
www.eaton.com 5
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay..............................................................................569

Service and Commissioning Support........................................................................................571
Maintenance Mode......................................................................................................................................571
Principle – General Use...............................................................................................................................571
Before Use...................................................................................................................................................572
How to Use the Maintenance Mode.............................................................................................................572
Forcing the Relay Output Contacts..............................................................................................................574
Disarming the Relay Output Contacts..........................................................................................................574
Forcing RTDs*.............................................................................................................................................575
Forcing Analog Outputs*..............................................................................................................................576
Forcing Analog Inputs*.................................................................................................................................577
Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*....................................................................................................................577
Technical Data.............................................................................................................................589
Climatic Environmental Conditions...............................................................................................................589
Degree of Protection EN 60529...................................................................................................................589
Routine Test.................................................................................................................................................589
Housing........................................................................................................................................................589
Current and Ground Current Measurement.................................................................................................589
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement................................................................................................590
Frequency Measurement.............................................................................................................................591
Voltage Supply.............................................................................................................................................591
Power Consumption.....................................................................................................................................591
Display.........................................................................................................................................................591
Front Interface RS232..................................................................................................................................591
Real Time Clock...........................................................................................................................................591
Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................592
Relay Outputs..............................................................................................................................................592
Supervision Contact (SC).............................................................................................................................593
Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X.................................................................................................................593
Zone Interlocking.........................................................................................................................................593
RS485*........................................................................................................................................................593
Fiber Optic*..................................................................................................................................................594
URTD-Interface*..........................................................................................................................................594
Boot Phase..................................................................................................................................................594
Standards.....................................................................................................................................595
Approvals.....................................................................................................................................................595
Design Standards........................................................................................................................................595
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)................................................................................................................595
EMC Immunity Tests....................................................................................................................................595
EMC Emission Tests....................................................................................................................................596
Environmental Tests.....................................................................................................................................596
Mechanical Tests.........................................................................................................................................597
Specifications..............................................................................................................................598
Specifications of the Real Time Clock..........................................................................................................598
Time Synchronization Tolerances.................................................................................................................598
Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition........................................................................................598
Protection Elements Accuracy.....................................................................................................................600
Appendix......................................................................................................................................606
Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)........................................................................................................612
Time Current Curves (PHASE)....................................................................................................................613
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated).......................................................................625
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)........................................................................626
Time Current Curves (Ground Current)........................................................................................................627
Assignment List..........................................................................................................................639
6 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
b0255c686776b775259cb6e33d71d355
1ff5144a4287d0102ecf62941714bd6a
RMS Handoff: 0
File: C:\p4_data\deliver_EDR-5000_KWelchering\generated\EDR-5000_user_manual_eaton_en.odt
This manual applies to devices (version):
Version 2.0.a
Build: 16690
www.eaton.com 7
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Key Features, Functions and Benefits

• Microprocessor-based protection with monitoring and control for medium voltage main and feeder
applications.
• Current, voltage, and frequency protection for electrical power distribution systems.
• Complete metering of voltage, currents, power, energy, minimum/maximum and demand functions.
• Complete metering, protection, and control in a single compact case to reduce panel space, wiring and
costs.
• Integral test function reduces maintenance time and expense.
• Zone selective interlocking improves coordination and tripping time, and saves money compared to a
traditional bus differential scheme.
• Programmable logic control functions for main-tie-main transfer schemes.
• Reduce trouble shooting time and maintenance costs - Trip and event recording in non-volatile memory
provides detailed information for analysis and system restoration. Waveform capture aids in post fault
analysis (viewable using PowerPort-E software).
• Minimum replacement time - Removable terminal blocks ideal in industrial environments.
• Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E software provides local computer access and User-friendly windows
based interface for relay settings, configuration, and data retrieval.
• Breaker open/close from relay faceplate or remotely via communications.
• Fast an easy troubleshooting, improved maintenance procedures, and increased device security.
Provides detailed traceability for system configuration changes
• Relays self-diagnostics and reporting improves up-time and troubleshooting.
• Breaker trip circuit monitoring improves the reliability of the breaker operation.
General Description
Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as the primary protection on feeders, mains, and tie breaker
applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines, and differential protection. The relay is
most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications.
The EDR-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete current, voltage, and frequency protection and
metering in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5 amperes or 1 ampere
and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the 3-phase power voltage for
voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta configuration. The
fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or ground protection for an
ungrounded system.
The maintenance mode, password protected soft key can be used for arc flash mitigation to change to an
alternate settings group or set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be
changed,via communications or a digital input.
An integral keypad and display is provided for direct User programming and retrieval of data without the need of
a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status.
A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard
for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available.
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may
be defined and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the EDR-
5000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. The relay allows for four
preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software or contact input.
Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows
for four preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software, the display, or a contact input.
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms
8 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum
values, load profiles, breaker wear information, and oscillography data.
The EDR-5000 has programmable binary inputs, two normally opened and eight Form C heavy duty outputs and
one form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection Features
Phase overcurrent elements
• Three instantaneous elements with timers ( 50P[1], 50P[2], and 50P[3])
• Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2], and 51P[3])
• 11 standard curves
• Instantaneous or time delay reset
• Voltage Restraint (51P[2] and 51P[3])
• Directional Control (All Elements)
Ground overcurrent elements

• Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2])
• Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2])
• Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1],and 51X[2])
• Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2])
• 11 standard curves
• Directional Control (All Elements)
• Instantaneous or time delay reset
Breaker failure (50BF)
Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]))
Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
Main 3-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Auxiliary single-phase under/overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])
Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2])
Six Frequency elements that can be assigned to: over frequency, under frequency, rate of change, or
vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and Reverse Watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3])
Forward and Reverse Vars (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3])
Sync-check (25)
Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)
Switch onto fault protection
Cold load pickup
www.eaton.com 9
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Metering Features
• Amperes: Positive, negative, and zero sequence
• Ampere demand
• Volts: Positive, negative, and zero sequence
• Phase angles
• Volt-amperes and VA demand
• Watts and kW demand
• kWh (forward, reverse, net)
• Vars and kvar demand
• kvarh (lead, leg and net)
• Power factor
• Frequency
• % THD V and I
• Magnitude THD V and I
• Minimum/maximum recording
• Trending (load profile over time)
Monitoring Features
• Trip coil monitor
• Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current)
• Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
• Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
• Sequence of events report (up to 300 events)
• Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Control Functions
• Breaker open/close
• Remote open/close
• Programmable I/O
• Programmable Logic
• Programmable LEDs
• Multiple setting groups
• Cold load pickup
• CT supervision
Communication Features
• Local HMI
• Password protected
• Addressable
• IRIG-B
• Local communication port
• Remote communication port:
- RS-232; and
- RS-485
• Protocols:
10 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
- Modbus-RTU;
- Modbus-TCP (Optional); and
- IEC61850 (Optional)
• Configuration software
Protection and Control Functions

The Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has been designed for maximum User flexibility and
simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Directional Overcurrent Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides complete 3-phase and ground directional overcurrent
protection There are 8 independent ground overcurrent elements The ground elements “X” use the
independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input The ground elements
“R” uses a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the 3-phase currents This calculated current
could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a 3-phase, 4-wire system Each of the phase and ground
overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or RMS current. Phase direction is a
function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51) A quadrature voltage is compared to a
corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault This function is selectable to operate in the
forward, reverse or both directions Ground direction is used to supervise ground current elements and is
accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero, negative or positive
sequence voltages or ground current This function s selectable to operate in forward, reverse or both directions.
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[3]). This modification of the pickup overcurrent level
is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear model below to
determine the effective pickup value.
Sync Check
The sync check function is provided for double-ended power source applications The sync check monitors
voltage magnitude, phase angle and slip frequency between the bus and line It also incorporates breaker close
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live line and live bus live line features
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power flowing through a feeder There are three elements to be configured:
Operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over power conditions Reverse power is typically applied to generator
or motor applications while under power is generally applied to load or generation loss
Reverse Vars
Reverse vars can be used to detect loss of excitation in synchronous machines There are three elements to be
configured: operate in forward or reverse; or, under or over vars conditions
Inverse-Time Characteristics
There are 11 User-selectable inverse-time overcurrent curve characteristics. The User can select from the
ANSI, IEC, or thermal curve families and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics.
www.eaton.com 11
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Breaker Failure
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated
from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a
lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the
protective function reset times.
Voltage Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a 3-phase set designated as
Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The 3-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a
single-phase, 2 out of 3 phases, or all 3-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage
unbalance/reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point
and adjustable time delay.
Ground Voltage Protection
In high impedance grounded systems, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of zero sequence
voltage (3Vo) voltage in the neutral of the transformer by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the
secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, or in the secondary of a Wye- Broken Delta transformer
used when the neutral is not accessible or in Delta system. In the EDR-5000 the User can measure this zero
sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input; the 59N element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic
voltages that can be present in the system under normal operation.
Flexible Phase Rotation
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A User
setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system configuration.
Frequency Protection
The EDR-5000 relay provides six frequency elements than can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of
change, and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an
independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Autoreclosing Logic
The EDR-5000 provides a 6 shot-recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines, but it can be used in commercial and industrial applications with long
overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that occur on overhead lines are transient in nature. Tripping of a
breaker normally clears a transient fault and reclosing of the breaker restores power back to the circuit.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing
time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to
more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication, or via a digital Input while
maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide
greater security for maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury.
Monitoring and Metering
Sequence of Events Records

The EDR-5000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is
classified as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact
closure, alarms, setting changes, and self-diagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored in a FIFO in chronological order.
12 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Trip Log
The EDR-5000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault,
protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all
measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic, and contact closures. The EDR-5000 relay
can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the
maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
Integral User Interface

The front panel User interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle
viewing in all light conditions. 17 programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode
of operation, alarm, and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through
data, and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected.
Load Profiling/Trending
The EDR-5000 relay automatically records selected quantities into non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30, or
60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
Programmable I/O
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip rated, 2 normally open and 8 Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the
relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (fail-safe) mode. There are eight User-
configurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each
input and output is User-programmable for maximum application flexibility.
Programmable Logic
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the User can customize for
special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR.
Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input
signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection,
alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as
the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay
settings.
www.eaton.com 13
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Comments on the Manual

This manual gives a general explanation of the tasks of device planning, parameter setting, installation,
commissioning, operation, and maintenance of the Eaton devices.
The manual serves as reference document for:
• Engineers in the protection field;

• Commissioning engineers;
• Personnel dealing with the setting, testing, and maintenance of protection and control devices; and
• Well trained personnel involved in electrical installations and power stations.
All functions concerning the type code will be defined. Should there be a description of any functions,
parameters, or inputs/outputs that do not apply to the device in use, please ignore that information.
All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experience and
observations.
This manual describes the full featured versions of the devices, including all options.
All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued.
Eaton Corporation reserves the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without
changing this manual and without previous notice. Therefore no claim can be brought based on the information
and descriptions included in this manual.
Text, graphics, and formulas do not always apply to the actual delivery scope. The drawings and graphics are
not true to scale. Eaton Corporation does not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by
operating errors or disregarding the directions of this manual.
No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form, unless Eaton Corporation
has issued advanced approval in writing.
This User manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device. In case the device is passed on
(sold) to a third party, the manual has to be passed on as well.
Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel with verifiable knowledge
and experienced with local safety regulations and have the necessary experience with working on electronic
protection devices and power installations.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
The symbol/word combinations detailed below are designed to call the User's attention to issues that could affect
User safety and well being as well as the operating life of the device.
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

death or serious injury.
CAUTION, used with the safety alert symbol, indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION, without the safety alert symbol, is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
14 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
NOTICE is used to address information and practices not related to personal

injury.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be
performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment. Practice all
plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow the instructions
can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
PROPER USE
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified

mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or
property damage, including damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized
modifications: (1) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within the meaning of
the product warranty, thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting
damage; and (2) invalidate product certifications or listings.
The programmable devices subject to this manual are designed for protection
and also control of power installations and operational devices that are fed by
voltage sources with a fixed frequency, i.e. fixed at 50 or 60 Hertz. They are not
intended for use with Variable Frequency Drives. The devices are further
designed for installation in low voltage (LV) compartments of medium voltage
(MV) switchgear panels or in de-centralized protection panels. The programming
and settings have to meet all requirements of the protection concept (of the
equipment that is to be protected). The User must ensure that the device will
properly recognize and manage (e.g.: switch off the breaker) on the basis of User
selected programming and settings all operational conditions (failures). Before
starting any operation and after any modification of the programming/settings,
make a documented proof that the programming and settings meet the
requirements of the protection concept.
Typical applications for this product family/device line are for example:
• Feeder protection;
• Mains protection;
• Transformer Protection and
• Machine protection.
This device is not designed for any usage beyond these applications. This
applies also to the use as a partly completed machinery. The manufacturer
cannot be held liable for any resulting damage. The User alone bears the risk if
this device is used for any application for which it was not designed. As to the
appropriate use of the device: the technical data specified by Eaton Corporation
has to be met.
www.eaton.com 15
IM02602007E EDR-5000
OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was
produced. To verify that you have the latest revision, be sure to check the Eaton
Corporation website:
www.eaton.com
The latest versions of most publications are available at this site.
If the User's publication is not found on the web site, please contact Eaton
Customer Support to get the latest copy.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS
All electronic equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, some

components more than others. To protect these components from electrostatic
damage, the User must take special precautions to minimize or eliminate
electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the device.
1. Before performing maintenance on the electronic device, discharge the

static electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a
grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing
made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much
as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as
synthetics.
3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers, vinyl books or
folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays) away from the device, the
modules, and the work area as much as possible.
4. Do not remove any printed circuit board (PCB) from the device cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the device
cabinet, follow these precautions:
• Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
• Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

components with conductive devices or with your hands.
• When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic, anti-static
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install the PCB.
Immediately after removing the old PCB from the device cabinet,
place it in the anti-static protective bag.
16 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Eaton Corporation reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided
by Eaton Corporation is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Eaton
Corporation unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Eaton Corporation, 2012. All Rights Reserved.
What Is Included with the Device

The device package includes all connection terminals, except communication connectors, but does not include
the fastening material. Please check the package for completeness upon delivery.
Device Package Contents:
• 1 – Protective Relay;
• 1 – Mount (Standard or Projection);
• 1 – Quick Start Guide; and
• 2 – CDs
Disk 1 - Contains the User's Manual, Modbus Register Maps, IEC 61850 Communication
Documentation, Wiring Diagrams, and Device Model (Template) for Off-line Parameter
Setting;
Disk 2 - Contains PowerPort-E and Quality Manager software applications.
Disk1 contains the device templates. The device templates MUST BE installed to
allow PowerPort-E to configure a device off-line.
Please make sure the product label, wiring diagram, type code, and materials and description pertain to this
device. If you have any doubts, please contact Eaton Corporation's Customer Service Department.
Storage
The devices must not be stored outdoors. If stored, it must be stored in an area with temperature and humidity
control (see the Technical Data section contained in this manual).
Important Information
In line with the customer’s requirement, the devices are combined in a modular
way (in compliance with the order code). The terminal assignment of the device
can be found on the top of the device (wiring diagram). In addition, it can be
found within the Appendix of this manual (see Wiring Diagrams).
www.eaton.com 17
18
IM02602007E
Setting Value: Option/features to be realised in the future. Bkr.Latched

<Name>.I
Inactive
Active
Adaptive Parameter
Device Planning:
<Name>
Parameter of a Module-Input with a
SelectionList/DropDown. An (1..n)
signal/output from the list or a pre-
<Name>
defined value can be selected. Direct Command
Signal: 1..n, Assignment List
Prot.I dir fwd
<Name>
Internal message <Name>.*int Alm L1

Selection List
Measured Values: IG
Parameter of a Module-Input (with <Name>

special values): An (1..n) output from the
Functional description: If the setting list will be assigned to the input No a ssignment 1
value "IG.Block at VG=0" is set to "<name>.identifier". If the parameter is
EDR-5000
"inactive", the output 1 is active and 1..n,

1..n,
Assignment
VeEnableList
IG.Dir n poss- set to "ItemNull", an "inactive"-signal will
output 2 is inactive. If the setting value >Nondir Trip be given out. No assignment,1..n
"IG.Block at VE=0" is set to "active", Inactive 1
the output 2 is active and the output 1
2
is inactive. Active
Symbols
www.eaton.com
Limit value monitoring with three I/ In
analog input values. Compares 3
analog values with the set limit; output IA
values are three different binary
values as a result of the comparision.
IB
If the analog signal exceeds the limit I/
In, the corresponding output signal
becomes "1". IC
"φ "=Elements with complex functions
AR.t-D
"gray-box".
φ
t-D 0 Limit value monitoring (Compared to V
<20%Vn
a fixed value). Compares a value with
the fixed set limit; output value is
binary as a result of the comparision.
If the signal exceeds the limit, the
corresponding output signal becomes
"1".
And
AND RS flip-flop a c
S Q
abcd b d
R1 Q
Or 0 0 Unchanged
OR 0101
1010
1101
Exclusive-XR
XOR Time stage: A "1" at the
input starts the element. If
the time <name>.t is Delay Timer Delay Timer
expired, the output becomes t1 t1 t2

"1" too. The time stage will t2
Inverting
be reset by "0" at the input.
t1: Switch On Delay
Thus the output will be set to t2: Switch Off Delay
"0" at the same time.
t1
t2
Negated Input
EDR-5000
Negated Output
Band-pass (filter)
IH1
Counter
www.eaton.com
IH1 Edge triggered counter
Band-pass (filter) + Increment +
IH2 R Reset R
IH2
Quotient of Analog Values

IH2
Time stage minimum pulse
IH1 width: The pulse width Bkr.t-TripCmd
<name>.t will be started if a
1
"1" is feed to the input. By t
starting <name>.t, the
Analog Values output becomes "1". If the
time is expired, the output
becomes "0" independent
from the input signal.
Analog Value
Comparator
IM02602007E
19
20
Each pickup of a module (except from
supervision modules but including BF) will
lead to a general pickup (collective pickup).
Name.Pickup 14
Output Signal 2 Name.Trip Phase A
Each trip of an active, trip authorized
protection module will lead to a general trip.
Input Signal
IM02602007E
2 Name.TripCmd 15
Name.Trip Phase A
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot will lead to a general trip.
Prot.Available 1 16
Name.Trip Phase A
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings will lead to a general trip.
Name.Active 2 16a
Name.Trip Phase B
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings will lead to a general trip.
Name.Blo TripCmd 3 16b
Name.Trip Phase B Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings** will lead to a general trip.
Name.Active 4 17
Name.Trip Phase B
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2 will lead to a general trip.
IH2.Blo Phase A 5 17a
Name.Trip Phase C
IH2.Blo Phase B 6 17b
Name.Trip Phase C
IH2.Blo Phase C
EDR-5000
7 18
Name.Trip Phase C
IH2.Blo IG 8 18a
Name.TripCmd
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
www.eaton.com
Phase overcurrent will lead to a general trip.
Name. Fault in Projected Direction 9 18b
Name.TripCmd
Ground Fault will lead to a general trip.
Name. Fault in Projected Direction 10 19
Name.TripCmd
Ground Fault will lead to a general trip.
Prot - 50R - Direction Detection 10a 19a
Name.TripCmd
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground
will lead to a general trip.
Prot - 50X - Direction Detection Fault 10b 19b
Name.TripCmd
Please Refer to Diagram: VTS will lead to a general trip.
VTS.Pickup 11 19c

Please Refer to Diagram: VTS will lead to a general trip.
VTS.Pickup 12a 19d
Please Refer to Diagram: VTS

VTS.VTS.LOP Blo 12b
Please Refer to Diagram: VTS

VTS.VTS.LOP Blo 12c
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
will lead to a general trip. depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Name.Trip Phase A 20 Name.Pickup 27a
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
will lead to a general trip. selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Name.Trip Phase B 21 Name.Pickup 27b
Name.Trip Phase C 22 Name.Pickup 27c
Name.Trip 23 Name.Pickup 27d
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup). selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Name.Pickup IA 24 Name.Pickup Phase A 28
Name.Pickup IA 24a Name.Pickup Phase B 29
Name.Pickup IA 24b Name.Pickup Phase C 30
Name.Pickup IB 25 Name.Pickup 31
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
EDR-5000

Name.Pickup IB 25a Prot.Blo TripCmd 32
selective general pickup (collective pickup). Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Name.Pickup IB 25b Bkr.State
www.eaton.com
33
Name.Pickup IC 26 Bkr.Pos CLOSE 34
Name.Pickup IC 26a Bkr.Pos OPEN 35
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Name.Pickup IC 26b Bkr.Pos Indeterm
36
Name.Pickup 27 Bkr.Pos Disturb 37
Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.LOP Blo
LOP.LOP Blo 38a
Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.Ex FF VT

LOP.Ex FF VT 38b
Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.Ex FF GVT

LOP.Ex FF GVT 38c
IM02602007E
21
22
Please Refer to Diagram: Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy
Resource
Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy Resource 39
IM02602007E
Please Refer to Diagram: CTS.Pickup

CTS.Pickup 40
Bkr.Prot CLOSE
Bkr.Prot CLOSE 41
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd 42
Please Refer to Diagram: Analog Values
AnIn[1].Value 43
AnIn[2].Value 44
EDR-5000

AnIn[n].Value 45
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
General Conventions
»Parameters are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and written in italic .«
»SIGNALS are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and small caps .«
[Paths are indicated by brackets.]
Software and Device names are written in italic .
Module and Instance (Element) names are displayed italic and underlined.
»Pushbuttons, Modes, and Menu entries are indicated by right and left double arrow heads. «
1 2 3 Image References (Squares)
www.eaton.com 23
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device
EDR-5000
Device Planning
Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be fulfilled
(i.e.: the device shows only those functions needed or desired). If the User, for example, deactivates the voltage
protection function, all parameter branches related to this function will not appear in the parameter. All
corresponding events, signals, etc. will also be deactivated. Due to this change, the parameter trees become
very transparent.
Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data (frequency etc.).
It MUST be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance, protective

functions, the User also changes the functionality of the device. If the User
cancels the directional feature of the over-current protections, then the device no
longer trips in a directional way but merely in a non-directional way.
The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage
as a result of incorrect planning.
Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information.
Beware of the inadvertent deactivating of protective functions/modules.
If the User is deactivating modules within the device planning, all parameters of
those modules will be set on default.
If the User is activating one of these modules, again, all parameters of those
reactivated modules will be set on default.
If the protective device is equipped with Zone Interlocking, overcurrent and earth
current elements are needed to trigger the Zone Interlocking function. Therefore,
some overcurrent and earth current elements cannot be deactivated if the device
is equipped with Zone Interlocking.
Device Planning Parameters of the Device

Parameter Description Options Default Menu Path
Hardware Optional Hardware Extension »A« 8 DI, 2 Form A, 8+1 Form C, ZI, 8 DI, 2 Form [EDR-5000]
Variant 1 »B« 16 DI, 2 Form A, 8+1 Form C, ZI A, 8+1 Form
C, ZI
Hardware Optional Hardware Extension »0« Default Ground Current , Default [EDR-5000]
Variant 2 »1« Sensitive Ground Current Ground
Current
Communica Communication »B« RS 485: Modbus RTU, RS 485: [EDR-5000]
tion »H« Ethernet: IEC61850, Modbus RTU
»I« RS 485 + Ethernet: Modbus RTU
+ Modbus TCP
Printed Printed Circuit Board »A« Standard, »A« Standard [EDR-5000]
Circuit »B« Conformal Coating
Board
24 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
There are two mounts available for the EDR-5000: a Standard Mount and a Projection Mount. To order the
EDR-5000 with a Standard Mount, append the device code with a zero (0). To order the EDR-5000 with a Pro-
jection Mount, append the device code with a one (1). Refer to the table below for details of the available device
options.
A retrofit kit for Eaton IQ cutouts is available (Style No. 66D2217G01 – Catalog No. ER-IQEDRKIT). This kit is
required when replacing a DT-3000 with the EDR-5000.
EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution Relay Removable

Terminals
EDR-5000 A 0 B A 1
Choose from the following options.
Hardware Option 1
8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone A
Interlocking.
8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone B
Interlocking, and Larger Display.
Hardware Option 2
Phase Current 5A/1A, Ground Current 5A/1A, 0
Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac. (Zero)
Phase Current 5A/1A, Sensitive Ground Current 1
0.5A/0.1A, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc,
40-250 Vac.
Communication Options
Modbus-RTU (RS-485) B
IEC-61850 (Goose) H
Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP I
Conformal Coating Options

None A
Conformal Coated Circuit Boards B
Mounting Options
Standard Mount 0
(Zero)
Projection Panel Mount 1
The catalog number identification table defines the electrical characteristics and operation features included in
www.eaton.com 25
IM02602007E EDR-5000
the EDR-5000. For example, if the catalog number were EDR-5000A0BA1, the device would have the following:
EDR-5000
(A) - 8 DI, 11 Outputs Relays, Removable Terminals, Zone Interlocking
(0) - 5A/1A Phase and Ground CTs, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac.
(B) - Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
(A) - Without Conformal Coating
(1) - Projection Panel Mount
26 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Installation and Wiring

Three-Side-View
Depending on the connection method of the communication system used, the

needed space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to be
added to the depth dimension.
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched-off, unsafe voltages remain at the
device connections.
Outline Projection Mount - Door Cut-out
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10 [4
to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked with
the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14

[2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1.
DO NOT over-tighten the mounting nuts of the relay (0.164 X32 ). Check the
torque by means of a torque wrench (1.7 Nm [15 In-lb]). Over-tightening the
mounting nuts could cause personal injury or damage the relay.
www.eaton.com 27
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Outline Standard Mount - Door Cut-out
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG 12-10
[4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is marked
with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).

Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups
In line with the customers' requirement, the devices are combined in a modular
way (in compliance with the order code). In each of the slots, an assembly/group
may be integrated. In the following diagram, the terminal assignment of the
individual assembly/groups are shown. The exact installation/placement of the
individual modules can be determined from the connection diagram attached to
the top of your device.
28 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Overview of Slots
Housing B2
Slot1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot4 Slot5 Slot6
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
Schematic Diagram

Grounding

The devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
www.eaton.com 29
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs

Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The type of power supply card and the number of digital inputs on it used in this slot is dependent on the ordered
device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
• (DI8-X1): This assembly group comprises a wide-range power supply unit; and two non-grouped digital
inputs and six (6) digital inputs (grouped).
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
DI-8 X - Power Supply and Digital Inputs
Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm].
This assembly group comprises:
• A wide-range power supply unit;

• Two non-grouped digital inputs; and
• Six (6) digital inputs, grouped.
Auxiliary Voltage Supply
• The auxiliary voltage inputs (wide-range power supply unit) are non-polarized. The device can be
powered with an AC or DC control voltage.
30 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Digital Inputs
For each digital input group, the related voltage input range has to be configured.
Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions/wrong signal transfer
times.
The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (that are configurable) (two AC and five DC in-
put ranges). The following switching levels can be defined:
• 24 Vdc;
• 48 Vdc
• 60 Vdc;
• 110/120 Vac/dc; and
• 230/240 Vac/dc.
If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(logically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects logically “0”.
When using DC supply, the negative potential has to be connected to the

common terminal (COM1, COM2, COM3 - please see the terminal marking).
www.eaton.com 31
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1 FE
2 V+ Power Supply
3 V-
4 N.C.
5 COM1
6 DI1
7 COM2
8 DI2
9 COM3
10 COM
11 DI3
12 DI4
13 DI5
14 DI6
15 DI7
16 DI8
17 Do not use
18 Do not use
Pin Assignment
DI-8P X
FE
1
V+
2
Power Supply
V-
3
N.C.
4
COM1
5
DI1
6
COM2
7
DI2
8
COM3
9
COM3
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
Do not use
Do not use
32 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different
scope of functions.
• (RO-4Z X2): Assembly Group with four Relay Outputs (two Form A and two Form C) and Zone
Interlocking.
RO-ZI X - Relay Outputs and Zone Interlock

The Relay Outputs are dry-type contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Outputs section, the assignment of the
Relay Outputs is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section.
Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay Outputs.
Please refer to the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com 33
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X? .
1 Do not use
2 Do not use
3
RO1
4
5
RO2
6
7
8 RO3
9
10
11 RO4
12
13
14 OUT
15 COM
16
17 IN
18 COM
Pin Assignment
R O-4Z X
Do not use
1
Do not use
2
3
RO1 N.O.
54
RO2 N.O.
6
RO3 N.C.
7
RO3 CMN
8
RO3 N.O.
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
RO4 N.C.
RO4 CMN
RO4 N.O.
OUT
COM
IN
COM
34 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This slot contains the current transformer measuring inputs. Depending on the order code, this might be a
standard current measuring card or a sensitive ground current measuring card.
• (TI-4 X3): Standard ground current measuring card.
• (TIS-4 X3): Sensitive Ground current measuring card.
TI X- Standard Phase and Ground Current Measuring Input Card

A current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase
currents and one for measuring of the ground current. Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring
input for 1 A and 5 A.
The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or,
alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input
(residual connection).
Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side.
www.eaton.com 35
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes hazardous

voltages.
The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited before
the current circuit to the device is opened.
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current

measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
• Do not mix the inputs (1 A/5 A).
• Make sure the transformer ratios and the power of the CTs are correctly
rated. If the rating of the CTs is not correct (overrated), then the normal
operational conditions may not be recognized. The pickup value of the
measuring unit amounts to approximately 3% of the rated current of the
device. Also, the CTs need a current greater than approximately 3% of the
rated current to ensure sufficient accuracy.
Example: For a 600 A CT (primary current), any currents below 18 A cannot

be detected.
• Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or faulty

signals. Overloading means that, in case of a short circuit, the current
carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be exceeded.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm].
36 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Terminal Markings
X?.
1A
1
5A
2 IA
N
3
1A
4
5A
5 IB
N
6
1A
7
5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IX
12 N
Pin Assignment
IA-1A 1
3 IA-N
IA-5A 2
IB-1A 4
6 IB-N
IB-5A 5
IC-1A 7
9 IC-N
IC-5A 8
IX-1A 10
12 IX-N
IX-5A 11
TIS X – Phase and Sensitive Ground Current Measuring Card

The sensitive ground current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for
measuring the phase currents and one for measuring of the sensitive ground current (The sensitive Ground
current Input has different technical data. Please refer to chapter Technical Data.).
The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or,
alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input
(residual connection).
www.eaton.com 37
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side.
Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes hazardous

voltages.
The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited before
the current circuit to the device is opened.

Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm].
• Do not interchange the inputs (1 A/5 A)
• Make sure the transformation ratios and the power of the CTs are correctly
rated. If the rating of the CTs is not right (overrated), then the normal
operational conditions may not be recognized. The pickup value of the
measuring unit amounts approx. 3% of the rated current of the device.
Also the CTs need a current greater than approx 3% of the rated current to
ensure sufficient accuracy. Example: For a 600 A CT (primary current) any
currents below 18 A cannot be detected any more.
• Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or faulty

signals. Overloading means that in case of a short-circuit the current-
carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be exceeded.
38 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Terminal Markings
X? .
1A
1
5A
2 IA
N
3
1A
4
5A
5 IB
N
6
1A
7
5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IX
12 N
Pin Assignment
IA-1A 1
3 IA-N
IA-5A 2
IB-1A 4
6 IB-N
IB-5A 5
IC-1A 7
9 IC-N
IC-5A 8
IX-1A 10
12 IX-N
IX-5A
11
Common CT Wiring Configurations

Check the installation direction.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be grounded.

www.eaton.com 39
IM02602007E EDR-5000
CT secondary circuits must always to be low-burdened or short-circuited during

operation.
For current and voltage sensing function external wired and appropriate current
and voltage transformer shall be used, based on the required input measurement
ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation functionality.
All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal. Make sure
that the wiring is correct.
Sensitive Ground Current Measurement

The proper use of sensitive current measuring inputs is the measurement of small currents like they could occur
in isolated and high resistance grounded networks.
Due to the sensitiveness of these measuring inputs don´t use them for the measurement of ground short circuit
currents like they occur in solidly earthed networks.
If a sensitive measuring input should be used for the measurement of ground short circuit currents, it has to be
ensured, that the measuring currents are transformed by a matching transformer according to the technical data
of the protective device.
CT Connection Options
The current transformers may be connected in several ways, and the specified configuration affects the way
system measurements are made and results computed. The computation of the residual current IR, is
dependent on the system configuration setting for the CT connection. The configurations resulting from the
setting options are shown as well as the calculated IR residual current.
40 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
3-phase, 3-wire IG Calculated
A B C
X3.
1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
N
3
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
IA N
6
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
IB 1A
10
5A
11 IX
12 N
IC
IR calc = IA + IB + IC = IG
Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 5 A.
www.eaton.com 41
IM02602007E EDR-5000
3-phase, 3-wire IG Measured
A B C
X3.
1 1A
IA'
2 5A IA
3 N
4 1A
IB'
5 5A
IB
IA
6 N
7 1A
IC'
8 5A IC
9 N
IB
10 1A
IX'
11 5A IX
12 N
IC
Zero Sequence Current

Transformer: Measures the
ground current (sum of the three
phase currents). Can be used for
measuring the ground current in
isolated and compensated
networks. The shield is to be
returned through the zero
sequence current transformer.
IR calc = IA + IB + IC
IX meas = IG
Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 1 A.

Ground Current Measuring via Zero Sequence CT
; IGnom Secondary= 1 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the zero sequence
current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side.
42 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
4-wire system, 4th CT on Neutral
A B C N
X?.
1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
IA N
6
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
IB 1A
10
IN' 5A
11 IX
12 N
IC
IR calc´
IN
IR calc = IG = IA + IB + IC + IN
IX meas=IN
4-wire system , 4th CT on Neutral ; In secondary = 5 A.
www.eaton.com 43
IM02602007E EDR-5000
4-wire System Ground Current CT Involving Neutral
A B C N
X?.
1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IA IB' 5A
5 IB
6 N
1A
IB 7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
IR calc´ 10
IC 5A
IR calc = IA + IB + IC
11 IX
12 N
IG = IA + IB + IC + IN
IX meas = IG
IN
4-wire system with ground current CT (Toroidal) involving Neutral; In secondary = 5 A.
44 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This slot contains the voltage transformer measuring inputs.
Voltage Measuring Inputs

The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs. Three for measuring the mains voltages (»VAB«,
»VBC« , »VCA« - in case of Open Delta) or phase-to-neutral voltages (»VA«, »VB«, »VC« in case of Wye). The
fourth measuring input is to be used for »VX«.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 1.2-1-6 Nm [11-15 In-lb].
The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to account.
Make sure that the voltage transformers are wired correctly.
For the Open Delta connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to be set
to »Open Delta«.
For the Wye connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to be set to
»Wye«.
Please refer to the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com 45
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
VA/VAB
2
3
VB/VBC
4
5
VC/VCA
6
7
VX
8
Pin assignment
VA.1
1
VA.2
2
VB.1
3
VB.2
4
VC.1
5
6
VC.2
VX1.1
7
VX1.2
8
Common VT Wirings
Check the installation direction of the VTs.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be grounded.
For current and voltage sensing function, externally wired and appropriate
current and voltage transformer must be used, based on the required input
measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation
functionality.
46 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
VT Check Measuring Values

Connect a three-phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay.
Take the connection of the measuring transformers (open delta/Wye connection)

into account.
Now adjust the voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequencies that are
not likely to cause over-voltage or under-voltage trips.
Compare the values shown in the device display with the readings of the measuring instruments. The deviation
must be according to the specifications in the Technical Data section.
VT Wye
A B C
X?.
A
1 VA/
VCA'
2 VAB
VAB' B
3 VB/
4 VBC
VBC' C
5 VC/
VAB N
6 VCA
VBC VA' VB' VC'
7
VCA VX
8
VA
VB
VC
Three-phase voltage measurement- wiring of the measurement inputs

: "Wye"
www.eaton.com 47
IM02602007E EDR-5000
VT Open Delta
A B C
X?.
A
1 VA/
VCA' VAB
2
VAB' B
3 VB/
4 VBC
VBC' C
5 VC/
VAB VCA
6
VBC
7
VCA VX
8
Two-phase voltage measurement- wiring of the measuring inputs: "Open

Delta"
48 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Typical Connection Diagrams

Wye VTs and 1 A CTs in Residual Connection
A
A B C
X4.
1 VA/
2 VAB
3 VB/
4 VBC
5 VC/
6 VCA
7
VX
8
X3.
A B C 1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
6 N
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IX
IX' N
12
IA IB IC
LOAD
www.eaton.com 49
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Wye Input Wiring with Aux VX input connected to the load side of the Breaker and 1A
CTs in Residual Connection
A
A B C
X4.
1 VA/
2 VAB
3 VB/
4 VBC
5 VC/
6 VCA
7
VX
8
X3.
A B C 1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
6 N
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
IA IB IC 5A
11 IX
IX' N
12
Ph-Ph VT
(A-B, B-C, C-A)
Either OR
Ph-G VT
(A-G, B-G, C-G)
LOAD
50 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Open Delta VTs Input Wiring and 1 A CTs in Residual Connection
X4.
A B C
1 VA/
2 VAB
3 VB/
4 VBC
5 VC/
6 VCA
7
VX
8
X3.
A B C 1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
6 N
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
5A
11 IX
IX' N
12
IA IB IC
LOAD
www.eaton.com 51
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Open Delta VTs Input Wiring with Aux VTs connected to the load side of the breaker
and 1A CTs in Residual Connection
X4.
A B C
1 VA/
2 VAB
3 VB/
4 VBC
5 VC/
6 VCA
7
VX
8
X3.
A B C 1A
1
IA' 5A
2 IA
3 N
1A
4
IB' 5A
5 IB
6 N
1A
7
IC' 5A
8 IC
9 N
1A
10
IA IB IC 5A
11 IX
IX' N
12
Ph-Ph VT
(A-B, B-C, C-A)
Either OR
Ph-G VT
(A-G, B-G, C-G)
LOAD
52 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X5: Relay Output Card
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different
scope of functions.
• (RO-6 X5): Assembly Group with 6 Relay Outputs (Form C).
www.eaton.com 53
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Slot X6: Digital Inputs

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This slot contains additional digital inputs (option).
RO-6 X - Relay Outputs

The Relay Outputs are dry-type contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Output Contacts section, the assignment of
the Relay Output Contacts is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section.
Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay Output
Contacts. Please refer to the Technical Data.
54 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
2 RO1
3
4
5 RO2
6
7
8 RO3
9
10
11 RO4
12
13
14 RO5
15
16
17 RO6
18
Pin Assignment
RO-6 X
RO1 N.C.
1 2
RO1 CMN
3
RO1 N.O.
4
RO2 N.C.
5
RO2 CMN
6
RO2 N.O.
7
RO3 N.C.
8
RO3 CMN
RO3 N.O.
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
RO4 N.C.
RO4 CMN
RO4 N.O.
RO5 N.C.
RO5 CMN
RO5 N.O.
RO6 N.C.
RO6 CMN
RO6 N.O.
www.eaton.com 55
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
An Ethernet interface may be available depending on the device type ordered.
Ethernet - RJ45
Terminal Marking
RxD +
RxD –
TxD +
TxD –
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
1 8
56 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X103: Data Communication

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
The data communication interface in the X103 slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The scope of
functions is dependent on the type of data communication interface.
• RS485 Terminals
RS485 - Modbus® RTU
www.eaton.com 57
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
560 Ω
560Ω
120Ω
B(+)
A(-)
X103
1
2
3
4
5
6
Pin Assignment
Protective Relay
+5V GND
R1 R1 HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω R2
R2 = 120 Ω
B(+)
A(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6
The Modbus® connection cable must be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed
at the screw that is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of the device.
The communication is Half Duplex.
58 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Wiring Example: Device in the Middle of the Bus
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω R1 R1
R2
R2 = 120 Ω
1 2 3 4 5 6
B(+)
B(+)*
A(-)*
A(-)
Wiring Example: Device at the End of the BUS (Using the Integrated Terminal Resistor)
Protective Relay
+5V GND
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω R1 R1
R2
R2 = 120 Ω
1 2 3 4 5 6
B(+)
A(-)
www.eaton.com 59
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Shielding Options (2-wire + Shield)
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
Common
Common
Common
Common
2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF
TR-N
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
B(+)
B(+)
B(+)
B(+)
internal (internal) (internal) (internal)
A(-)
A(-)
A(-)
A(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination
resistors used resistors used resistors not used resistors not used
Shielding Options (3-wire + Shield)

HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
HF Shield
Common
Common
Common
Common
2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF 2.2nF

TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-P
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
TR-N
B(+)
B(+)
B(+)
B(+)
internal internal internal internal
A(-)
A(-)
A(-)
A(-)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side Shield at bus master side Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination connected to earth termination
resistors used resistors used resistors not used resistors not used
60 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6
X100 X101 X102 X103 X104
This comprises the IRIG-B00X and the System contact (Supervision Contact).
System Contact and IRIG-B00X
Terminals
SC
IRIG-B+
IRIG-B-
X104
1
2
3
4
5
www.eaton.com 61
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Pin Assignment for Device
X104
1 2 3 4 5
IRIG-B-
IRIG-B+
SC N.C.
SC N.O.
SC CMN
The Supervision Contact (SC) closes after the boot phase of the device if the protection is working. This Super-
vision Contact (SC) will open if an internal device error has occurred (please refer to the Self Supervision sec-
tion).
The System-OK contact (SC relay) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact that picks
up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) re-
mains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started, the System Contact picks up and
the assigned LED “Operational” is activated accordingly (please refer to the Self Supervision section).
X120 - PC Interface
The interface is a 9-pole D-Sub at all device fronts.
Pin Assignment
1 5
6 9
1 DCD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
Housing shielded
Assignment of the Null Modem Cable

Assignment of the fully wired, null modem cable.
Dsub -9 (Female) Signal Dsub -9 (Female) Signal

2 RxD 3 TxD
3 TxD 2 RxD
4 DTR 6,1 DSR, DCD
6,1 DSR, DCD 4 DTR
62 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Dsub -9 (Female) Signal Dsub -9 (Female) Signal

7 RTS 8 CTS
8 CTS 7 RTS
5 GND (Ground) 5 GND (Ground)
9 Ring Signal 9 Ring Signal
The connection cable must be shielded.
Control Wiring Diagram
Below is the recommended control wiring schematic for the EDR-5000.
Wiring Diagrams
Please refer to the file “edr-5000_wiring_diagrams.pdf” on your manual CD.
www.eaton.com 63
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Input, Output, and LED Settings
Digital Input Configuration

The State of the Digital Inputs can be checked within menu:
[Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)]
The Digital Inputs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/Digital Inputs/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)/Group X]
Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs:
• »Nominal voltage«;
• »Debouncing time«: A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time
has expired; and
• »Inverting« (where necessary).
Inverting DI Slot X.DI x

XOR
State of the Digital Input .
Debouncing Time
Nom Voltage
t
Input Signal
0
The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal
alternates.
In addition to the debouncing time that can be set via software, there is always a
hardware debouncing time (approx 12 ms) that cannot be turned of.
64 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
DI-8P X
Name of the Assembly group:
DI-8P X1
Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8P X
Parameter Description Setting Range Default Menu Path

Nom Voltage Nominal voltage of the digital inputs 24 Vdc, 110/120 Vdc [Device Para
48 Vdc, /Digital Inputs
60 Vdc, /DI-8P X1
110/120 Vdc, /Group 1]
230/240 Vdc,
110/120 Vac,
230/240 Vac
Inverting 1 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Active /Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 1]
Debouncing A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time, 20 ms [Device Para
Time 1 only be recognized after the debouncing 20 ms, /Digital Inputs
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 50 ms, /DI-8P X1
transient signals will not be misinterpreted. 100 ms /Group 1]
60 Vdc, /DI-8P X1
110/120 Vdc, /Group 2]
230/240 Vdc,
110/120 Vac,
230/240 Vac
/DI-8P X1
/Group 2]
60 Vdc, /DI-8P X1
110/120 Vdc, /Group 3]
230/240 Vdc,
110/120 Vac,
230/240 Vac
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
www.eaton.com 65
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Digital Inputs Output Signals on DI-8P X
Name Description
DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
66 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
DI-8 X Settings
Name of the Assembly group:
DI-8 X6
Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8 X

60 Vdc, /DI-8 X6
110/120 Vdc, /Group 1]
230/240 Vdc,
110/120 Vac,
230/240 Vac
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 50 ms, /DI-8 X6
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
www.eaton.com 67
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
/DI-8 X6
/Group 1]
Digital Inputs Output Signals on DI-8 X
Name Description
68 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Wired Inputs (Aliases)

Available Elements:
Wired Inputs
The module WiredInputs allows to alias Digital Inputs. By means of the menu [Device Para/WiredInputs] the
User can assign specific functions on digital inputs.
Alias Example: The 52a contact will be assigned/connected to Digital input1 (DI1). Once the 52a is
aliased (linked) on the DI1, the signal »WiredInput.52A« can be used instead of the DI1 signal for further
processing within the protective relay. That means, from now on any state changes of the Digital Input1
will we represented by the »WiredInput.52A« signal.
Global Protection Parameter of the Wired Inputs Wired

52a M1 Main 1 Breaker Closed 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
52b M1 Main 1 Breaker Open 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
TOCa M1 Main 1 Breaker Connected 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43/10 M1 Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
52a M2 Main 2 Breaker Closed 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
52b M2 Main 2 Breaker Open 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
TOCa M2 Main 2 Breaker Connected 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43/10 M2 Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
52a T Tie Breaker Closed 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
52b T Tie Breaker Open 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
TOCa T Tie Breaker Connected 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43/10 T Tie Breaker Selected To Trip 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43 M System In Manual 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43 A System in Auto 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43 P1 Preferred Source 1 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43 P2 Preferred Source 2 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
www.eaton.com 69
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Bkr Trouble Breaker Trouble 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
States of the Inputs of the Wired Inputs Module
Name Description Assignment Via

52a M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker [Device Para
Closed /Wired Inputs]
52b M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker [Device Para
Open /Wired Inputs]
TOCa M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker [Device Para
Connected /Wired Inputs]
43/10 M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker [Device Para
Selected To Trip /Wired Inputs]
52a M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker [Device Para
52b M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker [Device Para
Open /Wired Inputs]
TOCa M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker [Device Para
43/10 M2-I State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker [Device Para
52a T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker [Device Para
52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker [Device Para
Open /Wired Inputs]
TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker [Device Para
43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker [Device Para
43 M-I State of the module input: System In [Device Para
Manual /Wired Inputs]
43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
43 P1-I State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para
1 /Wired Inputs]
43 P2-I State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para
2 /Wired Inputs]
Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble [Device Para
/Wired Inputs]
Relay Output Configuration

The State of the Relay Output Contacts can be checked within menu:
[Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)]
70 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
The Relay Output Contacts can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/Relay Output Contacts/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)]
Set the following parameters for each of the relay output contacts.
• Up to seven (7) signals from the »assignment list« (OR-connected).
The states of the module outputs and the signals (e.g. states of protective functions) can be
assigned to the relay output contacts. The relay output contacts are “dry-type“ contacts.
• Each of the assigned signals can be inverted.
• The (collective) state of the relay output contacts can be inverted.
• By the Operating Mode it can be determined whether the relay output works in Normally »De-Energized«
or »Normally Energized« principle.
• Each relay output contact can be set as »Latched« (Latched = active or inactive). A latched relay output
contact will return to it's latched position after a loss of power to the protective device. A latched relay
output contact will keep it´s position as long as it has not been reset and as long as the power supply
feeds the protective relay. In the case of a loss of power to the protective device, the relays will return to
the latched position once the power is restored to the protective device (latched = relay output contacts
have a memory). A latched state of a relay output contact always needs to be reset after a power loss
even if the assignments are taken away (if the assignments are reprogrammed).
• Latched = inactive«:
If the latching function is »inactive«, the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact will adopt
the state of those pickups that were assigned.
• »Latched = active«:
If the latching function is »active«, the state of the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact
that was set by the pickups will be stored (they have a memory that needs to be reset).
The relay output contact can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had
initiated the setting of the relay and after expiration of the »t-OFF delay«.
• At signal changes, the minimal latching time (»t-OFF delay«) ensures that the relay will be maintained as
picked-up or released for at least this period.
www.eaton.com 71
72
Inverting Switch Off Delay
XOR
0
OR State of the Relay
t-Off Delay Output
Assignment 1 OR
IM02602007E
XOR XOR
Inverting 1
Assignment 2
Operating Mode
XOR
Inverting 2 Norm De-energ
Norm Energ
Assignment 3 AND S Q
OR
XOR
Inverting 3 R1 Q
Assignment 4
XOR
Inverting 4
EDR-5000
Assignment 5
XOR
Inverting 5
www.eaton.com
Assignment 6
XOR
Inverting 6
Assignment 7
XOR
Inverting 7
Latched
Inactive
Active
Acknowledge -HMI
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List OR
Acknowledge-Comm
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will keep
their position even if there is a power outage within the power supply of the
protective device.
If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will also
retain their position even if they are reprogrammed in another way. This also
applies if the relay output contacts are set to »Latched is set to inactive«.
Resetting a relay output contact that has latched a signal will always require an
acknowledgment.
The »System OK Relay« (watchdog) cannot be configured.
Acknowledgment Options
Relay output contacts can be acknowledged:
• Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel;
• If »Latched is active«, each relay output contact can be acknowledged by a signal (for example: It could
be reset by the state of a digital input);
• Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« where all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once if the
signal for external acknowledgment that was selected from the »Assignment list« becomes true (e.g.:
the state of a digital input); and
• Via Communication (Comm), all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once.
Relay output contacts can be set by force or disarmed (for commisioning

support, please refer to the “Service/Disarming the Relay Output Contacts“ and
“Service/Forcing the Relay Output Contacts“ sections).
www.eaton.com 73
IM02602007E EDR-5000
RO-4ZI X - Settings
RO-4Z X2
RO-6 X5
Direct Commands of RO-4ZI X

DISARMED This is the second step, after the Inactive, Inactive [Service
"DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
is required to DISARM the relay output /WARNING! Cont?
contacts. This will DISARM those relay /DISARMED
output contacts that are currently not /RO-4Z X2]
latched and that are not timing out.
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order
to safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the
relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance.
Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active

Force all Outs By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Normal [Service
Output State can be overwritten (forced). De-Energized, /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
The relay can be set from normal operation Energized /WARNING! Cont?
(relay works according to the assigned /Force RO
signals) to "force energized" or "force de- /RO-4Z X2]
energized" state. Forcing all relay output
contacts of an entire assembly group has
precedence to forcing a single relay output.
Force ZI RO Signal: Forced Zone Interlocking OUT Normal, Normal [Service
De-Energized, /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
Energized /WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Force RO1 By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Normal [Service
energized" state.
energized" state.
energized" state.
74 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

energized" state.
Global Protection Parameters of RO-4ZI X

Operating Operating Mode Norm De-energ, Norm De-energ [Device Para
Mode Norm Energ /Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.1 s [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
latched when it picks up. Active /Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
nt acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges /Relay Outputs
the corresponding Relay Output) can be /RO-4Z X2
assigned to each Relay Output. The /RO 1]
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
Only available if: Latched = Active

Inverting Inverting of the Relay Output. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Active /Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List Bkr.TripCmd [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 1 Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 2 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com 75
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
76 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E


/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List Prot.Pickup [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
www.eaton.com 77
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]

/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List BF.Trip [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
78 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com 79
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]

/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
80 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
DISARMED Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive, Inactive [Service
Ctrl relay output contacts. This is the first step of Active /Test Mode (Prot
a two step process, to inhibit the operation inhibit)
or the relay output contacts. Please refer to /WARNING! Cont?
"DISARMED" for the second step. /DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
Disarm Mode CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent, Permanent [Service
safely perform maintenance while Timeout /Test Mode (Prot
eliminating the risk of taking an entire inhibit)
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking /WARNING! Cont?
and Supervision Contact cannot be /DISARMED
disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the /RO-4Z X2]
maintenance.
t-Timeout The relays will be armed again after 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service
DISARM expiring of this time. /Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
Only available if: Mode = Timeout /WARNING! Cont?
DISARM /DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
Force Mode By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent, Permanent [Service
Output States can be overwritten (forced) in Timeout /Test Mode (Prot
case that the Relay Output is not in a inhibit)
disarmed state. The relays can be set from /WARNING! Cont?
normal operation (relay works according to /Force RO
the assigned signals) to "force energized" /RO-4Z X2]
or "force de-energized" state.
www.eaton.com 81
IM02602007E EDR-5000

t-Timeout The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service
Force duration of this time. That means, for the /Test Mode (Prot
duration of this time, the Relay Output does inhibit)
not show the state of the signals that are /WARNING! Cont?
assigned on it. /Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
Input States of RO-4ZI X

RO1.1 Module Input State: Assignment [Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Ack signal RO 1 Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to /Relay Outputs
active, the Relay Output can only be /RO-4Z X2
acknowledged if those signals that initiated /RO 1]
the setting are fallen back and the hold time
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
82 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
www.eaton.com 83
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
is expired.
84 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Signals of RO-4ZI X
Name Description
ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
RO 1 Signal: Relay Output
DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process
off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot
be disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the relays are ARMED
AGAIN after maintenance
Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
Additional Input States of the Relay Outputs

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com 85
IM02602007E EDR-5000

active, the Relay Output can only be /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
86 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com 87
IM02602007E EDR-5000

is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
is expired.
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
88 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
is expired.
Additional Signals of the Relay Outputs
Name Description
DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
www.eaton.com 89
IM02602007E EDR-5000
RO-6 X Settings
Direct Commands of RO-6 X

DISARMED This is the second step, after the Inactive, Inactive [Service
"DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that Active /Test Mode (Prot
is required to DISARM the relay output inhibit)
contacts. This will DISARM those relay /WARNING! Cont?
output contacts that are currently not /DISARMED
latched and that are not timing out. /RO-6 X5]
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order
to safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the
maintenance.
Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active

Force all Outs By means of this function the normal Relay Normal, Normal [Service
Output State can be overwritten (forced). De-Energized, /Test Mode (Prot
The relay can be set from normal operation Energized inhibit)
(relay works according to the assigned /WARNING! Cont?
signals) to "force energized" or "force de- /Force RO
energized" state. Forcing all relay output /RO-6 X5]
contacts of an entire assembly group has
precedence to forcing a single relay output.
energized" state. /RO-6 X5]
90 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Device Parameters of RO-6 X

/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
the corresponding Relay Output) can be /RO-6 X5

/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com 91
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
92 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]

/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
www.eaton.com 93
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]

/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
94 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com 95
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]

/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
96 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]

/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
www.eaton.com 97
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
98 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]

/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
www.eaton.com 99
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
DISARMED Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive, Inactive [Service
Ctrl relay output contacts. This is the first step of Active /Test Mode (Prot
a two step process, to inhibit the operation inhibit)
or the relay output contacts. Please refer to /WARNING! Cont?
"DISARMED" for the second step. /DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
Disarm Mode CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent, Permanent [Service
safely perform maintenance while Timeout /Test Mode (Prot
eliminating the risk of taking an entire inhibit)
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking /WARNING! Cont?
and Supervision Contact cannot be /DISARMED
disarmed). YOU MUST ENSURE that the /RO-6 X5]
maintenance.
t-Timeout The relays will be armed again after 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service
DISARM expiring of this time. /Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
Only available if: Mode = Timeout /WARNING! Cont?
DISARM /DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
100 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Force Mode By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent, Permanent [Service
Output States can be overwritten (forced) in Timeout /Test Mode (Prot
case that the Relay Output is not in a inhibit)
disarmed state. The relays can be set from /WARNING! Cont?
normal operation (relay works according to /Force RO
the assigned signals) to "force energized" /RO-6 X5]
or "force de-energized" state.
t-Timeout The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.03 s [Service
Force duration of this time. That means, for the /Test Mode (Prot
duration of this time, the Relay Output does inhibit)
not show the state of the signals that are /WARNING! Cont?
assigned on it. /Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
LED Configuration
The LEDs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/LEDs/Group X]
Attention must be paid to insure that there are no overlapping functions due to
double or multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes.
If LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will keep (return to) their blink
code and color even if there is a power outage within the power supply of the
protective device.
If the LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will also retain their blink
code and color even if the LEDs are reprogrammed in another way. This also
applies if the LEDs are set to »Latched = inactive«. Resetting a LED that has
latched a signal will always require an acknowledgment.
This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left hand
side of the display (Group A).
If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand side of the display
(Group B), the analog information in this chapter is valid. The only difference
between “Group A” and “Group B” is within the menu paths.
Via the »INFO« push-button, it is always possible to display the current pickups and alarm texts that are
assigned to an LED. Please refer to the Navigation section for a description of the »INFO« push-button
functionality.
Set the following parameters for each LED.
• »Latching (self holding function)«: If »Latching« is set to »Active«, the state that is set by the pickups will be stored
until it is reset. If »Latching« is set to »Inactive«, the LED always adopts the state of those pickups that were
assigned.
• »Acknowledgment«: Signal that will reset the LED.
www.eaton.com 101
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• »LED active color«: LED lights up in this color when at least one of the allocated functions is valid (red, red-
flashing, green, green flashing, off).
• »LED inactive color«: LED lights up in this color when none of the allocated functions is valid (red, red-
flashing, green, green flashing, off).
• »Assignment 1...n« Apart from the LED for System OK (Operational), each LED can be assigned up to
five functions (e.g. pickups) out of the »Assignment list«.
• »Inverting an Assignment 1...n«: This will invert the input signal.
Acknowledgment Options
LEDs can be acknowledged by:
• The push-button »C« at the operating panel;
• A signal from the »LED Reset list« (e.g. digital inputs or communication signals) (If »Latched = active«);
• The »Ex Acknowledge« module - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for external
acknowledgment becomes true (e.g.: the state of a digital input); and
• Communication (Comm) - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once.
102 www.eaton.com
Assignment 1
XOR
Inverting 1
Assignment 2
XOR
Inverting 2
Assignment 3
XOR OR LE D Active Color
Inverting 3 OR
Assignment 4
LED Inactive Color
XOR
Inverting 4
EDR-5000
Assignment 5
XOR
Inverting 5
www.eaton.com
AND S Q
R1 Q
L atched
Inactive
Active
Acknowledge -HMI
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List OR
Acknowledge-Comm
IM02602007E
103
IM02602007E EDR-5000
The »System OK (Operational) « LED
This LED flashes green while the device is booting. After booting is complete, the LED for System OK
(Operational) lights up in green signaling that the protection (function) is »activated«. If, however, in spite of
successful booting, or after the third unsuccessful reboot caused by the self supervision module, the Operational
LED (System OK) flashes in red or is solidly illuminated in red, please contact your Eaton Corporation Customer
Service Representative (also see the Self Supervision section).
The Operational LED (System OK) cannot be configured.
LED Settings
LEDs group A ,LEDs group B
Device Parameters of the LEDs

Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched Inactive, LEDs group A: [Device Para
when it picks up. Active Active /LEDs
LEDs group B: /LEDs group A
Inactive /LED 1]
Ack signal Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
latching is set to active the LED can only be /LEDs
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the /LEDs group A
setting of the LED are no longer present. /LED 1]
Dependency Only available if: Latched =

Active
LED Active The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, LEDs group A: [Device Para
Color the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red /LEDs
Red flash, LEDs group B: /LEDs group A
Green flash, Green /LED 1]
-
LED Inactive The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, - [Device Para
Color the OR-assignment of the signals is false. Red, /LEDs
Red flash, /LEDs group A
Green flash, /LED 1]
-
Assignment 1 Assignment 1..n, Assignment List LEDs group A: [Device Para
51P[1].Trip /LEDs
Bkr.Pos OPEN /LED 1]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
104 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
when it picks up. Active Active /LEDs
Inactive /LED 2]

LED Active The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green, Red [Device Para
Color the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, /LEDs
-
-
51X[1].Trip /LEDs
Bkr.Pos CLOSE /LED 2]
www.eaton.com 105
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
51R[1].Trip /LEDs
-.- /LED 2]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Latched Defines whether the LED will be latched Inactive, Active [Device Para
when it picks up. Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]

-
106 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

-
50P[1].Trip /LEDs
27M[1].Trip /LED 3]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
-.- /LEDs
59M[1].Trip /LED 3]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
www.eaton.com 107
IM02602007E EDR-5000


-
-
50X[1].Trip /LEDs
81[1].Trip /LED 4]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
50R[1].Trip /LEDs
81[3].Trip /LED 4]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
-.- /LEDs
81[5].Trip /LED 4]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
108 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
when it picks up. Active Inactive /LEDs
Active /LED 5]

Color the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Red flash /LEDs
Green flash, Red /LED 5]
-
-
Prot.Pickup /LEDs
ZI.Trip /LED 5]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
www.eaton.com 109
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]

-
-
BF.Trip /LEDs
LOP.LOP Blo /LED 6]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
110 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
when it picks up. Active Inactive /LEDs
Active /LED 7]

Color the OR-assignment of the signals is true. Red, Green flash /LEDs
Green flash, Red /LED 7]
-
-
Sys.Maint Mode /LEDs
Active /LEDs group A
LEDs group B: /LED 7]
Prot.Trip
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
www.eaton.com 111
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Active /LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED Input States

LED1.1 Module Input State: LED [Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
112 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Acknow Sig 1 Module Input State: Acknowledgment [Device Para
Signal (only for automatic /LEDs
acknowledgment). /LEDs group A
/LED 1]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
/LED 2]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
www.eaton.com 113
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
/LED 3]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
/LED 4]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
114 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/LED 5]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
/LED 6]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
/LED 7]
www.eaton.com 115
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Front Panel
The following illustration applies to protective devices with a small display:
Programmable LEDs LED »System OK« Display Programmable LEDs
1 2 3 4
Protective
Device
5
Softkeys
6 7 8 9 10
INFO Key ACK/RST-key RS232 Interface OK-key Control

(Signals/Messages) (PowerPort-E Connection)
116 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
The following illustration applies to protective devices with a large display:
Programmable LEDs LED »System OK« Display Programmable LEDs
1 2 3 4
Protective
Device
Softkeys
8 6 7 9 10
RS232 Interface INFO Key ACK/RST-key OK-key Control

(PowerPort-E Connection) (Signals/Messages)
www.eaton.com 117
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Item Graphic Name Description
1 Group A: Basically, there are 14 programmable

Programmable LEDs (7 on the left, 7 on the right
LEDs side)provided for User to configure. The
choice for each programmable LED can
be any signal from the global assignment
list, which includes all internal operation
states of each function activated. Based
on the application need, up to 14 (but not
necessarily all) programmable LEDs can
be activated. By properly configuring
some or all 14 LEDs, the User will be able
to view the relay's overall operation and
some critical information immediately and
intuitively without having to access any
menu.
(Example for an insert)
2 LED »System Should the LED »System OK« flash red

OK« during operation, contact Customer
Support immediately.
3 Display Via the display, the User can view

operational data and edit the parameters.
4 Group B: Basically, there are 14 programmable

Programmable LEDs (7 on the left, 7 on the right
LEDs side)provided for User to configure. The
choice for each programmable LED can
be any signal from the global assignment
list, which includes all internal operation
states of each function activated. Based
on the application need, up to 14 (but not
necessarily all) programmable LEDs can
be activated. By properly configuring
some or all 14 LEDs, the User will be able
to view the relay's overall operation and
some critical information immediately and
intuitively without having to access any
menu.
(Example for an insert)
118 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
5 Softkeys The function of the »SOFTKEYS«

changes. Their active functions appear on
the bottom line of the display.
Possible functions are:
• Navigation;
• Parameter decrement/increment;
• Scrolling up/down a menu page;
• Moving to a digit; and
• Change into the parameter setting mode

»Wrench Symbol«.
6 INFO Key Looking through the present LED

(Signals/Mess assignment. The Direct Select key can be
ages) activated at any time. If the INFO key is
actuated again, the User will leave the
LED menu.
Here only the first assignments of the

LEDs will be shown. Every three seconds
the »SOFTKEYs« will be shown (flashing).
Displaying the Multiple Assignments
If the INFO key is pressed, only the first

assignments of any LED is shown. Every
three seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will be
shown (flashing).
If there is more than one signal assigned

to an LED (indicated by three dots), the
User can check the state of the multiple
assignments by proceeding as follows.
In order to show all (multiple)

assignments, select an LED by means of
the »SOFTKEYs« »up« and »down«.
Via the »Softkey« »right«, call up a sub-

menu of this LED that gives the User
detailed information on the state of all
signals assigned to this LED. An arrow
symbol points to the LED whose
assignments are currently displayed.
Via the »SOFTKEYs« »up« and »down«,

the User can call up the next / previous
LED.
In order to leave the LED menu, press the

»SOFTKEY« »left« multiple times.
www.eaton.com 119
IM02602007E EDR-5000
7 »ACK/RST- Used to abort changes and to acknow-

Key« ledge messages as well as resetting coun-
ters.
In order to reset, press the Softkey

»Wrench« and enter the password.
The User can exit the reset menu by

pressing the Softkey »Arrow-left«
8 RS232 Connection to the computer/software

Interface PowerPort-E is done via the RS232
(PowerPort-E interface.
Connection)
9 »OK Key« When using the »OK« key, parameter

changes are temporarily stored. If the
»OK« key is pressed again, those changes
are stored indefinitely.
10 »CTRL Key« Access to the Control menu (not available

in all devices)
Basic Menu Control

The graphic User interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree. For access to the individual sub-
menus, the »SOFTKEYS«/Navigation Keys are used. The function of the »SOFTKEYS« can be found near the
bottom of the display.
Softkey Description
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Up«, the User will be taken to the prior menu point/one parameter up by
scrolling upwards.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one step back.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Down«, the User will be taken to the next menu point/one parameter down
by scrolling downwards.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken to a sub-menu.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Top of List«, the User will be taken directly to the top of a list.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Bottom of List«, the User will be taken directly to the end of a list.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »+«, the related digit will be incremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast).
• Via »SOFTKEY« »-«, the related digit will be decremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast)
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one digit to the left.
120 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Softkey Description
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken one digit to the right.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter Setting«, the User will call up the parameter setting mode.
• Via »SOFTKEY« »Delete«, data will be deleted.
• Fast forward scrolling is possible via »SOFTKEY« »Fast forward«
• Fast backward scrolling is possible via »SOFTKEY« »Fast backward«
In order to return to the main menu, just keep pressing the Softkey »Arrow-Left« until you arrive at the »Main
Menu».
PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands

The User can control PowerPort-E alternatively by means of keyboard commands (instead of the mouse).
Key Description
á Move up within the navigation tree or parameter list.
â Move down within the navigation tree or parameter list.
ß Collapse the tree item or select a folder on a higher level.
à Expands the tree item or selects a sub-folder.
Numpad + Expands the tree item.
Numpad - Collapses the tree item.
Home Moves to the top of the active window.
End Moves to the bottom of the active window.
Ctrl+O Opens the file opening dialog. Allows browsing through the file system for an existing
device file.
Ctrl+N Creates a new parameter file by means of a template.
Ctrl+S Saves the actual loaded parameter file.
F1 Displays the on-line help information.
F2 Loads device data.
www.eaton.com 121
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Key Description
F5 Reloads the displayed data of a device.
Ctrl+F5 Enables the automatic refresh.
Ctrl+Shift+T Moves back to the navigation window.
Ctrl+F6 Walks through the tabular forms (detail windows).
Page á Moves to the previous value (parameter setting).
Page â Moves to the next value (parameter setting).
122 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
PowerPort-E
PowerPort-E is software that is used to configure a device and read data from a device. PowerPort-E provides
the following:
• Menu controlled parameter setting including validity checks;

• Off-line configuration of all relay types;
• Reading and evaluation of statistical data and measuring values;
• Commissioning Support (Forcing Relays, Disarming Relays);
• Display of the device status; and
• Fault analysis via event and fault recorder.
PowerPort-E 3.0 or higher supports reading parameter files generated by older

versions of PowerPort-E. Parameter files generated by PowerPort-E 3.0 and
higher cannot be read by older versions of PowerPort-E.
Installation of PowerPort-E
Port 52152 must not be blocked by a Firewall. If it is, the connection will be
blocked.
If the Windows Vista User Access Control pops up while installing PowerPort-E,
please “Allow” all installation requirements concerning PowerPort-E.
System Requirements: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7).
To install PowerPort-E:
• Double-click on the installation file with the left mouse button.
• Confirm by pressing the »Continue« button in the INFO frame.
• Select an installation path or confirm the standard installation path by mouse click on the »Continue«
button.
• Confirm the entry for the suggested installation folder by mouse click on the »Continue« button.
• Start the installation process by mouse click on the »Install« button.
• Finish the installation procedure by mouse click on the »Complete« button.
If the suggested installation folder was chosen in the procedure above, the User can now call up the program via
[Start > Programs > Eaton Relays> PowerPort-E].
www.eaton.com 123
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Uninstalling PowerPort-E
Via the [Start>System Control >Software] menu, the PowerPort-E application can be uninstalled from the com-
puter.
Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device

Set Up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows 2000
After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so
that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E
application.
To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem cable is
needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem Cable«).
If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a special
USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly installed,
communication with the device can be established using the CD provided (see
the next section).
The connection of the PC/notebook to the device MUST NOT be

protected/encrypted via a smartcard.
If the network connection wizard asks to encrypt the connection via a smartcard
or not, please choose »Do not use the smartcard«.
Setting Up/Configuring the Connection
• Connect the PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable.
• Start the PowerPort-E application.
• Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
• Click on »Serial Connection«.
• Click the »Settings« button.
• When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.
• If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in.
Confirm the pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« with »OK«.
• The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.
• Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device shall be connected.
• Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window.
124 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Do not change the connection name appearing in window »Name of the connection« and click the
button »Complete«.
• Finally, you arrive again in the window »Device Installation« from where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.
Due to a problem in Windows 2000, it is possible that the automatically made

communication settings are not correctly adopted. In order to overcome this
problem, proceed as follows after setting up the serial connection.
• Select »Serial Connection«.
• Click on the »Settings« button.
• Change the register card to »General«.
• Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers Com X« is

selected in the »Drop Down Menu«. X = the interface number where the
User has connected the null modem cable.
• Click the »Configure« button.
• Ensure that the »Hardware Flowing Control« is activated.
• Ensure that a baud rate »115200« is selected.
Set Up a Serial Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows XP

After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so
that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E
application.
To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem cable is
needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem Cable«).
If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a special
USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly installed,
communication with the device can be established using the CD provided (see
the next section).
Setting Up/Configuring the Connection
• Connect your PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable.
• Click on »Serial Connection«.
www.eaton.com 125
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.
• If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in.
Confirm the following pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« by selecting »OK«.
• The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.
• Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device will be connected.
• Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window.
• Do not change the connection name appearing in the »Name of the connection« window and click the
»Complete« button.
• Finally, you arrive again in the »Device Installation« window where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Serial /RS232

Device
Example
Protective
Relay
RS232
PowerPort-E
126 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Set up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows Vista or Windows 7

Establishing the connection between PowerPort-E and the device is a three step procedure.
1. Installing PowerPort-E (the application itself)
2. Installing a (virtual) modem (that is a precondition for TCP/IP communication via a null modem cable)/
(to be done within the Windows Phone and Modem dialog).
3. Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device (to be done within
PowerPort-E).
1. Installation of PowerPort-E (the application itself).
• Refer to the “Installation of PowerPort-E” (earlier in this section).
2. Installation of the (virtual) modem.
• Open the Windows Start menu and type “Phone and Modem” and RETURN.
• This opens the “Phone and Modem” Dialog.
• Go to the »Modem« tab.
• Click on the »Add« button.
• The Hardware Wizard window “Install New Modem” pops up.
• Set the check box “Don´t detect my modem; I will select it from a list”.
• Click on the »Next« button.
• Select Communications cable between two computers.
• Choose the correct COM-Port.
• Click on the »Finish« button.
• Select the new added modem and click on the »Properties« button.
• Go to the »General« tab.
• Click on the »Change settings« button.
• Within the Drop-Down Menu, set the correct baud rate = 115200.
• Close this dialog with the »OK« button.
• Close the Phone and Modem dialog with the »OK« button.
• You have to reboot your computer now!
3. Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device.
• Connect the device to the PC/notebook via a correct null modem cable.
• Run PowerPort-E.
• Call up »Device Connection« within the menu »Device Connection«.
• Click on the »Settings« button.
• A connection wizard will pop up asking you How do you want to connect.
• Choose »Dial-up«.
• The telephone number must not be empty. Please enter any number (e.g. 1).
• The User name and password can be ignored.
• Click on the »OK« button.
www.eaton.com 127
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Establishing the Serial Connection Via a USB-/RS232-Adapter

If your PC/notebook does not have an RS-232 interface, an USB-/RS232-Adapter+Null Modem Cable can be
used.
Only an adapter approved by Eaton Corporation may be used. First install the
adapter (with the related driver that you can find on the CD) and then establish
the connection (PowerPort-E => Device). The adapters must support very high
speed data transfer.
USB/RS232 Cable Assemblies:
Style Number Description

66B2214G01 Null Modem Cable
66B2214G02 USB to RS232 Adapter
66B2214G03 Null modem and USB to RS232 Adapter
Set-up a Connection Via Ethernet - TCP/IP
Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses
(In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network or
establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device based on a
wrong entered IP address.
Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to death,
personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment.
In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and maintain a
list with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices.
The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to be
established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at the HMI
of the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the IP address
with the list. If the addresses are identical, establish the connection. If they are
not, DO NOT establish the connection.
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your device
is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Part 1: Set the TCP/IP Parameters at the panel (Device).
Call up the »Device parameter/TCP/IP« menu at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
• TCP/IP address
• Subnet mask
• Gateway
128 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Part 2: Setting the IP address within PowerPort-E
• Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E.
• Set the radio button Network Connection.
• Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected.
PowerPort-E
TCP/IP
IP-Address
Device
Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP/IP
www.eaton.com 129
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Or:
PowerPort-E
TCP/IP
Ethernet
TCP/IP
TCP/IP TCP/IP
IP-Address
IP-Address
IP-Address
Protective Protective
...
Relay Relay
Device Device Device

Example Example Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP /IP
Set-up a Connection Via Modbus Tunnel
Establishing a connection via a Gateway (TCP/IP)/Modbus RTU to the device is

only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Part 1: If you don´t know the Slave ID of the device that should be connected via Modbus Tunnel, it can be read
out at the device.
130 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Call up the menu »Device parameter/Modbus« at the HMI (panel) and read out the Slave ID:
Part 2: Setting the IP address of the gateway and the Slave ID of the device that is to be connected via Modbus
tunnel using PowerPort-E
• Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E.
• Set the radio button Modbus TCP Gateway.
• Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected.
• Enter the Slave ID of the device.
PowerPort-E
TCP/IP
IP-Address Power Xpert Gateway
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU Modbus RTU

SLAVE ID n
SLAVE ID 2
SLAVE ID 3
Protective Protective
...
Relay Relay
Device Device Device

Example Example Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Modbus Tunnel
www.eaton.com 131
IM02602007E EDR-5000
PowerPort-E Troubleshooting
• Make sure that the Windows service Telephony is started. In [Start>System Control >Administration
>Services] the service »Telephony« must be visible and must have been started. If not, the service has
to be started.
• For establishing the connection, the User needs to have sufficient rights (administration rights).
• If a firewall is installed on your computer, TCP/IP port 52152 must have been released.
• If your computer does not have a serial interface, the User needs a USB-to-serial-adapter, approved by
Eaton Corporation. This adapter has to be properly installed.
• Ensure that a null modem cable is used (a standard serial cable without control wires does not enable
communication).
If a serial interface connection can not be established, and the User is running a
Windows XP Operating System, the following may be the cause.
If a serial interface was selected in the connection assistant, it may be that this is
not entered correctly in the dial-up network due to a bug in the Windows
operating system. Your attention is drawn to this problem by the operational
software and the error message »Warning, invalid connection setting« will be
shown.
To solve this problem, you need administration rights.
Please proceed as follows.
• Select the menu item »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
• Select »Serial Connection«.
• Change the register card to »General«.
• Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers (Com X)« is

selected in the Drop Down menu. »X« = the interface number where the null
modem cable is connected.
132 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
If the message »Warning, invalid connection settings« appears during

establishment of the connection, it indicates that the connection adjustments
chosen are not correct.
If this warning is displayed, the User may respond as follows.
»Yes«: (to set up a completely new connection).

By selecting »Yes«, all adjustments are canceled and the connection assistant is
opened again for renewed adjustment of the connection to the device.
This procedure is advisable in case basic adjustments cannot be modified via the
characteristics dialog (e.g.: if a new additional serial interface has been installed
on the system).
»No«: (to modify the existing dial-up network entry).

Selecting »No« opens the dialog for characteristics of the connection settings.
During the dialog, it is possible to correct invalid settings (e.g.: the recommended
baud rate).
»Cancel«:
The warning is ignored and the connection adjustments remain as they are set.
This procedure is accepted for a limited time, but the User is required to establish
a correct connection at a later time.
PowerPort-E Persistent Connection Problems

In the case of persistent connection problems, the User should remove all connection settings and establish
them again. In order to remove all connection settings, please proceed as follows.
1. Remove the Settings for the Dial-up Network.
• Close PowerPort-E.
• Call up the »Control Panel«.
• Choose »Network & Internet«.
• On the left side, click on »Manage Network Connections«.
• Right click on »"Protective Device Name" Direct Connection«.
• Choose »Delete« from the shortcut menu.
• Click on the »OK« button.
2. Remove the (Virtual) Modem.
• Call up the »Control Panel«.
• Choose »Hardware & Sound«.
• Choose »Phone & Modem Options«.
• Click on the correct (in case there is more than one) entry »Connection cable between two computers«.
• Click on the »Remove« button.
www.eaton.com 133
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E

• Make sure the connection has been established properly.
• Connect your PC with the device via a null modem cable.
• Select »Receiving Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E
By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button, only
modified parameters are transmitted into the device.
Parameter modifications are indicated by a red “star symbol” in front of the

parameter.
The star symbol (in the device tree window) indicates that parameters in the
opened file (within PowerPort-E) differ from parameters stored on your local hard
disk.
By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button, the
User can transmit all parameters that are marked by this symbol.
If a parameter file is saved on the local hard drive, these parameters are no longer
classified to be modified and cannot be transmitted via the »Transfer only
modified parameters into the device« button.
In case the User has loaded and modified a parameter file from the device and
saved it to the local hard drive without transferring the parameters into the device
beforehand, the User cannot use the »Transfer only modified parameters into the
device« button. In this case, use the »Transfer all parameters into the device«
button.
The »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button only works if
modified parameters are available in the PowerPort-E application.
In contrast, all parameters of the device are transferred when the »Transfer all
parameters into the device« button is pressed (provided all device parameters are
valid).
• In order to (re-)transfer changed parameters into the device, select »Transfer all parameters into the
device« in the »Device« menu.
• Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall the parameters be overwritten into the device?«.
• Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window.
• The changed data is transferred to the device and adopted.
• Confirm the inquiry »Parameters successfully updated?«. It is recommended to save the parameters
into a local file on your hard drive. Confirm »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?“« with »Yes«
(recommended). Select a suitable folder on the hard disk.
134 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Confirm the chosen folder by clicking »Save«.
• The changed parameter data are now saved in the chosen folder.
Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E

How to Save Device Data on a PC
Click on »Save as ...« in the »File« menu. Specify a name, choose a folder on the hard disk, and save the
device data accordingly.
Printing of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E (Setting List)

The »Printing« menu offers the following options:
• Printer settings;
• Page preview;
• Printing; and
• Exporting the selected print range into a "txt" file.
The printing menu of the PowerPort-E software offers different types of printing ranges.
• Printing of the complete parameter tree:

All values and parameters of the present parameter file are printed.
• Printing of the displayed working window:

Only the data shown on the relevant working window are printed (i.e.: this applies, if at least one window
is opened).
• Printing of all opened working windows:

The data shown on all windows are printed (i.e.: this applies only if more than one window is opened).
• Printing of the device parameter tree as from a shown position on:

All data and parameters of the device parameter tree are printed as from the position/marking in the
navigation window. Below this selection, the complete name of the marking is additionally displayed.
Exporting Data as a “txt” File Via PowerPort-E

Within the print menu [File>Print], the User can choose »Export into File« in order to export the device data into
a “txt” file.
When exporting data, only the actual selected printing range will be exported into
a “txt” file. That means that if the User has chosen the “Complete device
parameter tree” printing range, then the “Complete device parameter tree” will be
exported. But, if the User has chosen the “Actual working window” printing
range, only that range of data will be exported.
This is the only method available to export data via PowerPort-E.
If the User exports a “txt” file, the content of this file is encoded as Unicode. That
means that, if the User wants to edit this file, the application must support
Unicode encoded files (e.g.: Microsoft Office 2003 or higher).
www.eaton.com 135
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E
In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off-line) into the
device, the following information must be located:
• Type code (written on the top of the device/type label); and
• Version of the device model (can be found in menu [Device

Parameters\Version].
The PowerPort-E application also enables the User to create a configuration/parameter file off-line using a
“Device Model”. The advantage of using a device model is that the User can pre-configure a device by setting
parameters in advance.
The User can also read the parameter file out of the device, further process it off-line (e.g.: from the office) and
finally re-transfer it to the device.
The User can either:
• Load an existing parameter file from a device (please refer to the Section “Loading Device Data When
Using PowerPort-E");
• Create a new parameter file (see below); or
• Open a locally saved parameter file (backup).
In order to create a new device/parameter file by way of a device template off-line.
• In order to create a new off-line parameter file, select »Create new parameter file« within the »File«
menu.
• A working window pops- up. Please make sure that you select the right device type with the correct
version and configuration.
• Finally click on »Apply«.
• In order to save the device configuration, select »Save« out of the »File« menu.
• Within the »Modify Device Configuration (Typecode)« menu, the User can modify the device
configuration or simply find out the type code of the current selection.
If the User wants to transfer the parameter file into a device, please refer to Section “Restoring Device Data
When using PowerPort-E”.
136 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Measuring Values
Read Out Measured Values
In the »Operation/Measured Values« menu, both measured and calculated values can be viewed. The
measured values are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on the type of device).
Read Out of Measured Values Via PowerPort-E

• If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
• If the device data have not been loaded, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the »Device«
menu.
• Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click on the »Measured Values« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree.
• Double click the »Standard Values« or »Special values« within the »Measured values« tree.
• The measured and calculated values are now shown in tabular form in the window.
To have the measuring data read in a cyclic manner, select »Auto refresh« in the
»View« menu. The measured values are read out about every two seconds.
Measurement Display
Menu [Operation\General Settings] offers options to change the display of measured values within the HMI and
Smart view.
Scaling of Measured values
By means of the parameter »Scaling« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed within
the HMI and PowerPort-E:
• Per Unit quantities

• Primary quantities
• Secondary quantities
Power Units (applies only for devices with power measurement)
By means of the parameter »Power Units« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed
within the HMI and PowerPort-E:
• Power Auto Scaling

• kW, kVAr or kVA
• MW, MVAr or MVA
• GW, GVAr or GVA
Energy Units (applies only for devices with energy measurement)
By means of the parameter »Energy Units« the User can determine how measured values are to be displayed
www.eaton.com 137
IM02602007E EDR-5000
within the HMI and PowerPort-E:
• Energy Auto Scaling

• kWh, kVArh or kVAh
• MWh, MVArh or MVAh
• GWh, GVArh or GVAh
Temperature Unit (applies only for devices with temperature measurement)
By means of the parameter »Temperature Unit« the User can determine how measured values are to be
displayed within the HMI and PowerPort-E:
• ° Celsius
• ° Fahrenheit
Current - Measured Values

CT
If the device is not equipped with an voltage measuring card the first measuring input on the first current
measuring card (slot with the lowest number) will be used as the reference angle (»IA«).
Value Description Menu Path

IA Fund. Measured value: Phase current [Operation
(Fundamental) /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IB Fund. Measured value: Phase current [Operation
/Current Fund.]
IC Fund. Measured value: Phase current [Operation
/Current Fund.]
IX meas Fund. Measured value (measured): IX [Operation
/Current Fund.]
IR calc Fund. Measured value (calculated): IR [Operation
/Current Fund.]
I0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Zero current [Operation
/Current Fund.]
I1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Positive [Operation
phase sequence current (Fundamental) /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
I2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced [Operation
load current (Fundamental) /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor IA /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
138 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Angle IB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor IB /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor IC /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IX meas Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor IX meas /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IR calc Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor IR calc /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle I0 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation
Sequence System /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle I1 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of [Operation
Positive Sequence System /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle I2 Measured value (calculated): Angle of [Operation
Negative Sequence System /Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IA RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IB RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IC RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IX meas RMS Measured value (measured): IX (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total [Operation
Harmonic Distortion /Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total [Operation
/Current RMS]
%IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total [Operation
/Current RMS]
IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total [Operation
Harmonic Current /Measured Values
/Current RMS]
www.eaton.com 139
IM02602007E EDR-5000

IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total [Operation
/Current RMS]
IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total [Operation
/Current RMS]
%(I2/I1) Measured value (calculated): I2/I1, phase [Operation
sequence will be taken into account /Measured Values
automatically. /Current Fund.]
Voltage - Measured Values

VT
The first measuring input on the first measuring card (slot with the lowest number) is used as the reference
angle. E.g. »VA« respectively »VAB«.

f Measured Value: Frequency [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VAB Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VBC Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VCA Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VA Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VB Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VC Fund. Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VX meas Fund. Measured value (measured): VX measured [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
VR calc Fund. Measured value (calculated): VR [Operation
/Voltage Fund.]
V0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical [Operation
components Zero voltage(Fundamental) /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
140 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

components positive phase sequence /Measured Values
voltage(Fundamental) /Voltage Fund.]
components negative phase sequence /Measured Values
voltage(Fundamental) /Voltage Fund.]
VAB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
(RMS) /Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VBC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VCA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VX measured [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): VR (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
Angle VAB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VAB /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VBC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VBC /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VCA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VCA /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VA Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VA /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VB Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VB /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VC Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VC /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
www.eaton.com 141
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Angle VX meas Measured Value: Angle of Phasor VX meas [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VR calc Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of [Operation
Phasor VR calc /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V0 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation
Sequence System /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V1 Measured Value (calculated): Angle of [Operation
Positive Sequence System /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V2 Measured value (calculated): Angle of [Operation
Negative Sequence System /Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
%(V2/V1) Measured value (calculated): V2/V1, phase [Operation
sequence will be taken into account /Measured Values
automatically. /Voltage Fund.]
%VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total [Operation
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental /Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
%VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
%VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
%VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
%VB THD Measured value (calculated): VB Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
%VC THD Measured value (calculated): VC Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
142 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

VB THD Measured value (calculated): VB Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
VC THD Measured value (calculated): VC Total [Operation
/Voltage RMS]
Power - Measured Values

Disp PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55D - [Operation
Displacement Power Factor /Measured Values
/Power]
Wh Fwd Positive Active Power is consumed active [Operation
energy /Measured Values
/Energy]
Wh Rev Negative Active Power (Fed Energy) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Lag Positive Reactive Power is consumed [Operation
Reactive Energy /Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Lead Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VAh Net Net VA Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wh Net Net Watt Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Net Net VAr Hours [Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Start Date/Time Energy counters run since... (Date and time [Operation
of last reset) /Measured Values
/Energy]
Syst VA RMS Measured VAs (RMS) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
Syst W RMS Measured Watts. Active power (P- = Fed [Operation
Active Power, P+ = Consumed Active /Measured Values
Power) (RMS) /Power]
Syst VAr RMS Measured VARs. Reactive power (Q- = Fed [Operation
Reactive Power, Q+ = Consumed Reactive /Measured Values
Power) (RMS) /Power]
Apt PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55A - [Operation
Apparent Power Factor /Measured Values
/Power]
www.eaton.com 143
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Energy Counter
ECr
Global Parameters of the Energy Counter Module

Power Units Power Units Power Auto Scaling, Power Auto [Operation
kW/kVAr/kVA, Scaling /General Settings]
MW/MVAr/MVA,
GW/GVAr/GVA
Energy Units Energy Units Energy Auto Scaling, Energy Auto [Operation
kWh/kVArh/kVAh, Scaling /General Settings]
MWh/MVArh/MVAh,
GWh/GVArh/GVAh
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module

Res all Energy Reset of all Energy Counters Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Cr Active /Reset]
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)

Name Description
Cr Oflw VAh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net
Cr Oflw Wh Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net
Cr Oflw Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd
Cr Oflw Wh Rev Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev
Cr Oflw VArh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net
Cr Oflw VArh Lag Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag
Cr Oflw VArh Lead Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead
VAh Net Res Cr Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter
Wh Net Res Cr Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter
Wh Fwd Res Cr Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter
Wh Rev Res Cr Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter
VArh Net Res Cr Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter
VArh Lag Res Cr Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter
VArh Lead Res Cr Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter
Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
Cr OflwW VAh Net Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wh Net Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon
Cr OflwW Wh Rev Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon
144 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Cr OflwW VArh Net Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon
Cr OflwW VArh Lag Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon
Cr OflwW VArh Lead Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon
www.eaton.com 145
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Statistics
Statistics
In the »Operation/Statistics« menu, the minimum, maximum, and mean values of the measured and calculated
quantities can be found. The statistics are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on
the type of device and the device planning).
In the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu, the User can either set a fixed synchronization time and a
calculation interval or start and stop the statistics via a function (e.g.: digital input).
Read Out Statistics

• Call up the main menu.
• Call up the »Operation/Statistics« sub-menu.
• Call up either the »Standard values« or »Special values«.
Statistics to Be Read Out Via PowerPort-E

• If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
• Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree.
• Double click on the »Standard values« or »Special values« icon.
• In the window, the statistical data are shown in tabular form.
The values can be read out cyclically. For this purpose, please select »Auto Refresh« out of the »View« menu.
Statistics (Configuration)
The Statistics module can be configured within the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu.
The time interval, that is taken into account for the calculation of the statistics, can either be limited by a fixed
duration or it can be limited by a start function (freely assignable signal from the »assignment list« menu).
Fixed Duration:
If the statistics module is set to a fixed duration/time interval, the minimum, maximum, and average values
will be calculated and displayed continuously on the basis of this duration/time interval.
Start Function (Flexible Duration):
If the statistics module is to be initiated by a start function, the statistics will not be updated until the start
function becomes true (rising edge). At the same time, a new time interval will be started.
146 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Statistics (Configuration) Via PowerPort-E

• If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in
the»Device« menu.
• Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Device Parameter« navigation tree.
• Configure the Statistics module.
Direct Commands
ResFc all Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max) Active /Reset]
ResFc I Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Demand (avg, peak avg) Active /Reset]
ResFc P Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Demand (avg, peak avg) Active /Reset]
ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
ResFc Max Resetting of all Maximum values Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module

ResFc Max Resetting of all Maximum values 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min Resetting of all Minimum values 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
Start I Demand Start Current demand by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
via: StartFct /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start I Demand Start of the calculation, if the assigned 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
Fc signal becomes true. /Statistics
/Demand
Only available if: Start I Demand via: = /Current Demand]
StartFct
ResFc I Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
Demand (avg, peak avg) /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
www.eaton.com 147
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Duration I Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para
Demand 5 s, /Statistics
Only available if: Start I Demand via: = 10 s, /Demand
Duration 15 s, /Current Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window I Window configuration Sliding, Fixed [Device Para
Demand Fixed /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start P Start Active Power demand by: Duration, Duration [Device Para
Demand via: StartFct /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Start P Start of the calculation, if the assigned 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
Demand Fc signal becomes true. /Statistics
/Demand
Only available if: Start P Demand via: = /Power Demand]
StartFct
ResFc P Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
Demand (avg, peak avg) /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
148 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Duration P Recording time 2 s, 15 s [Device Para
Demand 5 s, /Statistics
Only available if: Start P Demand via: = 10 s, /Demand
Duration 15 s, /Power Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window P Window configuration Sliding, Sliding [Device Para
Demand Fixed /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module

StartFc 1-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para
1 (Update the displayed Demand ) /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
StartFc 2-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para
2 (Update the displayed Demand ) /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc I Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of [Device Para
Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg) /Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
ResFc P Demand-I State of the module input: Resetting of [Device Para
Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg) /Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc Max-I State of the module input: Resetting of all [Device Para
Maximum values /Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min-I State of the module input: Resetting of all [Device Para
Minimum values /Statistics
/Min / Max]
www.eaton.com 149
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Signals of the Statistics Module

Name Description
ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power
Demand, Min, Max)
ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values
Counters of the Module Statistics

MeasPointNo Each measuring point that is taken over by [Operation
the statistics increments this counter. By /Count and RevData
means of this counter, the User can check /Statistics]
whether the statistics are alive and if data
are being acquired.
MeasPointNo2 Each measuring point that is taken over by [Operation
the statistics increments this counter. By /Count and RevData
means of this counter, the User can check /Statistics]
whether the statistics are alive and if data
are being acquired.
Res Cr I Demand Number of resets since last booting. The [Operation
time-stamp shows date and time of the last /Statistics
reset. /Demand
/Current Demand]
Res Cr P Demand Number of resets since last booting. The [Operation
reset. /Demand
/Power Demand]
Res Cr Min values Number of resets since last booting. The [Operation
reset. /Min
/Power]
Res Cr Max values Number of resets since last booting. The [Operation
reset. /Max
/Power]
Current - Statistic Values

I1 max Fund. Maximum value positive phase sequence [Operation
current (Fundamental) /Statistics
/Max
/Current]
150 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

I1 min Fund. Minimum value positive phase sequence [Operation
current (Fundamental) /Statistics
/Min
/Current]
I2 max Fund. Maximum value unbalanced load current [Operation
(Fundamental) /Statistics
/Max
/Current]
I2 min Fund. Minimum value unbalanced load current [Operation
(Fundamental) /Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IA max RMS IA maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IA avg RMS IA average value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IA min RMS IA minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IB max RMS IB maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IB avg RMS IB average value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IB min RMS IB minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IC max RMS IC maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IC avg RMS IC average value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IC min RMS IC minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IX meas max RMS Measured value: IX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
www.eaton.com 151
IM02602007E EDR-5000

IX meas min RMS Measured value: IX minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IR calc max RMS Measured value (calculated): IR maximum [Operation
value (RMS) /Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IR calc min RMS Measured value (calculated): IR minimum [Operation
/Min
/Current]
%(I2/I1) max Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 [Operation
maximum value, phase sequence will be /Statistics
taken into account automatically /Max
/Current]
%(I2/I1) min Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 minimum [Operation
value, phase sequence will be taken into /Statistics
account automatically /Min
/Current]
IA Peak demand IA Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IB Peak demand IB Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IC Peak demand IC Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Voltage - Statistic Values

f max Max. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
f min Min. frequency value [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
V1 max Fund. Maximum value: Symmetrical components [Operation
positive phase sequence /Statistics
voltage(Fundamental) /Max
/Voltage]
152 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

V1 min Fund. Minimum value: Symmetrical components [Operation
positive phase sequence /Statistics
voltage(Fundamental) /Min
/Voltage]
V2 max Fund. Maximum value: Symmetrical components [Operation
negative phase sequence /Statistics
voltage(Fundamental) /Max
/Voltage]
V2 min Fund. Minimum value: Symmetrical components [Operation
negative phase sequence /Statistics
voltage(Fundamental) /Min
/Voltage]
VAB max RMS VAB maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VAB min RMS VAB minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VBC max RMS VBC maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VBC min RMS VBC minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VCA max RMS VCA maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VCA min RMS VCA minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VA max RMS VA maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VA min RMS VA minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VB max RMS VB maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VB min RMS VB minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com 153
IM02602007E EDR-5000

VC max RMS VC maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VC min RMS VC minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VX meas max RMS Measured value: VX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VX meas min RMS Measured value: VX minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VR calc max RMS Measured value (calculated): VR maximum [Operation
/Max
/Voltage]
VR calc min RMS Measured value (calculated): VR minimum [Operation
/Min
/Voltage]
%(V2/V1) max Measured value (calculated): V2/V1 [Operation
maximum value, phase sequence will be /Statistics
taken into account automatically /Max
/Voltage]
%(V2/V1) min Measured value (calculated): V2/V1 [Operation
minimum value , phase sequence will be /Statistics
taken into account automatically /Min
/Voltage]
Power - Statistic Values

Disp PF max Maximum value of the 55D - Displacement [Operation
Power Factor /Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Disp PF min Minimum value of the 55D - Displacement [Operation
/Min
/Power]
Syst VA max Maximum value of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
154 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Syst VA avg Average of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Syst VA min Minimum value of the apparent power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Syst W max Maximum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Syst W avg Average of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Syst W min Minimum value of the active power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Syst VAr max Maximum value of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Syst VAr avg Average of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Syst VAr min Minimum value of the reactive power [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Apt PF max Maximum value of the 55A - Apparent [Operation
/Max
/Power]
Apt PF min Minimum value of the 55A - Apparent [Operation
/Min
/Power]
VA Peak demand VA Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Watt Peak demand WATTS Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
VAr Peak demand VARs Peak value, RMS value [Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
www.eaton.com 155
IM02602007E EDR-5000
System Alarms
Available Elements:
SysA
Within the System Alarms menu [SysA] the User can configure:
• General Settings (activate/inactivate the Demand Management, optional assign a signal, that will block
the Demand Management);
• Power Protection (please refer to section 32, 32V, 32VA);
• Demand Management (Power and Current); and
• THD Protection.
Please note, that all thresholds are to be set as primary values.
Demand Management
Demand is the average of system current or power over a time interval (window). Demand management
supports the User to keep energy demand below target values bound by contract (with the energy supplier). If
the contractual target values are exceeded, extra charges are to be paid to the energy supplier.
Therefore, demand management helps the User detect and avoid averaged peak loads that are taken into
account for the billing. In order to reduce the demand charge respective to demand rate, peak loads, if possible,
should be diversified. That means, if possible, avoiding large loads at the same time. In order to assist the User
in analyzing the demand, demand management might inform the User by an alarm. The User might also use
demand alarms and assign them on relays in order to perform load shedding (where applicable).
Demand management comprises:
• Watt Demand (Active Power);

• VAr Demand (Reactive Power);
• VA Demand (Apparent Power); and
• Current Demand.
Configuring the Demand

Configuring the demand is a two step procedure. Proceed as follows.
Step1. Configure the general settings within the [Device Para/Statistics/Demand] menu:
• Set the trigger source to »Duration«.

• Select a time base for the »window«.
• Determine if the window is »fixed« or »sliding«.
The interval time (window) can be set to fixed or sliding.
Example for a fixed window: If the range is set for 15 minutes, the protective device calculates
the average current or power over the past 15 minutes and updates the value every 15 minutes.
Example for a sliding window: If the sliding window is selected and the interval is set to 15
minutes, the protective device calculates and updates the average current or power continuously,
for the past 15 minutes (the newest measuring value replaces the oldest measuring value
continuously).
156 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Window configuration = Sliding
Duration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
t-Delay
Average Calculation Pickup
0
Sliding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
t-Delay
Average Calculation Pickup
0
Sliding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Average Calculation t-Delay

Pickup
0
Window configuration = Fixed
Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation
Duration Duration Duration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation Average Calculation
Average Calculation t-Delay

Pickup
0
www.eaton.com 157
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Step 2. In addition, the Demand specific settings have to be configured in the [System Para/System
Alarms/Demand] menu:
• Determine if the demand should generate an alarm or if it should run in the silent mode
(Alarm active/inactive);
• Set the threshold; and
• Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm.
Peak Demand
The protective device also saves the peak demand values for current and power. The quantities represent the
largest demand value since the demand values were last reset. Peak demands for current and system power
are date and time stamped.
Within the [Operation/Demand] menu, the current Demand and Peak demand values can be seen.
Min. and Max. Values.

Within the Operation menu the minimum (min.) and maximum (max.) values can be seen.
Minimum values since last reset: The minimum values are continuously compared to the last minimum value
for that measuring value. If the new value is less than the last minimum, the value is updated. Within the
[Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.
Maximum values since last reset: The maximum values are continuously compared to the last maximum
value for that measuring value. If the new value is greater than the last maximum, the value is updated. Within
the [Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.
THD Protection
In order to supervise power quality, the protective device can monitor the voltage (phase-to-phase) and current
THDs.
Within the [System Para/System Alarms/THD] menu:
• Determine if an alarm is to be issued or not (Alarm active/inactive);

• Set the threshold; and
• Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm.
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management

Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device
Use Planning]
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)

Name Description
Active Signal: Active
ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
158 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak
Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak
Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
Alm Current Demd Signal: Alarm Current demand value
Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak
Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak
Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak
Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value
Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value
Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value
Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, Inactive [SysA
module/element. Active /General Settings]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) 1..n, Assignment List -.- [SysA
blocking of the module/element. This /General Settings]
parameter is only effective if a signal is
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Alarm Alarm Inactive, Inactive [SysA
Active /Power
/Watt]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kW 10000 kW [SysA
/Power
/Watt]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 min 0 min [SysA
/Power
/Watt]
Active /Power
/VAr]
www.eaton.com 159
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kVAr 10000 kVAr [SysA
/Power
/VAr]
/Power
/VAr]
Active /Power
/VA]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kVA 10000 kVA [SysA
/Power
/VA]
/Power
/VA]
Active /Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kW 10000 kW [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
Active /Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kVAr 20000 kVAr [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
Active /Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 40000000 kVA 20000 kVA [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 60 in 0 min [SysA
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
160 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Active /Demand
/Current Demand]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 10 – 500000 A 500 A [SysA
/Demand
/Current Demand]
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Active /THD
/I THD]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 500000 A 500 A [SysA
/THD
/I THD]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 3600 s 0s [SysA
/THD
/I THD]
Active /THD
/V THD]
Threshold Threshold (to be entered as primary value) 1 – 500000 V 10000 V [SysA
/THD
/V THD]
t-Delay Tripping Delay 0 – 3600 s 0s [SysA
/THD
/V THD]
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management

ExBlo-I Module Input State: External Blocking [SysA
/General Settings]
www.eaton.com 161
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Resets
Collective Acknowledgments for Latched Signals:
Collective Acknowledgments
LEDs Relay Outputs SCADA Pending LEDs+

Trip Command Relay Outputs+
SCADA+
Pending
Trip Command
Via PowerPort-E or All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs All SCADA All pending trip All at once:
at the panel all... at once: signals at once: commands at
Where? Where?
can be once:
[Operation\ Where? Where? [Operation\
acknowledged. Acknowledge] [Operation\ [Operation\ Where? Acknowledge]
Acknowledge] Acknowledge] [Operation\
At the panel, the Acknowledge]
[Operation\
Acknowledge] menu
can directly be
accessed via the
»C« key.
External All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs at All SCADA signals at All Pending Trip All at once:
Acknowledg- once: once: commands at once:
ment*: Where? Where?
Via a signal from the Within the Where? Where? Where? Within the
assignment list (e.g.: Ex Acknowledge Within the Within the Within the Ex Acknowledge
a digital Input) all... menu. Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge menu.
can be menu. menu. menu.
acknowledged.
• The External Acknowledgment might be disabled if parameter »Ex Acknowledgment«is set to »inactive«
within menu [Device Para/Ex Acknowledge]. This blocks also the acknowledgment via Communication (e.g.
Modbus).
Options for Individual Acknowledgments for Latched Signals:
Individual Acknowledgment
LEDs Relay Output Pending

Trip Command
Via a signal from the Single LED: Relay Output: Pending Trip Command.
assignment list (e.g.: a digital Where?
Input), a single... can be Where? Where? Within the module
acknowledged. Within the Configuration menu Within the Configuration menu TripControl
of this single LED. of this single Relay Output.
If the User is within the parameter setting mode, the User cannot acknowledge.
In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel, the User must
first leave the parameter mode by pressing either the push-buttons »Ack/Rst« or
»OK« before accessing the »Acknowledgements« menu via the push-button.
162 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Manual Acknowledgment
• Press the »Ack/Rst« button on the panel.
• Select the item to be acknowledged via the softkeys:
• Relay Outputs;
• LEDs;
• SCADA;
• A trip command; or
• All the above mentioned items at once.
• Press the Softkey with the »Wrench-Symbol«.

• Enter the password.
Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E
• If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the
»Device« menu.
• Double click on the »Acknowledgment« icon within the operation menu.
• Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be acknowledged.
• Press the »Execute immediately« button.
• Enter the password.
External Acknowledgments
Within the [Ex Acknowledge] menu, the User can assign a signal (e.g.: the state of a digital input) from the
assignment list that:
• Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) LEDs at once;

• Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) Relay Output Contacts at once; or
• Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) SCADA signals at once.
Ack LED
Ex Acknowledge .Ack LED
1..n, Assignment List
Ack RO
Ex Acknowledge .Ack RO
Ack Comm
Ex Acknowledge .Ack Comm
www.eaton.com 163
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Within the [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\TripControl] menu, the User can assign a signal that acknowledges
a pending trip command.
For details, please refer to the Trip Control section.
External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E

• If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the
»Device« menu.
• Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click on the »Ex Acknowledge« icon within the operation menu.
• In the working window, the User can now assign each signal that resets all acknowledgeable LEDs, a
signal that resets all Relay Outputs, a signal that resets the SCADA signals respectively, and a signal
that acknowledges a pending trip command.
External LED - Acknowledgment Signals

The following signals can be used for external acknowledgment of latched LEDs.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
DI-8P X1.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
DI-8 X6.DI 1 Signal: Digital Input
Modbus.Comm Cmd 1 Communication Command
164 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Logic.LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com 165
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
166 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 167
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
168 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 169
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
170 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 171
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
172 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Manual Resets
In the »Operation/Reset« menu, the User can:
• Reset counters;
• Delete records (e.g.: waveform records); and
• Reset special things (like statistics, thermal replica, etc.).
The description of the reset commands can be found within the corresponding
modules.
Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E

»Device« menu.
• Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click the »Reset icon« within the operation menu.
www.eaton.com 173
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be reset or deleted.
The description of the reset commands can be found within the corresponding
modules.
Reset to Factory Defaults
This Function will reset the device to the factory defaults.
All records will be deleted and and the measured values and counters will be
reset. The operation hours counter will be kept.
This Function is available at the HMI only.
• Press the »Ack/Rst-key« during a cold start, in order to access the »Reset« menu.
• Select »Reset to factory default«.
• Confirm »Reset device to factory defaults and reboot« with »Yes« in order to execute the reset to factory
defaults.«
174 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Status Display
In the status display within the »Operation« menu, the present state of all signals can be viewed. This means
the User is able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment. The User can see all
signals sorted by protective elements/modules.
State of the Module Input / Signal Is... Is Shown at the Panel as...
false / »0«
true / »1«
Status Display via PowerPort E

• If PowerPort E is not running, please start the application.
• If the device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from
»Device« menu.
• Double click on the »Status Display« icon within the operational data.
• Double click on a subfolder (e.g. Prot) in order to see e.g. the states of the general alarms.
To have the status display updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic Up-
Date« in the »VIEW« menu.
State of the Module Input / Signal Is... Is Shown in PowerPort-E as...

false / »0« 0
true / »1« 1
No connection to the device ?
www.eaton.com 175
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Operating Panel (HMI)

HMI
Special Parameters of the Panel

The »Device Parameter/HMI« menu is used to define the contrast of the display, the maximum admissible edit
time, and the menu language (after expiration, all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected).
Direct Commands of the Panel

Contrast Contrast 30 - 60 50 [Device Para
/HMI]
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel

t-max Edit If no other key(s) is pressed at the panel, 20 – 3600 s 180 s [Device Para
after expiration of this time, all cached /HMI]
(changed) parameters are canceled.
176 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Recorders
Waveform Recorder
Waveform rec
The waveform recorder works with 32 samples per cycle. It can be started by one of eight start events (selection
from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic).
The waveform record contains the measuring values including the pre-trigger time. By means of PowerPort-
E/Quality Manager (option), the oscillographic curves of the analog (current, voltage) and digital channels/traces
can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form.
The waveform recorder has a storage capacity of 120 s (duration). The amount of records depends on the file
size of each record.
The waveform recorder can be configured in the»Device Parameter/Recorder/Waveform rec« menu.
Determine the maximum recording time to register a waveform event. The maximum total length of a recording
is 10 s (including pre-trigger and post-trigger time).
To trigger the waveform recorder, up to eight signals can be selected from the »Assignment list«. The trigger
events are OR-linked. If a waveform record is written, a new waveform record cannot be triggered until all
trigger signals, which have triggered the previous waveform record, are gone.
Recording is only done for the time the assigned event exists (event controlled), plus the time for the pre- and
post-trigger, but not longer than 10 s. The time for the pre- and post-trigger is to be entered as percent of the
maximum file size.
The post-trigger time will be up to the "Post-trigger time" depending on the

duration of the trigger signal. The post-trigger will be the remaining time of the
"Max file size" but, at maximum, the "Post-trigger time".
Example
The waveform recorder is started by the general activation facility. After the fault has been cleared (plus follow-
up time), the recording process is stopped (but after 10 s at the latest).
The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if a location to which to save the waveform
record is not available. In case »Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded waveform will be overwritten
according to the FIFO principle. If the parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the waveform events will be
stopped until the storage location is manually released.
www.eaton.com 177
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Start: 1
Trigger
Start: 2
Trigger
Start: 3
Trigger
Start: 4
Trigger
OR
Recording
Start: 5 OR
Trigger
Start: 6
Trigger
Start: 7
Trigger
Start: 8
Trigger
Man. Trigger
178 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Start 1 = Prot.Pickup
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
Auto overwriting = Active
t-rec = Max file size Post -trigger time = 25%
Pre-trigger time = 15%

Max file size = 2s
Start 1
1200 ms
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
0
t
Post -trigger time
500 ms
1
0
0
t
t-rec
2000 ms
1
0
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
0 t
www.eaton.com 179
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Start 1 = Prot.Trip
Start 2 = -.-
Start 3 = -.-
Start 4 = -.-
Start 5 = -.-
Start 6 = -.-
Start 7 = -.-
Start 8 = -.-
t-rec < Max file size
Auto overwriting = Active
Post-trigger time = 25%
Start 1 Pre-trigger time = 15%
200 ms Max file size = 2s
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
0
t
Post-trigger time
500 ms
1
0
0
t
t-rec
1000 ms
1
0
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
0
t
180 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Read Out of Waveform Records

Within the »Operation/Waveform rec« menu, the User can:
• Detect the accumulated waveform records.
Within the »Operation/Recorders/Man Trigger« menu, the User can trigger the
waveform recorder manually.
To Read Out the Waveform Recorder with PowerPort-E
• If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
• Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click the »Waveform rec« icon.
• In the window, the waveform records are shown in tabular form.
• A pop-up will appear by double clicking on a waveform record. Choose a folder where the waveform
record is to be saved.
• The User can analyze the waveform records by means of the optionally available Quality Manager by
clicking on »Yes« when asked “Shall the received waveform record be opened by the Quality Manager?"
Deleting Waveform Records

Within the »Operation/Waveform rec« menu, the User can:
• Delete waveform records;
• Choose the waveform record that is to be deleted via »SOFTKEY« »up« and »SOFTKEY« »down«;
• Call up the detailed view of the waveform record via »SOFTKEY« »right«;
• Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »delete«;
• Enter the User password followed by pressing the »OK« key;
• Choose whether only the current or all waveform records should be deleted; and
• Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »OK«.
Deleting Waveform Records Via PowerPort-E
www.eaton.com 181
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click the »Waveform rec« icon.
• In the window, the waveform records are shown in tabular form.
• In order to delete a waveform record, double click on
(the red x) in front of the waveform record and confirm.
Direct Commands of the Waveform Recorder Module

Man. Trigger Manual Trigger False, False [Operation
True /Recorders
/Man. Trigger]
Res all rec Reset all records Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Waveform Recorder Module

Start: 1 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Prot.Pickup [Device Para
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
Start: 2 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Prot.Trip [Device Para
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
Start: 3 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Recorders
/Waveform rec]
182 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Auto If there is no more free memory capacity Inactive, Active [Device Para
overwriting left, the oldest file will be overwritten. Active /Recorders
/Waveform rec]
Post-trigger The post trigger time is settable up to a 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para
time maximum of 50% of the Maximum file size /Recorders
setting. The post-trigger will be the /Waveform rec]
remaining time of the "Max file size" but at
maximum "Post-trigger time".
Pre-trigger time The pre trigger time is settable up to a 0 - 50% 20% [Device Para
maximum of 50% of the Maximum file size /Recorders
setting. /Waveform rec]
Max file size The maximum storage capacity per record 0.1 – 10.0 s 2s [Device Para
is 10 seconds, including pre-trigger and /Recorders
post-trigger time. The waveform recorder /Waveform rec]
has a total storage capacity of 120 seconds.
Waveform Recorder Module Input States

Start1-I State of the module input:: Trigger event / [Device Para
start recording if: /Recorders
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
/Waveform rec]
Waveform Recorder Module Signals
Name Description
Recording Signal: Recording
www.eaton.com 183
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Memory full Signal: Memory Full
Clear fail Signal: Clear Failure in Memory
Res all rec Signal: All records deleted
Res record Signal: Delete Record
Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Special Parameters of the Waveform Recorder
Value Description Default Size Menu Path

Rec state Recording state Ready Ready, [Operation
Recording, /Status display
Writing file, /Recorders
Trigger Blo /Waveform rec]
Error code Error code OK OK, [Operation
Write err, /Status display
Clear fail, /Recorders
Calculation err, /Waveform rec]
File not found,
Auto overwriting off
Fault Recorder
Fault rec
The fault recorder can be started by one of eight start events (selection from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic). It
can register up to 20 faults. The last of the recorded faults is stored in a fail-safe manner.
If one of the assigned trigger events becomes true, the fault recorder will be started. When a trigger event
happens, each fault is saved including the module and name, fault number, number of grid faults and record
number at that time. For each of the faults, the measuring values (at the time when the trigger event became
true) can be viewed.
Up to eight signals to trigger the fault recorder can be selected from the following list. The trigger events are
OR-linked.
184 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Start: 1
Trigger
Start: 2
Trigger
Start: 3
Trigger
Start: 4
Trigger
OR
Recording
Start: 5 OR
Trigger
Start: 6
Trigger
Start: 7
Trigger
Start: 8
Trigger
Man. Trigger
The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if there is no saving place available. In case
»Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded fault will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the
parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the fault events will be stopped until the storage location is released
manually.
Read Out the Fault Recorder

The measured values at the time of tripping are saved (fail-safe) within the fault recorder. If there is no more
memory free, the oldest record will be overwritten (FIFO).
In order to read out a failure record:
• Call up the main menu;
• Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Fault rec.«;
• Select a fault record; and
• Analyze the corresponding measured values.
www.eaton.com 185
IM02602007E EDR-5000
To Read Out the Fault Recorder Via PowerPort-E
• Double click the »Fault Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« tree.
• In the window, the fault recordings are shown in tabular form.
• In order to receive more detailed information on a fault double click the selected item in the list.
Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed
as follows.
• Call up the data as described above.
• Call up the »File/Print« menu.
• Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up.
• Press the »Print« button.
• Press the »Export to File« button.
• Enter a file name.
• Choose a location where to save the file.
• Confirm the »Save« button.
Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module

Active /Reset]
Man. Trigger Manual Trigger False, False [Operation
True /Recorders
/Man. Trigger]
Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module

Start: 1 Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List Prot.Trip [Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
186 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Auto If there is no more free memory capacity Inactive, Active [Device Para
overwriting left, the oldest file will be overwritten. Active /Recorders
/Fault rec]
Fault Recorder Module Input States

/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
/Fault rec]
www.eaton.com 187
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Fault rec]
Fault Recorder Module Signals
Name Description
Res record Signal: Delete Record
Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Event Recorder
Event rec
The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last 50 (minimum) saved events are stored in non-
volatile memory, and therefore retained when power is lost to the unit. The following information is provided for
any of the events.
Events are logged as follows:
Record No. Fault No. No of grid faults Date of Record Module Name State
Sequential Number Number of the A grid fault No. can have Time stamp What has changed? Changed Value
ongoing fault. several Fault Nos.
This counter will be This counter will be

incremented by each incremented by each
General Pickup General Pickup.
(Prot.Pickup). (Exception AR: this
applies only to devices
that offer auto reclosing).
There are three different classes of events.
• Alternation of binary states are shown as:

• 0->1 if the signal changes physically from »0« to »1«.
• 1->0 if the signal changes physically from »1« to »0«.
• Counters increment is shown as:

• Old Counter state -> New Counter state (e.g.: 3->4)
• Alternation of multiple states are shown as:

• Old state -> New state (e.g.: 0->2)
Read Out the Event Recorder

• Call up the »main menu«.
• Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Event rec«.
188 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Select an event.
To Read Out the Event Recorder via PowerPort-E
• If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device menu.
• Double click the »Event Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« menu.
• In the window, the events are shown in tabular form.
To have the event recorder updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic Up-
Date« in the »View« menu.
PowerPort-E is able to record more events than the device itself, if the window of
the event recorder is opened and »Automatic Up-Date« is set to active.
Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed as
follows.
• Call up the data as described above.
• Call up the »File/Print« menu.
• Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up.
• Press the »Print« button.
• Press the »Export to File« button.
• Enter a file name.
• Choose a location where to save the file.
• Confirm the »Save« button.
Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module

Active /Reset]
www.eaton.com 189
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Event Recorder Module Signals
Name Description
Res all rec Signal: All records deleted
Trend Recorder
Available Elements:
Trend rec
Functional Description
The Trend Data are data points stored by the Trend Recorder on the relay device over fixed intervals of time,
and can be downloaded from the device using PowerPort-E. A Trend Record is viewable using the Quality
Monitor software by selecting files saved by PowerPort-E with a file extension of “.ErTr”. The list of available
trend recorder data is viewable by selecting [Operation/ Recorders/Trend Recorder] on the front panel of the
relay.
When viewed within the Quality Manager, the trend record will show the observed values (up to 10) that the User
has specified. The available values are dependent on the ordered protective device.
Managing Trend Records

To download information from the Trend Recorder, select [Operation/Recorder/Trend Rec] from the menu tree.
The User will find three options within the Trend Recorder window that will allow the User to:
• Receive Trend Records,

• Refresh the Trend Recorder, and
• Delete Trend Records.
Selecting the »Receive Trend Record« button will download data from the relay to the User's PC. By selecting
the »Refresh Trend Recorder«”, PowerPort-E updates the list of the Trend Recorder. The »Delete Trend
Recorder« function will clear all trend data from the relay, leaving the data files on the User's PC.
To view data using the Quality Manager, first the User must open the desired “.ErTr” file to be viewed from a
folder location previously designated by the User. Once the “.ErTr” file is open, the User will see the “Analog
Channels” that are monitored by the Trend Recorder. By clicking on the “Analog Channels”, all monitored
parameters are listed. To view a channel, the User must click on the left mouse key, then drag and drop the
channel onto the right side of the Quality Manager screen. The channel is then listed under the »Displayed
Channels«.
To remove a channel from view, the User must select the Trend Data to be removed in the »Displayed
Channels« menu tree, then click on the right mouse button to bring up the menu options. Here, the User will
find the »Remove« menu option that, when selected, will remove the trend data.
Configuring the Trend Recorder

The Trend Recorder is to be configured within [Device Para/Recorders/Trend Recorder] menu.
The User has to set the time interval. This defines the distance between two measuring points.
The User can select up to ten values that will be recorded.
190 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Selection List for Trending
Name Description
- No assignment
IA RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IB RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IC RMS Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IX meas RMS Measured value (measured): IX (RMS)
IR calc RMS Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS)
I0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Zero current (Fundamental)
I1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current
(Fundamental)
I2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current
(Fundamental)
IA avg RMS IA average value (RMS)
IB avg RMS IB average value (RMS)
IC avg RMS IC average value (RMS)
VA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VX meas RMS Measured value (measured): VX measured (RMS)
VAB RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
VBC RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
VCA RMS Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
V0 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero
voltage(Fundamental)
V1 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive
phase sequence voltage(Fundamental)
V2 Fund. Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative
phase sequence voltage(Fundamental)
VA avg RMS VA average value (RMS)
VB avg RMS VB average value (RMS)
VC avg RMS VC average value (RMS)
VAB avg RMS VAB average value (RMS)
VBC avg RMS VBC average value (RMS)
VCA avg RMS VCA average value (RMS)
f Measured Value: Frequency
Disp PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55D - Displacement Power Factor
Apt PF Measured Value (Calculated): 55A - Apparent Power Factor
IA THD Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total Harmonic Current
IB THD Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total Harmonic Current
IC THD Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total Harmonic Current
www.eaton.com 191
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
VA THD Measured value (calculated): VA Total Harmonic Distortion
VB THD Measured value (calculated): VB Total Harmonic Distortion
VC THD Measured value (calculated): VC Total Harmonic Distortion
VAB THD Measured value (calculated): VAB Total Harmonic Distortion
VBC THD Measured value (calculated): VBC Total Harmonic Distortion
VCA THD Measured value (calculated): VCA Total Harmonic Distortion
Syst VA RMS Measured VAs (RMS)
VAh Net Net VA Hours
Global Protection Parameters of the Trend Recorder

Resolution Resolution (recording frequency) 60 min, 15 min [Device Para
30 min, /Recorders
15 min, /Trend rec]
10 min,
5 min
Observed Observed Value1 1..n, TrendRecList IA RMS [Device Para
Value1 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value2 1..n, TrendRecList IB RMS [Device Para
Value2 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value3 1..n, TrendRecList IC RMS [Device Para
Value3 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value4 1..n, TrendRecList IX meas RMS [Device Para
Value4 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value5 1..n, TrendRecList VA RMS [Device Para
Value5 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value6 1..n, TrendRecList VB RMS [Device Para
Value6 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value7 1..n, TrendRecList VC RMS [Device Para
Value7 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value8 1..n, TrendRecList VX meas RMS [Device Para
Value8 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value9 1..n, TrendRecList - [Device Para
Value9 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed Observed Value10 1..n, TrendRecList - [Device Para
Value10 /Recorders
/Trend rec]
192 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Trend Recorder Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Hand Reset Hand Reset
Direct Commands of the Trend Recorder

Reset Delete all entries Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
www.eaton.com 193
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Communication Protocols
Modbus®
Modbus
Modbus® Protocol Configuration

The time-controlled Modbus® protocol is based on the master-slave working principle. This means that the
substation control and protection system sends an inquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address) that
will then be answered or carried out accordingly. If the inquiry/instruction cannot be answered/carried out (e.g.:
because of an invalid slave address), a failure message is returned to the master.
The master (substation control and protection system) can query information from the device, such as:
• Type of unit version;

• Measuring values/statistical measured values;
• Switch operating position (in preparation);
• State of device;
• Time and date;
• State of the device’s digital inputs; and
• Protection-/state pickups.
The master (control system) can give commands/instructions to the device, such as:
• Control of switchgear (where applicable, i.e.: each according to the applied device version);
• Change-over of parameter set;
• Reset and acknowledgment of pickups/signals;
• Adjustment of the date and time; and
• Control of pickup relays.
For detailed information on data point lists and error handling, please refer to the Modbus® documentation.
To allow configuration of the devices for Modbus® connection, some default values of the control system must be
available.
Device Planning Parameters of the Modbus

Mode Mode RTU, RTU [Device
TCP Planning]
Modbus RTU
Part 1: Configuration of the Devices
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters:
• Slave address, to allow clear identification of the device; and
• Baud rate.
194 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Also, select the RS485 interface-related parameters such as:
• Number of data bits;
• One of the following supported communication variants:

• Number of data bits,
• Even,
• Odd,
• Parity or no parity, or
• Number of stop bits;
• »t-timeout«: communication errors are only identified after expiration of a supervision time »t-timeout«;
and
• Response time (defining the period within which an inquiry from the master has to be answered).
Part 2: Hardware Connection
• For hardware connection to the control system, there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device
(RS485, fiber optic or terminals).
• Connect the bus and the device (wiring).
• Up to 32 devices can be connected to the bus (point to point connection/spurs).
• Connect a terminating resistor to the bus.
Error Handling - Hardware Errors
Information on physical communication errors, such as:
• Baud rate error and

• Parity error;
can be obtained from the event recorder.
Error Handling – Errors on Protocol Level
If, for example, an invalid memory address is inquired, error codes will be returned by the device that need to be
interpreted.
Modbus TCP
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the device
is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Part 1: Setting the TCP/IP Parameters
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
www.eaton.com 195
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• TCP/IP address;
• Subnetmask; and
• Gateway.
Part 2: Configuration of the Devices
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters.
• Setting a unit identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network.
• If a different port than the default port 502 should be used, please proceed as follows:
• Choose “Private” within the TCP-Port-Configuration.
• Set the port number.
• Set the maximum acceptable time out for “no communication”. If this time has expired without any
communication, the device concludes a failure has occurred within the master system.
• Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands.
Part 3: Hardware Connection
• There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control
system.
• Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable.
Direct Commands of the Modbus®

Res Diagn Cr All Modbus Diagnosis Counters will be Inactive, Inactive [Operation
reset. Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus®

Slave ID Device address (Slave ID) within the bus 1 - 247 1 [Device Para
system. Each device address has to be /Modbus]
unique within a bus system.
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU

Unit ID The Unit Identifier is used for routing. This 1 - 255 255 [Device Para
parameter is to be set, if a Modbus RTU /Modbus]
and a Modbus TCP network should be
coupled.
Only available if:Device Planning = TCP
196 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

TCP Port TCP Port Configuration. This parameter is Default, Default [Device Para
Config to be set only if the default Modbus TCP Private /Modbus]
Port should not be used.

Port Port number 502 - 65535 502 [Device Para
/Modbus]
And Only available if: TCP Port Config =
Private
t-timeout Within this time the answer has to be 0.01 – 10.00 s 1s [Device Para
received by the Communication system, /Modbus]
otherwise the request will be disregarded.
In that case, the Communication system
detects a communication failure and the
Communication System has to send a new
request.

Baud rate Baud rate 1200, 19200 [Device Para
2400, /Modbus]
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU 4800,
9600,
19200,
38400
Physical Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even 8E1, 8E1 [Device Para
Settings parity, O=odd parity, N=no parity. Digit 3: 8O1, /Modbus]
Number of stop bits. More information on 8N1,
the parity: It is possible that the last data bit 8N2
is followed by a parity bit which is used for
recognition of communication errors. The
parity bit ensures that with even parity
("EVEN") always an even number of bits
with valence "1" or with odd parity ("ODD")
an odd number of "1" valence bits are
transmitted. But it is also possible to
transmit no parity bits (here the setting is
"Parity = None"). More information on the
stop-bits: The end of a data byte is
terminated by the stop-bits.

t-call If there is no request message sent from 1 – 3600 s 10 s [Device Para
Communication to the device after expiry of /Modbus]
this time, the device concludes a
communication failure within the
Communication system.
Comm CmdBlo Activating (allowing)/ Deactivating Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
(disallowing) the blocking of the Active /Modbus]
Communication Commands
Disable Disable Latching: If this parameter is active Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Latching (true), none of the Modbus states will be Active /Modbus]
latched. That means that trip signals wont
be latched by Modbus.
www.eaton.com 197
IM02602007E EDR-5000

AllowGap If this parameter is active (True), the User Inactive, Active [Device Para
can request a set of modbus register Active /Modbus]
without getting an exception, because of
invalid address in the requested array. The
invalid addresses have a special value
0xFAFA, but the User is responsible for
ignoring invalid addresses. Attention: This
special value can be valid, if address is
valid.
Modbus® Module Signals (Output States)
Some signals (that are active for a short time only) have to be acknowledged
separately (e.g.: trip signals) by the communication system.
Name Description
Transmission Signal: Communication Active
Comm Cmd 1 Communication Command
Modbus® Module Values

NoOfRequestsTotal Total number of requests. Includes 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
requests for other slaves. /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfRequestsForMe Total Number of requests for this 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
slave. /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
198 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

NoOfResponse Total number of requests having 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
been responded. /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfResponsTimeOv Total number of requests with 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
erruns exceeded response time. /Count and RevData
Physically corrupted Frame. /Modbus]
NoOfOverrunErros Total Number of Overrun Failures. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Physically corrupted Frame. /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfParityErrors Total number of parity errors. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Modbus]
NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Modbus]
NoOfBreaks Number of detected 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
communication aborts /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfQueryInvalid Total Number of Request errors. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Request could not be interpreted /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfInternalError Total Number of Internal errors 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
while interpreting the request. /Count and RevData
/Modbus]
IEC 61850
IEC61850
Introduction
To understand the functioning and mode of operation of a substation in an IEC 61850 automation environment, it
is useful to compare the commissioning steps with those of a conventional substation in a Modbus TCP
environment. In a conventional substation, the individual Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) communicate in a
vertical direction with the higher level control center via Communication. The horizontal communication is
exclusively realized by wiring relay output contacts (RO) and digital inputs (DI) together.
In an IEC 61850 environment, communication between the IEDs takes place digitally (via Ethernet) by a service
called Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE). By means of this service, information about events
is submitted between each IED. Therefore each IED has to know about the functional capability of all other
connected IEDs.
Each IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills (IED
Capability Description, *.ICD). By means of a Substation Configuration Tool to describe the structure of the
substation, assignment of the devices to the primary technique, etc., virtual wiring of the IEDs between each
other and with other switch gear of the substation can be achieved. A description of the substation configuration
will be generated in the form of a *.SCD file. Finally, this file has to be submitted to each device. Now the IEDs
are able to communicate with each other, react to interlockings, and operate switch gear.
www.eaton.com 199
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Modbus -TCP IEC 61850

Master Master
ModbusTCP
IEC61850
Ethernet Ethernet
Comm
Comm
IED1 IED2 IED3 IED1 IED2 IED3
DI RO DI RO DI RO
Conventional hard wiring GOOSE IEC 61850 soft wiring
Commissioning steps for a conventional substation Commissioning steps for a substation with IEC 61850
with modbus TCP environment: environment:
• Parameter setting of the IEDs; 1. Parameter setting of the IEDs

• Ethernet installation; Ethernet installation
• TCP/IP settings for the IEDs; and TCP/IP settings for the IEDs
• Wiring according to wiring scheme.
2. IEC 61850 configuration (software wiring)
a) Exporting an ICD file from each device
b) Configuration of the substation
(generating a SCD file)
c) Transmit SCD file to each device.
Generation/Export of a Device Specific ICD File

Each Eaton IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills
in the form of an IED Capability Description (*.ICD) file. This file can be exported as follows and be used for the
configuration of the substation.
• A change of the devices parameters has an influence on the content of

the ICD file.
1. Connect the device with your PC/Notebook.

2. Start PowerPort E.
3. Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu.
4. Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu.
5. Click on the ICD icon in the IEC 61850 window.
6. Select a drive and file name for the ICD file and click "save".
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 for all connected devices in this IEC 61850 environment.
Generation/Export of a SCD file

Each device of the HighPROTEC can create an export it's own functionality and communications skills in form of
a *.SCD file.
1. Connect the device with your PC/Notebook.

2. Start Smart view.
3. Click on »Receive data from Device« in the menu »Device«.
4. Click on »IEC61850« in the menu »Device Para«.
5. Click on the SCD icon in the IEC61850 window.
6. Select a drive and file name for the SCD file and click "save".
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 for all connected devices in this IEC61850 environment.
200 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Generation of a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) File

The substation configuration (i. e. connection of all logical nodes of protection and control devices) as well as
switch gear usually is done with a ”Substation Configuration Tool“. Therefore the ICD files of all connected IEDs
in the IEC 61850 environment have to be available. The result of the station wide “software wiring” can be
exported in the form of a Station Configuration Description (SCD) file.
Suitable Substation Configuration Tools (SCT) are available by the following Companies:
H&S, Hard- & Software Technologie GmbH & Co. KG, Dortmund (Germany) (www.hstech.de).
Applied Systems Engineering Inc. (www.ase-systems.com)
Kalki Communication Technologies Limited (www.kalkitech.com)
Import of the *.SCD File into the Device

When the substation configuration is completed, the *.SCD file has to be transmitted to all connected devices.
This is has to be done as follows:
1. Connect the device with your PC/notebook.

2. Start PowerPort E.
3. Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu.
4. Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu.
5. Switch the parameter »IEC 61850 Communication« to »OFF« and submit the changed parameter set
into the device.
6. Click on the IEC icon in the IEC 61850 window.
7. Select the folder where the *.SCD file is stored. Select the *.SCD file and click "Open".
8. A password is requested. Enter the same password, which you use for parameter setting of the device.
9. Following Step 5, again switch on the IEC Communication and submit the changed parameter set into
the device.
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for all devices connected to this IEC 61850 environment.
11. If no error message occurs, the configuration has been completed successfully.
• When changing the substation configuration, usually a new *.SCD file has
to be generated. This *.SCD file must be transmitted to all devices by
means of PowerPort E. If the file is not transmitted to all devices, IEC
61850 malfunctions will be the result.
• If the parameters of the devices are changed after the completion of the
substation configuration, changes in the corresponding *.ICD file may
result. This, in turn, may make an update of the *.SCD file necessary.
IEC 61850 Virtual Outputs

In addition to the standardized logical node status information, up to 16 free configurable status information
items can be assigned to the 16 Virtual Outputs. This can be done in the [Device Para/IEC61850] menu.
Device Planning Parameters of the IEC 61850

Use Planning]
www.eaton.com 201
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the IEC 61850

ResetStatistic Reset of all IEC61850 diagnostic counters Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the IEC 61850

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
module/element. Active /IEC61850]
VirtualOutput1 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
or visualized via the SCD file to other /IEC61850]
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
202 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

States of the Inputs of the IEC 61850

VirtOut1-I Module input state: Binary state of the [Device Para
Virtual Output (GGIO) /IEC61850]
www.eaton.com 203
IM02602007E EDR-5000

IEC 61850 Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
VirtInp1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC 61850 Module Values

NoOfGooseRxAll Total number of received GOOSE 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
messages including messages for /Count and RevData
other devices (subscribed and not /IEC61850]
subscribed messages).
NoOfGooseRxSubscri Total Number of subscribed 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
bed GOOSE messages including /Count and RevData
messages with incorrect content. /IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxCorrect Total Number of subscribed and 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
correctly received GOOSE /Count and RevData
messages. /IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxNew Number of subscribed and 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
correctly received GOOSE /Count and RevData
messages with new content. /IEC61850]
NoOfGooseTxAll Total Number of GOOSE 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
messages that have been /Count and RevData
published by this device. /IEC61850]
204 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

NoOfGooseTxNew Total Number of new GOOSE 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
messages (modified content) that /Count and RevData
have been published by this /IEC61850]
device.
NoOfServerRequestsA Total number of MMS Server 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
ll requests including incorrect /Count and RevData
requests. /IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadAll Total Number of values read from 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
this device including incorrect /Count and RevData
requests. /IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadCorrect Total Number of correctly read 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
values from this device. /Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataWrittenAll Total Number of values written by 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
this device including incorrect /Count and RevData
ones. /IEC61850]
NoOfDataWrittenCorre Total Number of correctly written 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
ct values by this device. /Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataChangeNotifi Number of detected changes 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
cation within the data sets that are /Count and RevData
published with GOOSE messages. /IEC61850]
Values of the IEC 61850

GoosePublisherStat State of the GOOSE Publisher (on Off Off, [Operation
e or off) On, /Status display
Error /IEC61850]
GooseSubscriberSta State of the GOOSE Subscriber (on Off Off, [Operation
te or off) On, /Status display
Error /IEC61850]
MmsServerState State of MMS Server (on or off) Off Off, [Operation
On, /Status display
Error /IEC61850]
www.eaton.com 205
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Time Synchronization
TimeZones
The device gives the User the ability to synchronize the device with a central time generator. This provides the
following advantages:
• The time does not drift from the reference time. A continuously accumulating deviation of the reference
time thereby will be balanced. Also refer to the Specifications (Tolerances Real Time Clock) section.
• All time synchronized devices operate with the same time. Therefore, logged events of the individual
devices can be compared exactly and be evaluated (single events of the event recorder, waveform
records).
The device's time can be synchronized via the following protocols:
• IRIG-B;
• SNTP;
• Communications-Protocol Modbus (RTU or TCP); and/or
These protocols use different hardware interfaces and are different in accuracy. Further information can be
found in the Specifications section.
Used Protocol Hardware-Interface Recommended Application

Without time --- Not recommended.
synchronization
IRIG-B IRIG-B Terminal Recommend, if interface available.
SNTP RJ45 (Ethernet) Recommend alternative to IRIG-B, especially when using
IEC 61850 or Modbus TCP.
Modbus RTU RS485, D-SUB or Fiber Recommend when using Modbus RTU communication protocol and when no
Optic IRIG-B real time clock is available.
Modbus TCP RJ45 (Ethernet) Limited recommendation when Modbus TCP communication protocol is used
and when no IRIG-B real time clock or SNTP-Server is available.
Accuracy of Time Synchronization

The accuracy of the device's synchronized system time depends on different factors:
• Accuracy of the connected time generator;

• Synchronization protocol that is used; and
• At Modbus TCP and SNTP: Network load and data package transmission times
Please consider the accuracy of the time generator used. Deviations of the time
generator's time causes the same deviations on the device's system time.
Selection of Timezone and Synchronization Protocol

The protection relay masters both UTC and local time. This means that the device can be synchronised with
UTC time while using local time for User display.
Time Synchronisation with UTC Time (Recommended):

Time synchronisation is usually done using UTC time. This means for example that an IRIG-B time generator is
206 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
sending UTC time information to the protection relay. This is the recommended use case, since here a
continuous time synchronisation can be ensured. There are no “leaps in time” through change of Daylight
Savings Time.
To achieve that the device shows the current local time, the time zone and the change to Daylight Savings Time
can be configured.
Please carry out the following configuration steps under [Device Para/ Time]:
1. Select your local time zone in the time zone menu.

2. There also configure the switching of daylight savings time.
3. Select the used time synchronisation protocol in the TimeSync menu (e.g. “IRIG-B”).
4. Set the parameters of the synchronisation protocol (refer to the according chapter).
Time Synchronisation with Local Time:

Should the time synchronisation however be done using local time, then please leave the time zone to »UTC+0
London« and do not use switching of daylight saving time.
The synchronisation of the relay´s system time is exclusively done by the

synchronisation protocol selected in the menu [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync/
Used Protocol].
Without Time Synchronisation:

To achieve that the device shows the current local time, the time zone and the change to Daylight Savings Time
can be configured.
Please carry out the following configuration steps under [Device Para/ Time]:
1. Select your local time zone in the time zone menu.
2. There also configure the switching of daylight savings time.
3. Select »manual« as your used protocol in the TimeSync menu.
4. Set date and time.
Global Protection Parameters of the Time Synchronization

DST offset Difference to wintertime -180 – 180 min 60 min [Device Para
/Time
/Timezone]
DST manual Manual setting of the Daylight Saving Time Inactive, Active [Device Para
Active /Time
/Timezone]
Summertime Daylight Saving Time Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Active /Time
Only available if: DST manual = Active /Timezone]
www.eaton.com 207
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Summertime m Month of clock change summertime January, March [Device Para
February, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = Active March, /Timezone]
April,
May,
June,
July,
August,
September,
October,
November,
December
Summertime d Day of clock change summertime Sunday, Saturday [Device Para
Monday, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = Active Tuesday, /Timezone]
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday,
General day
Summertime w Place of selected day in month (for clock First, Last [Device Para
change summertime) Second, /Time
Third, /Timezone]
Only available if: DST manual = Active Fourth,
Last
Summertime h Hour of clock change summertime 0 – 23 h 2h [Device Para
/Time
Summertime Minute of clock change summertime 0 – 59 min 0 min [Device Para
min /Time
Wintertime m Month of clock change wintertime January, October [Device Para

February, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = Active March, /Timezone]
April,
May,
June,
July,
August,
September,
October,
November,
December
Wintertime d Day of clock change wintertime Sunday, Saturday [Device Para
Monday, /Time
Only available if: DST manual = Active Tuesday, /Timezone]
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday,
General day
208 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Wintertime w Place of selected day in month (for clock First, Last [Device Para
change wintertime) Second, /Time
Third, /Timezone]
Only available if: DST manual = Active Fourth,
Last
Wintertime h Hour of clock change wintertime 0 – 23 h 3h [Device Para
/Time
Wintertime min Minute of clock change wintertime 0 – 59 min 0 min [Device Para
/Time
Time Zones Time Zones UTC+14 Kiritimati, UTC+0 London [Device Para
UTC+13 Rawaki, /Time
UTC+12.75 Chatham Island, /Timezone]
UTC+12 Wellington,
UTC+11.5 Kingston,
UTC+11 Port Vila,
UTC+10.5 Lord Howe Island,
UTC+10 Sydney,
UTC+9.5 Adelaide,
UTC+9 Tokyo,
UTC+8 Hong Kong,
UTC+7 Bangkok,
UTC+6.5 Rangoon,
UTC+6 Colombo,
UTC+5.75 Kathmandu,
UTC+5.5 New Delhi,
UTC+5 Islamabad,
UTC+4.5 Kabul,
UTC+4 Abu Dhabi,
UTC+3.5 Tehran,
UTC+3 Moscow,
UTC+2 Athens,
UTC+1 Berlin,
UTC+0 London,
UTC-1 Azores,
UTC-2 Fern. d. Noronha,
UTC-3 Buenos Aires,
UTC-3.5 St. John’s,
UTC-4 Santiago,
UTC-5 New York,
UTC-6 Chicago,
UTC-7 Salt Lake City,
UTC-8 Los Angeles,
UTC-9 Anchorage,
UTC-9.5 Taiohae,
UTC-10 Honolulu,
UTC-11 Midway Islands
TimeSync Time synchronization -, - [Device Para
SNTP, /Time
IRIG-B, /TimeSync
Modbus /TimeSync]
www.eaton.com 209
IM02602007E EDR-5000
SNTP
SNTP
Important pre-condition: The device needs to have access to an SNTP server via
the connected network. This server preferably should be installed locally.
Principle – General Use

SNTP is a standard protocol for time synchronization via a network. At minimum, one SNTP server has to be
integrated into the network. The device can be configured for one or two connected SNTP servers.
The device's system time will be synchronized by the connected SNTP server 1 to 4 times per minute. In turn,
the SNTP server synchronizes its time via NTP with other NTP servers. This is the normal case. Alternatively it
can receive its time via GPS, radio controlled clock, or the like.
If the server's “Stratum” has been set manually, it is not an indication of its quality or reliability.
GPS Satellite Signal (optional )
GPS Connection (optional )
TCP/IP
NTP-Server SNTP-Server
NTP-Protocol TCP/IP
(option ) Protective Relay
SNTP-Protocol
Accuracy
The accuracy of the SNTP server used and the accuracy of its reference clock influences the accuracy of the
protection relay's clock.
With each transmitted time information, the SNTP server sends information about its accuracy:
• Stratum: The stratum gives information on how close the SNTP server within the cluster is to other NTP
servers that are connected to an atomic clock.
• Precision: This is the accuracy, the SNTP server provides the system time.
Also the performance (traffic and data package transmission time) of the connected network has an influence on
the accuracy of the time synchronization A locally installed SNTP server with an accuracy of ≤200 µsec is
recommended. If this cannot be provided, the connected server's accuracy can be checked in the
[Operation/Status Display/Time Sync.] menu:
210 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• The server quality gives information about the accuracy of the used server. The quality should be
GOOD or SUFFICENT. A server with BAD quality should not be used because this could cause
fluctuations of the time synchronization
• The network quality gives information about the network's load and data package transmission time.
The quality should be GOOD or SUFFICENT. A network with BAD quality should not be used because
this could cause fluctuations during time synchronization
Using two SNTP Servers

When configuring two SNTP servers, the device selects the server with the lower stratum value because this
provides a more precise time synchronization If the servers have the same stratum value, the device selects the
server with the better accuracy (precision). It does not matter which of the servers is configured as Server 1 or
Server 2. When the last used server fails, the device automatically switches to the other server. When the
server recovers, the device switches back to the previous one with the better quality.
SNTP Commissioning
Activate the SNTP time synchronization by means of the [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync] menu:
• Select »SNTP« in the time synchronisation menu.

• Set the IP address of the first server in the SNTP menu.
• Set the IP address of the second server, if available.
• Set all configured servers to “active”.
Fault Analysis
If there is no SNTP signal for more than 120 seconds., the SNTP status changes from “active” to “inactive” and
an entry in the Event Recorder will be set.
The SNTP functionality can be checked in the [Operation/Status Display/Time Sync./Sntp] menu.
If the SNTP status is not “active”, please proceed as follows:
• Check if the wiring is correct (Ethernet-cable connected).

• Check if a valid IP address is set in the device (Device Para/TCP/IP).
• Check if the Ethernet connection is active (Device Para/TCP/IP/Link = Up?).
• Check if the SNTP server as well as the protection device answers to a Ping.
• Check if the SNTP server is up and working.
Device Planning Parameters of the SNTP

Use Planning]
Direct Commands of the SNTP

Res Counter Reset all Counters. Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
www.eaton.com 211
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Global Protection Parameters of the SNTP

Server1 Server 1 Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Active /Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
IP Byte1 IP1.IP2.IP3.IP4 0 - 255 0 [Device Para
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
Server2 Server 2 Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
Active /Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
/Time
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
Signals of the SNTP
Name Description
SNTP active Signal: If there is no valid SNTP signal for 120 sec, SNTP is
regarded as inactive.
212 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
SNTP Counters

NoOfSyncs Total Number of Synchronizations. 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfConnectLost Total Number of lost SNTP 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Connections (no sync for 120 sec). /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfSmallSyncs Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
very small Time Corrections. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfNormSyncs Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
normal Time Corrections. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfBigSyncs Service counter: Total Number of big 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
Time Corrections. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfFiltSyncs Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
filtered Time Corrections. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfSlowTrans Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
slow Transfers. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfHighOffs Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
high Offsets. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
NoOfIntTimeouts Service counter: Total Number of 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
internal timeouts. /Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
StratumServer1 Stratum of Server 1 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Status display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
StratumServer2 Stratum of Server 2 0 0 - 9999999999 [Operation
/Status display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
www.eaton.com 213
IM02602007E EDR-5000
SNTP Values

Used Server Which Server is used for SNTP None Server1, [Operation
synchronization. Server2 , /Status display
None /TimeSync
/SNTP]
PrecServer1 Precision of Server 1 0 ms 0 – 1000.00000 ms [Operation
/Status display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
PrecServer2 Precision of Server 2 0 ms 0 – 1000.00000 ms [Operation
/Status display
/TimeSync
/SNTP]
ServerQlty Quality of Server used for - GOOD, [Operation
Synchronization (GOOD, SUFFICENT, /Status display
SUFFICIENT, BAD) BAD, /TimeSync
- /SNTP]
NetConn Quality of Network Connection - GOOD, [Operation
(GOOD, SUFFICIENT, BAD). SUFFICENT, /Status display
BAD, /TimeSync
- /SNTP]
IRIG-B00X
IRIG-B
Requirement: An IRIG-B00X time code generator is needed. IRIG-B004 and higher

will support/transmit the “year information”.
If you are using an IRIG time code that does not support the “year information”
(IRIG-B000, IRIG-B001, IRIG-B002, IRIG-B003), you have to set the “year”
manually within the device. In these cases the correct year information is a
precondition for a properly working IRIG-B.
Principle - General Use

The IRIG-B standard is the most used standard to synchronize the time of protection devices in medium voltage
applications.
The protection device supports IRIG-B according to the IRIG STANDARD 200-04. This means that all time
synchronization formats IRIG-B00X (IRIG-B000 / B001 / B002 / B003 / B004 / B005 / B006 / B007) are
supported. It is recommended to use IRIG-B004 and higher which also transmits the “year information”.
The system time of the protection device is being synchronized with the connected IRIG-B code generator once
a second. The accuracy of the used IRIG-B code generator can be increased by connecting a GPS-receiver to it.
214 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
GPS Satellite Signal (optional )
GPS Connection (optional )
IRIG-B
Time Code Generator
Protective Relay
- +
Twisted Pair Cable
To Other Devices
The location of the IRIG-B interface depends to the device type. Please refer to the wiring diagram supplied with
the protective device.
IRIG-B Commissioning
Activate the IRIG-B synchronization within menu [Device Para/ Time/ TimeSync]:
• Select »IRIG-B« in the time synchronisation menu.

• Set the time synchronization in the IRIG-B menu to »Active«.
• Select the IRIG-B type (choose B000 through B007).
Fault Analysis
If the device does not receive any IRIG-B time code for more than 60 s, the IRIG-B status switches from
»active« to »inactive« and there is created an entry within the Event Recorder.
Check the IRIG-B functionality through the menu [Operation/ Status display/ TimeSync/ IRIG-B]. Should the
IRIG-B status not be reported as being »active«, please proceed as follows.
• To begin with check the IRIG-B wiring.

• Check, if the correct IRIG-B00X type is configured.
IRIG-B Control Commands

In addition to the date and time information, the IRIG-B code offers the option to transmit up to 18 control
commands that can be processed by the protective device. They have to be set and issued by the IRIG-B code
generator.
www.eaton.com 215
IM02602007E EDR-5000
The protective device offers up to 18 IRIG-B assignment options for those control commands in order to carry
out the assigned action. If there is a control command assigned to an action, this action is being triggered as
soon as the control command is transmitted as being true. As an example there can be triggered the start of
statistics or the street lighting can be switched on through a relay.
Device Planning Parameters of the IRIG-B00X

Use Planning]
Direct Commands of the IRIG-B00X

Res IRIG-B Cr Resetting of the Diagnosis Counters: IRIG- Inactive, Inactive [Operation
B Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the IRIG-B00X

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, Inactive [Device Para
module/element. Active /Time
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
IRIG-B00X Determination of the Type: IRIG-B00X. IRIGB-000, IRIGB-000 [Device Para
IRIG-B types differ in types of included IRIGB-001, /Time
“Coded Expressions” (year, control- IRIGB-002, /TimeSync
functions, straight-binary-seconds). IRIGB-003, /IRIG-B]
IRIGB-004,
IRIGB-005,
IRIGB-006,
IRIGB-007
Signals of the IRIG-B00X (Output States)
Name Description
Inverted Signal: IRIG-B inverted
Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
216 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
IRIG-B00X Values

NoOfFramesOK Total number valid Frames. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
NoOfFrameErrors Total Number of Frame Errors. 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
Edges Edges 0 0 - 65535 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/TimeSync
/IRIG-B]
www.eaton.com 217
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Parameters
Parameter setting and planning can be done:
• Directly at the device; or
• By way of the PowerPort-E software application.
Parameter Definitions
Device Parameters
Device Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. By modifying the Device Parameters, the User may
(depending on the type of device):
• Set cutoff levels;

• Configure digital inputs, Assign LEDs;
• Configure Relay Outputs;
• Assign acknowledgment signals;
• Configure statistics;
• Configure general Protocol Settings;
• Adapt HMI settings;
• Configure recorders (reports);
• Set date and time;
• Change passwords; and/or
• Check the version (build) of the device.
System Parameters
System Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. System Parameters comprise the essential, basic
settings of your switchboard such as rated frequency and transformer ratios.
Protection Parameters
Protection Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. This Protection Parameters include the
following.
• Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: All settings and assignments
that are done within the Global Parameter tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups. They have
to be set only once. In addition, Global Protection Parameters include the parameters used for Breaker
Management.
• The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters: The User may either directly
switch to a certain parameter setting group or determine the conditions for switching to another
parameter setting group.
• Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: By means of the Setting Group
Parameters, the User may individually adapt the protective device to the current conditions or grid
conditions. The Setting Group Parameters may be individually set in each Settings group.
218 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters

Device Planning Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree.
• Improving the Usability (Clarity): All protection modules that are currently unused can be hidden
(switched to invisible) through Device Planning. In the Device Planning menu, the User can adapt the
scope of functionality of the protective device exactly as needed. The User can improve the usability by
hiding all modules that are not currently needed.
• Adapting the device to the application: For those modules that are needed, determine how they
should be set up (e.g.: directional, non-directional, <, >...).
Direct Commands
Direct Commands are part of the Device Parameter tree but NOT part of the parameter file. They will be
executed directly (e.g.: Resetting of a Counter).
State of the Module Inputs

Module Inputs are part of the Device Parameter tree. The State of the Module Input is context-dependent.
By means of the Module Inputs, information can be passed to and acted upon by the modules. The User can
assign signals to Module Inputs. The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be viewed from the
Status Display. Module Inputs can be identified by an ”-I” at the end of the name.
Signals
Signals are part of the Device Parameter tree. The state of the signal is context-dependent.
• Signals represent the state of the installation/equipment (e.g.: position indicators of the breaker).
• Signals are assessments of the state of the grid and the equipment (System OK, Transformer failure
detected, ...).
• Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device (e.g.: Trip Command) based on the User
parameter settings.
www.eaton.com 219
220
IM02602007E
Protection Para/Global Prot Para / I-Prot / I[1]...[n] / AdaptSet...

AdaptSet 4
&
AND
AdaptSet 3
1..n, Assignment List &

AND
et
tS
AdaptSet 2 ap
Ad
1..n, Assignment List &
AND Protection Para
AdaptSet 1
PSet-Switch
EDR-5000
&
AND AdaptSet 4
AdaptSet 3
PSet-Switch.Mode AdaptSet 2
AdaptSet 1
PS1
Standard [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive
PS2
[0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive
PS3
www.eaton.com
PS4
PSS via Inp fct
Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard
PSS via Comm
Function ExBlo Fc Rvs Blo Fc Blo TripCmd ExBlo TripCmd Fc Pickup Curve Shape t t-multiplier Reset Mode t-reset IH2 Blo Nondir Trip at V=0
Adaptive Parameter Sets
Active/ Active/ Active/

Parameter Set 1 Active/Inactive Active/Inactive [0…*In] [1...n] [0…s] [0.05...n] [1...n] [0…s] Active/Inactive Active/Inactive
Inactive Inactive Inactive
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Device Parameter tree.
By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, the User can temporarily modify single parameters within the
Parameter Setting groups.
Adaptive Parameters drop-out automatically if the acknowledged signal that has

activated them has dropped-out. Please take into account that Adaptive Set 1 is
dominant to Adaptive Set 2. Adaptive Set 2 is dominant to Adaptive Set 3.
Adaptive Set 3 is dominant to Adaptive Set 4.
In order to increase the usability (clarity), Adaptive Parameter Sets become

visible if a corresponding activation signal has been assigned (PowerPort-E V. 1.2
and higher).
Example: In order to use Adaptive Parameters within Protective Element

I [1], please proceed as follows.
• Assign within the Global Parameter tree, within Protective Element I[1], an
activation signal for Adaptive Parameter Set 1.
• Adaptive Parameter Set 1 becomes now visible within the Protection

Parameter Sets for element I[1].
By means of additional activation signals, further Adaptive Parameter Sets can be

used.
The functionality of the IED (relay) can be enhanced / adapted, by means of Adaptive Parameters in order to
meet the requirements of modified states of the grid or the power supply system respectively, to manage
unpredictable events.
Moreover, the adaptive parameter can also be used to realize various special protective functions or to expand
the existing function modules in a simple way, without costly redesign the existing hardware or software platform.
The Adaptive Parameter feature allows, besides a standard parameter set, one of the four parameter sets
labeled from 1 to 4, to be used, for example, in a time overcurrent element under the control of the configurable
Set Control Logic. The dynamic switch-over of the adaptive parameter set is only active for a particular element
when its adaptive set control logic is configured and only as long as the activation signal is true.
For some protection elements, such as time overcurrent and instantaneous overcurrent ( 50P, 51P, 50G,
51G, …), besides the “default” setting there exists another four “alternative” settings for pickup value, curve type,
time dial, and reset mode set values that can dynamically be switched-over by means of the configurable
adaptive setting control logic in the single set parameter.
If the Adaptive Parameter feature is not used, the adaptive set control logic will not be selected (assigned). The
protective elements work, in this case, just like a normal protection using the “Default” settings. If one of the
Adaptive Set Control logic is assigned to a logic function, the protective element will be “switched-over” to the
corresponding adaptive settings if the assigned logic function is asserted and will drop-out to the “Default” setting
if the assigned signal that has activated the Adaptive Set has dropped-out.
Adaptive Parameters via HMI
The use of Adaptive Parameters via the HMI (panel) differs a bit to the use via
PowerPort-E.
www.eaton.com 221
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Adaptive Parameters can be also used via the HMI (instead of using the recommended PowerPort-E). The
principle method of using them via the HMI is as follows.
1. Assign an activation signal for an Adaptive Parameter Set within the Global Parameters »Global Para«
for a protective element (available for current functions only).
2. Call up this protective element within a Setting Group.
3. Go to the parameter that should be modified adaptively and call it up for editing (arrow-right-key).
4. Choose the corresponding Adaptive Set.
5. Set the modified parameter for the selected Adaptive Set.
Application Example
The tripping time »t« for the 50[1] element of »Parameter Set 1« should be desensitized (reduced) in case
Digital Input 2 becomes active.
1. Call up the menu [Protection Para/Global Protection Para/I-Prot/50[1]/AdaptSet1] and assign Digital
Input 2 as activation signal.
2. Call up the 50[1] element within the menu [Protection Para/Set[1]/I-Port/50[1].
3. Go to the tripping time parameter »t« by means of the softkey (arrow-down) and call up the submenu by
means of the softkey (arrow-right).
4. Call up the corresponding parameter set (Adaptive Set 1 in this example).
5. Set the reduced tripping time for »AdaptSet 1«.
Check and confirm that the functionality is in compliance with your protection plan via a commissioning test.
Application Example
During a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” condition, the User is usually requested to make the embedded protective function
tripping of the faulted line faster, instantaneous, or sometimes non-directional.
Such a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” application can easily be realized using the Adaptive Parameter features
mentioned previously. The standard time overcurrent protection element (e.g.: 51P) should trip instantaneously
in case of SOTF condition,. If the SOTF logic function »SOTF ENABLED« is detecting a manual breaker close
condition, the relay switches to Adaptive Set 1 if the signal »SOTF.ENABLED« is assigned to Adaptive Set 1. The
corresponding Adaptive Set 1 will become active and than »t = 0« sec.
222 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
The screen shot above shows the adaptive setting configurations following applications based on only one
simple overcurrent protection element:
1. Standard Set: Default settings;

2. Adaptive Set 1: SOTF application (Switch-OnTo-Fault);
3. Adaptive Set 2: CLPU application (Cold Load Pickup);
Application Examples
• The output signal of the Switch OnTo Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that sensitizes the overcurrent protection.
• The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that desensitizes the overcurrent protection.
• By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized. After a reclosure
attempt, the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted.
• Depending on undervoltage, the overcurrent protection can be modified (voltage controlled). This
applies to devices that offer voltage protection only.
• The ground overcurrent protection can be modified by the residual voltage. This applies to devices that
offer voltage protection only.
• Dynamic and automatic adaption of the ground current settings in order to adapt the settings to different
loads (single-phase load diversity).
www.eaton.com 223
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Adaptive Parameter Sets are only available for devices with current protection
modules.
Adaptive Parameter Set Activation Signals
Name Description
-.- No assignment
27M[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
47[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
SOTF.enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
CLPU.enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
AR.Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
AR.Pre Shot Pre Shot Control
AR.Shot 1 Shot Control
224 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 225
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
226 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 227
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
228 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 229
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
230 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 231
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
232 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Sys.Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Sys.Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
Operational Modes (Access Authorization)

Operational Mode – »Display Only«
• The protection is activated.
• All data, measuring values, records, and counters/meters can be viewed.
Operation Mode – »Parameter Setting and Planning«

In this mode, the User is able to:
• Edit and set parameters;
• Change device planning details; and
• Configure and reset operational data (event recorder/fault recorder/power meter/switching cycles).
If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer time
(can be set between 20 – 3600 seconds), the device will automatically reset to
»Display Only« mode (Please refer to the Appendix Module Panel).
As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, the device cannot
acknowledge.
In order to change into the operation mode (»Parameter Setting«) please proceed as follows.
1. Mark the parameter to be changed in the device display.
2. Press the »Wrench« soft key to temporarily change into the Parameter Setting mode.
3. Enter the parameter password.
4. Change the parameter.
5. Change any additional parameters that are needed.
www.eaton.com 233
IM02602007E EDR-5000
As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, a wrench icon will be
shown in the upper right corner of the display.
6. For saving the altered parameter(s):
• Press the »OK« key; and

• Confirm by pressing the »Yes« soft key.
7. Then the device changes into the »Display Only« mode.
Password
Password Entry at the Panel
Passwords can be entered by way of the soft keys
1 2 3 4
Example: For password (3244) press successively:
• Soft key 3;
• Soft key 2;
• Soft key 4; and
• Soft key 4.
Password Changes
Passwords can be changed at the device in the »Device Para/Password« menu or by means of the PowerPort-E
software.
A password must be a User-defined combination of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4.
All other characters and keys WILL NOT be accepted.
The password for the operation mode »Parameter setting and planning« enables the User to transfer
parameters from the PowerPort-E software into the device.
When the User wants to change a password, the existing one has to be entered first. The new password (up to
8 digits) is then to be confirmed twice. Please proceed as follows.
• In order to change the password, please enter the old password followed by pressing the »OK« key.
• Next, enter the new password and press the »OK« key.
• Finally, confirm your new password and press the »OK« key.
234 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Password Forgotten
By pressing the »C« key during cold booting a reset menu will be called up. By selecting »Reset All
Passwords?« and confirming with »Yes« all passwords will be reset to the defaults »1234«.
Changing of Parameters - Example

• Move to the parameter to be change by using the soft keys.
• Press the »Wrench« soft key.
• Enter the password for parameter setting.
• Edit/change the parameter.
Now the User can:
• Save the change made and have it adopted by the system; or
• Change additional parameters and save all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the
system.
To Save Parameter Changes Immediately
• Press the »OK« key to save the changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device.
Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing »No« soft key.
To Change Additional Parameters and Save Afterwards
• Move to other parameters and change them.
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the modifications
have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored and adopted by the
device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex parameter

changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu level, the intended
change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace). This makes
it possible to control or follow from the main menu level at any time where
parameter changes have been made and have not been saved.
In addition to the star trace to the temporarily saved parameter changes, a

general parameter changing symbol is faded in at the left corner of the display. It
is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are parameter
changes still not adopted by the device.
Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by
pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing the »No« soft key.
www.eaton.com 235
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Plausibility Check
In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the device constantly monitors all
temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a conflict, it is
indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter.

changes are involved, a question mark appears above the temporarily saved
parameters (on every superior/higher-ranking menu level). This makes it possible
to control or follow, from the main menu level, where conflicts are intended to be
saved. This can be done at any time.
In addition to the question mark trace to the temporarily saved conflict parameter
changes, a general conflict symbol/question mark is faded-in at the left corner of
the display, and so it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that
conflicts have been detected by the device.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/conflict symbol.
If a device detects a conflict, it rejects saving and adopting of the parameters.
Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example

Example: Changing of a protective parameter (to alter the characteristic for the overcurrent protection function
I[1] in Parameter Set 1).
• If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application.
• If the device data have not been loaded, select »Data To Be Received From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
• Double-click the »Protection Para Icon« in the navigation tree.
• Double-click the »Protection Para Set Icon« in the navigation tree.
• Double-click the »Set 1 Icon« in the navigation tree.
• Double-click the »protection stage I[1]« in the navigation tree.
• In the working window, a tabulated overview appears showing the parameters assigned to this protective
function.
• In this table, double-click the value/parameter to be changed (in this example: »Char«).
• Another window (pop-up) is opened where the User can select the required characteristic.
• Close this window by clicking the »OK« key.
236 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the alterations
have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored and adopted by the
software/device.

changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level, the intended change
of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star trace). This makes it
possible to control or follow, from the main menu level, where parameter changes
have been made and have not been saved. This can be done at any time.
Plausibility Check
In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the application constantly

monitors all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a
conflict, it is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective parameter.

changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level above of the
temporarily saved parameters, a conflict is indicated by a question mark
(plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the main
menu level, where conflicts exist. This can be done at any time.
So it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that conflicts have been
detected by the application.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question

mark/conflict symbol.
If the software detects a conflict, it rejects the saving and adopting of the
parameters.
• Additional parameters can be changed if required.
• In order to transfer changed parameters into the device, please select »Transfer all parameters into the
device« in the »Device« menu.
• Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall The Parameters Be Overwritten?«.
• Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window.
• Confirm the inquiry »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a suitable
storing location on your hard disk.
• Confirm the selected storage location by clicking »Save«.
• The changed parameter data is now saved in the data file chosen. Thereafter, the changed data is
transferred to the device and adopted.
Once the User has entered the parameter setting password, PowerPort-E will not
ask the User again for the password for at least 10 minutes. This time interval
will start again each time parameters are transmitted into the device. If, for more
than 10 minutes, no parameters are transmitted into the device, PowerPort-E will
again ask for the password when the User tries to transmit parameters into the
device.
www.eaton.com 237
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Protection Parameters
Please note that by deactivating, for example protective functions, the User also
changes the functionality of the device.
The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material damage as
a result of incorrect planning.
Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information.
The protection parameters include the following protection parameter trees.
• Global Protection Parameters »Global Prot Para«: Here the User can find all protection parameters that
are universally valid. That means they are valid independent of the protection parameter sets.
• Setting Group Parameters »Set1..4«: The protection parameters that the User set within a parameter set
are only valid if the parameter set selected is switched to active.
Setting Groups
Setting Group Switch
Within the »Protection Para/P-Set Switch« menu, the User has the following possibilities:
• To manually set one of the four setting groups active;

• To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active; and
• Scada switches the setting groups.
Option Setting Group Switch

Manual Selection Switch over, if another setting group is chosen manually within the menu
»Protection Para/P-Set Switch«
Via Input Function Switch over not until the request is clear.
(e.g. Digital Input) That means, if there is more or less than one request signal active, no switch over will be
executed.
Example::
DI3 is assigned onto Parameter set 1. DI3 is active „1“.
DI4 is assigned onto Parameter set 2. DI4 is inactive „0“.
Now the device should switch from parameter set 1 to parameter set 2. Therefore at first DI3
has to become inactive “0”. Than DI4 has to be active “1”.
If DI4 becomes again inactive „0“, parameter set 2 will remain active “1” as long as there is no
clear request (e.g. DI3 becomes active “1”, all the other assignments are inactive “0”)
Via Scada Switch over if there is a clear SCADA request.
Otherwise no switch over will be executed.
The description of the parameters can be found within the “System Parameters”
section.
238 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Signals that Can Be Used for PSS
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.DFT Invalid DFT values of fundamental and harmonics (except VX) are not
valid. They depend on period time of frequency and measured
channels 1-3 (VA/VAB,VB/VBC,VC/VCA).
Prot.DFT Valid DFT values of fundamental and harmonics (except VX) are valid.
They depend on period time of frequency and measured channels
1-3 (VA/VAB,VB/VBC,VC/VCA).
Prot.DFT Invalid (VX) DFT values of fundamental and harmonics of VX (only) are not
valid.
Prot.DFT Valid (VX) DFT values of fundamental and harmonics of VX (only) are valid.
www.eaton.com 239
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
240 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 241
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
242 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 243
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
244 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 245
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
246 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 247
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Setting Group Switch Via PowerPort-E

• Double click the »Protection Para« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click the »P-Set Switch« within the protection parameters.
• To configure the Setting Group Switch respectively, manually choose an active set.
The description of the parameters can be found within the “System Parameters”
section.
Copying Setting Groups (Parameter Sets) Via PowerPort-E
Setting groups can only be copied if there are no conflicts (no red question
marks).
For applications using multiple settings groups, one can use the configuration file from the first group to create
the second group. With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply copy an existing setting group to another
(not yet configured) one. The User only needs to change those parameters where the two setting groups are
different.
To efficiently establish a second parameter set where only few parameters are different, proceed as follows.
• Open a (off-line) parameter file of a device or load data of a connected device.
• Carefully save the relevant device parameters by selecting [File\Save as].
• Select »Copy Parameter Sets« out of the “Edit” menu.
• Then define both source and destination of the parameter sets to be copied (source = copy from;
destination: copy to).
• Click on »OK« to start the copy procedure.
• The copied parameter set is now cached (not yet saved!).
• Then, modify the copied parameter set(s), if applicable.
• Assign a new file name to the revised device parameter file and save it on your hard disk (backup copy).
• To transfer the modified parameters back to the device, click on the »Device« menu item and select
»Transfer All Parameters into the Device«.
248 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Comparing Setting Groups Via PowerPort-E

• Click on menu item »Edit« and select »Compare Parameter Sets«.
• Select the two parameter sets from the two drop down menus that are to be compared with each other.
• Press the »Compare« button.
• The values that are different from the set parameters will be listed in tabular form.
Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E

With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply compare/differentiate the currently open parameter/device file
against a file on the hard disk. The precondition is that the versions and type of devices match. To compare the
parameter files, please proceed as follows.
• Click on »Compare with a Parameter File« within the »Device« menu.
• Click on the Folder icon in order to select a file on your hard disk.
• The differences will be shown in tabular form.
Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E

Parameter files of the same type can be up- or down-graded (converted). During this process, the new
parameter file will keep all active settings from the source parameter file and, at the same time, remove all
inactive settings. As many parameters as possible will be converted.
• Parameters that are newly added will be set to default.
• Parameters that are not included in the target file version will be deleted.
• In order to convert a parameter file please proceed as follows.
• If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application.
• Open a parameter file or load the parameters from a device that should be converted.
• Make a backup of this file in a fail-safe place.
• Choose »Save as« from the »File« menu.
• Enter a new file name (in order to prevent overwriting the original file).
• Choose the new file type from drop down menu »File Type«.
• Confirm the security check by clicking on »Yes« only if the User is sure that the file conversion should be
executed.
• In tabular form the modifications will be shown as follows.
www.eaton.com 249
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Added parameter:
Deleted parameter:
Program Mode
By means of the Program Mode, parameter settings can be locked against any changes as long as one or all of
the breaker(s) are in the »CLOSED« position. The Program Mode can be activated within the [System
Para/General Settings/Program Mode Bypass] menu.
• »Both Bkr Open« - Parameter changes require all breakers to be in the »OPEN« state.
• »Either Bkr Open or Close« - Parameter changes do not require the breaker to be in the »OPEN« state.
Unlike, if the Program Mode is used for Motor Protection devices, the User has the following options:
• »Motor Stop« - Lock parameter changes, if the motor is not in the »STOP« state.
This ensures, that parameter changes can only be done while the motor stands still (zero speed).
• »Either Motor Stopped or Running« - Parameter changes do not require the motor to be in the »Motor
stop« state.
Bypass of the Program Mode
The program mode can be bypassed by means of the Direct Control Parameter »Program Mode Bypass«. The
protective device will drop-out into the program mode either:
• Directly after a parameter change has been saved, else
• 10 minutes after the bypass has been activated.
250 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Parameters
Sys
Date and Time

In the »Device parameters/Date/Time« menu, the User can set the date and time.
The User cannot set time and date manually (manual changes will be ignored), if
the clock of the protective device is synchronized automatically (e.g. via IRIG-B or
SNTP).
Synchronize Date and Time Via PowerPort-E

»Device« menu.
• Double click the »Device parameters« icon in the navigation tree.
• Double click the »Date/time« icon within the operational data.
• From the working window, the User can now synchronize the date and time of the device with the PC
(i.e.: that means that the device accepts the date and time from the PC).
Version
Within the»Device parameters/Version« menu, the User can obtain information on the software and hardware
versions.
Version Via PowerPort-E

Within the »File/Properties« menu, the User can obtain detailed information on the currently opened file (e.g.:
software and hardware version).
In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off line) into the
device, the following parameters must agree:
• Type Code (written on the top of the device/type label); and
• Version of the device model (can be found in the »Device

Parameters\Version« menu).
www.eaton.com 251
IM02602007E EDR-5000
TCP/IP Settings
Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses
(In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network or
establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device based on a
wrong entered IP address.
Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to death,
personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment.
In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and maintain a
list with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices.
The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to be
established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at the HMI
of the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the IP address
with the list. If the addresses are identical, establish the connection. If they are
not, DO NOT establish the connection.
Within »Device Para / TCP/IP« menu, the TCP/IP settings have to be set.
The first-time setting of the TCP/IP Parameters can be done at the panel (HMI) only.
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the device
is equipped with an Ethernet interface (RJ45).
Set the TCP/IP Parameters:
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
• TCP/IP address;
• Subnetmask; and
• Gateway.
Direct Commands of the System Module

Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs will be Inactive, Inactive [Operation
acknowledged. Active /Reset]
Ack RO All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be Inactive, Inactive [Operation
acknowledged. Active /Reset]
Ack Comm Communication will be acknowledged. Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Ack RO LED Reset the Relay Outputs, LEDs, Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Comm TCmd Communication, and the Trip Command. Active /Reset]
252 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Reboot Rebooting the device. No, No [Service
Yes /General]
MaintMode Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch Maint Mode inactive, Inactive [Service
Manually Mode: Manual Activation of the Arc Flash Activation via Comm, /MaintMode Manually]
Reduction Mode Activation via DI,
Inactive,
Only available if: Maint Mode = Activation Active
Manually
Program Mode Short-period bypass of the Program Mode. Inactive, Inactive [System Para
Bypass Active /General Settings]
CAUTION: Manually rebooting the device will release the Supervision Contact.
Global Protection Parameters of the System

PSet-Switch Switching Parameter Set PS1, PSS via Inp fct [Protection Para
PS2, /PSet-Switch]
PS3,
PS4,
PSS via Inp fct,
PSS via Comm
PS1: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para
by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set Inactive /PSet-Switch]
to "Switch via Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive at the same
time. In case there is more than one input
function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input
functions are inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting Group that was
activated lastly.
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via

Inp fct
PS2: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para
by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set Active /PSet-Switch]
activated lastly.

Inp fct
www.eaton.com 253
IM02602007E EDR-5000

PS3: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS -.- [Protection Para
by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set /PSet-Switch]
activated lastly.

Inp fct
PS4: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS -.- [Protection Para
by The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set /PSet-Switch]
activated lastly.

Inp fct
Remote Reset Enables or disables the option to Inactive, Active [Device Para
acknowledge from external/remote via Active /Ex Acknowledge]
signals (assignments) and Communication.
Ack LED All acknowledgeable LEDs will be 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
acknowledged if the state of the assigned /Ex Acknowledge]
signal becomes true.
Ack RO All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
acknowledged if the state of the assigned /Ex Acknowledge]
signal becomes true.
Ack Comm Communication will be acknowledged if the 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Device Para
state of the assigned signal becomes true. /Ex Acknowledge]
Scaling Display of the measured values as primary, Per unit values, Primary values [Operation
secondary, or per unit values Primary values, /General Settings]
Secondary values
Maint Mode Activation Mode of the Arc Flash Reduction. Inactive, Inactive [Service
Switching into another mode is only Activation Manually, /Maint Mode]
possible when no Activation Signal is active Activation via Comm,
(pending). Activation via DI
Maint Mode Activation Signal for the Arc Flash 1..n, Dig Inputs DI-8P X1.DI 7 [Service
Activated by Reduction Maintenance Switch /Maint Mode]
Only available if: Maint Mode Activated by

= Activation via DI
Program Mode Program Mode Either Bkr Open or Close, Either Bkr Open [System Para
Bkr Open or Close /General Settings]
254 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
System Module Input States

Ack LED-I Module Input State: LEDs Acknowledgment [Device Para
by Digital Input. /Ex Acknowledge]
Ack RO-I Module Input State: Acknowledgment of the [Device Para
Relay Outputs. /Ex Acknowledge]
Ack Comm-I Module Input State: Acknowledge [Device Para
Communication via Digital Input. The /Ex Acknowledge]
replica that Communication has received
from the device is to be reset.
PS1-I State of the module input, respectively of [Protection Para
the signal, that should activate this /PSet-Switch]
Parameter Setting Group.
Maint Mode-I Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction [Service
Maintenance Switch /Maint Mode]
System Module Signals

Name Description
Reboot Signal: Rebooting the device: 1=Restart initiated by power supply;
2=Restart initiated by the User; 3=Set on defaults (Super Reset);
4=Restart by the debugger; 5=Restart because of configuration
change; 6=General failure; 7=Restart initiated by System Abort
(host side); 8=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (host side);
9=Restart initiated by System Abort (dsp side); 10=Restart initiated
by watchdog timeout (dsp side); 11=Power supply failure (short
term interruption) or power supply voltage to low; 12=illegal
memory access.
Act Set Signal: Active Parameter Set
PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
PSS manual Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set
PSS via Comm Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication
PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function
Min. 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Program Mode Bypass Signal: Short-period bypass of the Program Mode.
www.eaton.com 255
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Maint Mode Active Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Maint Mode Inactive Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
MaintMode Manually Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode
Maint Mode Comm Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm Mode
Maint Mode DI Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode
Param to be saved Number of parameters to be saved. 0 means that all parameter
changes are overtaken.
Ack LED Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment
Ack RO Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs
Ack Counter Signal: Reset of all Counters
Ack Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication
Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :HMI
Ack RO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :HMI
Ack Counter-HMI Signal: Reset of all Counters :HMI
Ack Comm-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Communication :HMI
Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Ack LED-Comm Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :Communication
Ack RO-Comm Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :Communication
Ack Counter-Comm Signal: Reset of all Counters :Communication
Ack Comm-Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication :Communication
Ack TripCmd-Comm Signal: Reset Trip Command :Communication
Special Values of the System Module

Build Build [Device Para
/Version]
Version Version [Device Para
/Version]
Operating hours Cr Operating hours counter of the protective [Operation
device /Count and RevData
/Sys]
256 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
System Parameters
System Para
Within the system parameters, the User can set all parameters that are relevant for the primary side and the
mains operational method like frequency, primary and secondary values, and the star point treatment.
General System Parameters

Phase Phase Sequence direction ABC, ABC [System Para
Sequence ACB /General Settings]
f Nominal frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz [System Para
60 Hz /General Settings]
Voltage depending System Parameters

Main VT pri Enter the primary phase to phase voltage of 60 – 500000 V 12000 V [System Para
the VTs /General Settings]
Main VT sec Enter the secondary phase to phase 60.00 – 600.00 V 120 V [System Para
voltage of the VTs /General Settings]
Main VT con Main VTs connection Wye, Wye [System Para
Phase-to-Phase, Open-Delta /General Settings]
Aux VT pri Primary voltage of Aux VTs 60 – 500000 V 12000 V [System Para
/General Settings]
Aux VT sec Secondary voltage of Aux VTs 35.00 – 600.00 V 120 V [System Para
/General Settings]
V Sync The fourth measuring input of the voltage A, A [System Para
measuring card measures the voltage that B, /General Settings]
is to be synchronized. C,
AB,
BC,
CA
Phase MTA Maximum Torque Angle: Angle between 0 - 360° 30° [System Para
phase current and reference voltage in case /Direction]
of a short circuit. This angle is needed to
determine the fault direction in case of short
circuits.
IR Dir Cntrl Options for direction detection. IR is used IR 3V0, IR 3V0 [System Para
as operating quantity. IR IPol, /Direction]
IR Dual,
IR Neg
IX Dir Cntrl Options for direction detection. IX is used IX 3V0, IX 3V0 [System Para
as operating quantity. IX Neg, /Direction]
IX Dual
www.eaton.com 257
IM02602007E EDR-5000
3V0 Source Earth overcurrent protection elements take Measured, Calculated [System Para
into account this parameter for direction Calculated /Direction]
decisions. You have to ensure, that this
parameter is set to "Measured" only if the
ground current is fed to the fourth
measuring input of the current measuring
card.
Ground MTA Ground Maximum Torque Angle: Angle 0 - 360° 110° [System Para
between chosen operating quantity and /Direction]
chosen reference quantity in case of a
ground fault. This angle is needed to
determine the ground fault direction in case
of a short circuit. Depending on the
selected ground direction option, different
MTA values are used: IR 3V0, IX 3V0 :
Ground MTA; IR Neg, IX Neg : 90° + Phase
MTA; IR IPol : 0°; IR Dual : 0° (if I2 and V2
available) or Ground MTA; IX Dual : 90° +
Phase MTA (if I2 and V2 available) or
Ground MTA.
Current Depending System Parameters

CT con Current transformer connection 3-wire, 3-wire [System Para
4th CT IN, /General Settings]
4th CT IG
CT pri Nominal current of the primary side of the 1 – 50000 A 500 A [System Para
current transformers. /General Settings]
CT sec Nominal current of the secondary side of 1 A, 5A [System Para
the current transformers. 5A /General Settings]
CT dir Protection functions with directional feature 0°, 0° [System Para
can only work properly if the connection of 180° /General Settings]
the current transformers is free of wiring
errors. If all current transformers are
connected to the device with an incorrect
polarity, the wiring error can be
compensated by this parameter. This
parameter turns the current vectors by 180
degrees.
XCT pri This parameter defines the primary nominal 1 – 50000 A 50 A [System Para
current of the connected ground current /General Settings]
transformer. If the ground current is
measured via the Residual connection, the
primary value of the phase current
transformer must be entered here.
XCT sec This parameter defines the secondary 1 A, 5A [System Para
nominal current of the connected ground 5A /General Settings]
current transformer. If the ground current is
done via the Residual connection, the
primary value of the phase current
transformer must be entered here.
258 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
XCT dir Ground fault protection with directional 0°, 0° [System Para
feature depends also on the correct wiring 180° /General Settings]
of the ground current transformer. An
incorrect polarity/wiring can be corrected by
means of the settings "0°" or "180°". The
operator has the possibility of turning the
current vector by "180°" (change of sign)
without modification of the wiring. This
means, that – in terms of figures - the
determined current indicator was turned by
"180°" by the device.
www.eaton.com 259
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Blocking
The device provides a function for temporary blocking of the complete protection functionality or of single
protections.
Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life-threatening blockings are

allocated.
Make sure not to carelessly deactivate protection functions that have to be

available according to the protection concept.
Permanent Blocking
Switching “On” or “Off” the Complete Protection Functionality
In the »Protection« module, the complete protection of the device can be switched “On” or “Off”. Set the
Function parameter to »Active« or »Inactive« in the »Prot« module.
Protection is activated only if in the »Prot« module the parameter Function is =

»Active« (i.e.: with »Function« = »Inactive«, no protection function are operating).
If »Function« = »Inactive«, then the device cannot protect any components.
Switching Modules “On” or “Off”
Each of the modules can be switched “On” or “Off” (permanently). This is achieved when the »Function«
parameter is set to »Active« or »Inactive« in the respective module.
Activating or Deactivating the Tripping Command of a Protection Permanently
In each of the protections, the tripping command to the breaker can be permanently blocked. For this purpose,
the »TripCmd Blo« parameter has to be set to »Active«.
Temporary Blocking
To Block the Complete Protection of the Device Temporarily by a Signal
In the »Prot« module, the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal. On the
condition that a module-external blocking is permitted (»ExBlo Fc=active«). In addition to this, a related blocking
signal from the »Assignment list« must have been assigned. For the time the allocated blocking signal is active,
the module is blocked.
If the »Prot« module is blocked, the complete protection function does not work.
As long as the blocking signal is active, the device cannot protect any
components.
To Block a Complete Protection Module Temporarily by an Active Assignment
• In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module, the parameter »ExBlo Fc« of the
module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »This module can be blocked«.
• Within the general protection parameters, a signal has to be additionally chosen from the »Assignment
list«. The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active.
260 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
To Block the Tripping Command of a Protection Element Temporarily by an Active Assignment
The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from an external signal. In this case,
external does not only mean from outside the device, but also from outside the module. Not only real external
signals are permitted to be used as blocking signals (for example: the state of a digital input), but the User can
also choose any other signal from the »Assignment list«.
• In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection element, the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc«
of the module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »The tripping command of this
element can be blocked«.
• Within the general protection parameters, an additional signal has to be chosen and assigned to the
»ExBlo« parameter from the »Assignment list«. If the selected signal is activated, the temporary
blockage becomes effective.
www.eaton.com 261
262
IM02602007E
Trip Blockings
Name = All Modules That Are Blockable
Name.Blo TripCmd
EDR-5000
Inactive
Active
www.eaton.com
Name.Blo TripCmd
OR 3
Name.ExBlo TripCmd Fc
Inactive
Active
Name.ExBlo TripCmd
AND
Name.ExBlo TripCmd
Name.ExBlo TripCmd-I
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module
Blockings
Name =All Modules That Are Blockable
Frequency is within the nominal frequency range.(*)( ** )
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot

Prot. Active
1 (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)
Name.Function Name.Active
AND 2
Inactive
Active
EDR-5000
Name.ExBlo Fc
Inactive
Functions
Active
www.eaton.com
N am e.ExBlo
AND
Name.ExBlo 1
Name.ExBlo1-I
1..n, A ssignment List
OR
Name.ExBlo 2
Name.ExBlo2-I
*
Frequency range info1.
**
Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection
IM02602007E
263
264
IM02602007E
Blockings **
Name = I[1]...[n], IG[1]...[n]
Frequency is within the nominal frequenc y range.( *) (**)
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot

Prot. Active
1 (The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)
Name.Func tion
Inactive
Name.Active
Active AND 4
Name.ExBlo Fc
Inactive
Active
N ame.ExBlo
AND
Name.ExBlo 1
Name.ExBlo1-I
EDR-5000
1..n, Ass ignment List
OR
Name.ExBlo 2
Name.ExBlo2-I
www.eaton.com
Name.Rv s Blo Fc
Inactive
Active
Name.Rvs Blo
AND
blocking signal from the »Assignment list«, but also by »Reverse Interlocking«.
Name.Rvs Blo
Name.Rvs Blo-I
1..n, Ass ignment List
*
**
All other protection functions can be activated, deactivated, or blocked in the same manner.

Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»Function = Inactive«) or temporarily by any
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Protection (Prot) Module

Prot
The »Protection« module serves as the outer frame for all other protection modules (i.e.: they are all enclosed by
the »Protection« Module).
In the case where the »Protection« module is blocked, the complete protective
function of the device is disabled.
Module Prot Blocked - Protection Inactive:
If the master »Protection« module is allowed to be temporarily blocked and the allocated blocking signals are
active, then all protection functions will be disabled. In such a case, the protective function is »Inactive«.
Protection Active:
If the master »Protection« module was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively,
the assigned blocking signals are inactive at that moment, then the »Protection« is »Active«.
How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions

In order to block all protective and supervisory functions, call up the menu [Protection/Para/Global Prot
Para/Prot]:
• Set the parameter »ExBlo Fc = active«;
• Choose an assignment for »ExBlo1«; and
• Optionally choose an assignment for »ExBlo2«.
If the signal becomes true, then all protective and supervisory functions will be blocked as long as one of these
signals are true.
www.eaton.com 265
266
Prot - Active
IM02602007E
At the moment, no parameter is being changed (except parameter set parameters).
Prot.Available
AND
Measured Values: OK
Prot.Active
AND 1
EDR-5000
Prot.ExBlo Fc
Inactive
Active
www.eaton.com
Prot.ExBlo
AND
Prot.ExBlo 1
Prot.ExBlo1-I
OR
Prot.ExBlo 2
Prot.ExBlo2-I
Prot.ExBlo 3**
Prot.ExBlo3-I
Selection List
**=Availability of third blocking input depends on device and module

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Each protection element generates its own pickup and trip signals, which are automatically passed onto the
»Prot« module where the phase based and general (collective) pickup and trip signals are generated. The
»Prot« module serves as a top level and a common place to group all pickups and trips from each individual
protection element.
For instance, »PROT.PICKUP PHASE A« is the phase A pickup signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.TRIP
PHASE A« is the phase A trip signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.PICKUP« is the collective pickup
signal OR-ed from all protection elements; Prot.Trip is the collective Trip signal OR-ed from all protection
elements, and etc. The Tripping commands of the protection elements have to be fed to the »Bkr Manager«
module for further trip request processing.
The tripping commands are executed by the »Bkr Manager« module. Tripping
commands have to be assigned to a breaker. The Breaker Manager will issue the trip
command to the breaker.
If a protection element is activated and respectively decides to trip, two pickup signals will be created.
1. The module or the protection element issues an pickup/alarm (e.g.: »50P[1].PICKUP or »50P[1].TRIP«).
2. The master »Prot« module collects/summarizes the signals and issues a pickup/alarm or a trip signal
»PROT.PICKUP« »PROT.TRIP«.
www.eaton.com 267
268
IM02602007E
Prot.Trip
Name = Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
Name.Trip
15
Name.Trip
15 Prot.Trip
... OR
Name[n].Trip
15
Prot.Pickup
Name = Each pickup of a module (except from supervision modules but including BF) will lead to a general pickup (collective pickup).
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
Name.Pickup
14
Name.Pickup
14 Prot.Pickup
OR
...
Name.Pickup
14
IM02602007E
269
270
Prot.Trip
IM02602007E
Each phase selective trip of a trip authorized module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general trip.
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A*
16a
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A*
16b OR Prot.Trip Phase A
V[n].Trip Phase A*
20
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B*
17a
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B* Prot.Trip Phase B
17b OR
V[n].Trip Phase B*
EDR-5000
21
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C*
18a
www.eaton.com
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C* Prot.Trip Phase C
18b OR
*=Depending on the type of device

V[n].Trip Phase C*
22
50X[1]...[n].Trip*
19a
51X[1]...[n].Trip*
19b
50R[1]...[n].Trip*
19c
51R[1]...[n].Trip* Prot.Trip IX or IR
19d OR
59[n].TripCmd*
23
Prot.Pickup
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the

device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective
pickup).
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IA*
24a
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IA* Prot.Pickup Phase A
24b OR
V[n].Pickup Phase A*
28
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IB*
25a
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IB* Prot.Pickup Phase B

25b OR
EDR-5000
V[n].Pickup Phase B*
29
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IC*
www.eaton.com
26a
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IC* Prot.Pickup Phase C
*=Depending on the type of device

26b OR
V[n].Pickup Phase C*
30
50X[1]...[n].Pickup*
27a
51X[1]...[n].Pickup*
27b
OR Prot.Pickup IX or IR
50R[1]...[n].Pickup*
27c
51R[1]...[n].Pickup*
27d
59[n].Pickup*
31
IM02602007E
271
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the Protection Module

Res Fault a Resetting of fault number and number of Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Mains No grid faults. Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module

ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) the external blocking of the Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
global protection functionality of the device. Active /Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo1 If external blocking of this module is 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
activated (allowed), the global protection /Global Prot Para
functionality of the device will be blocked if /Prot]
the state of the assigned signal becomes
true.
ExBlo2 If external blocking of this module is 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
activated (allowed), the global protection /Global Prot Para
functionality of the device will be blocked if /Prot]
the state of the assigned signal becomes
true.
Protection Module Input States

ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1 [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
Protection Module Signals (Output States)

Name Description
Available Signal: Protection is available.
Pickup Phase A Signal: General Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B Signal: General Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C Signal: General Pickup Phase C
Pickup IX or IR Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault
Pickup Signal: General Pickup
Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B
272 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip IX or IR Signal: General Trip Ground Fault
Trip Signal: General Trip
Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Protection Module Values

FaultNo Waveform No. [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Prot]
No of grid faults Number of grid faults: A grid fault, e.g. a [Operation
short circuit, might cause several faults with /Count and RevData
trip and autoreclosing, each fault being /Prot]
identified by an increased fault number. In
this case, the grid fault number remains the
same.
www.eaton.com 273
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Switchgear/Breaker - Manager
Bkr
WARNING: Misconfiguration of the Breaker could result in death or serious

injury.
Breaker Configuration
For the configuration of the breaker, great attention has to be payed to the following steps:
• Wiring
• Switching Authority
• POS Indicators wiring
• General Settings
• Trip Manager
• Interlockings
• Ex OPEN/CLOSE (Option)
• Synchronous Switching
It is recommended to use the status display in order to verify and analyze each of the steps.
NOTICE: The “Syn-check” function is not available on EMR-XXXX devices.
The User has to establish the wiring of the Position Indicators of the Breaker to the Digital Inputs of the
protective device (52a or 52b or both (recommended)).
The User has to wire a Relay Output for the Trip command.
In case, the protective device is used for control purposes, two additional Relay Outputs have to be wired for the
Control commands (issue the OPEN and CLOSE commands). That means the Relay Output for the Breaker
Open and the Relay Output for the Breaker Close command.
Switching Authority
For the Switching Authority [Control\General Settings], the following general settings are possible:
None: No switching authority (switching not allowed);

Local: Switching only via push buttons at the panel;
Remote: Switching only via SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals; and
Local and Remote: Switching via push buttons, SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals.
POS Indicators wiring

In the menu [Control/Breaker/Pos Indicators wiring], the signals for the switchgear status indication (position and
ready) are to be assigned.
Position Indication with two contacts - 52a and 52b (recommended)
To identify the current position of the switchgear, the switchgear contact outputs have to be used (called 52a/52b
at a breaker). The Position Indication can work on either one or both of these inputs. Nevertheless, it is
274 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
recommended that both are used.
The protective device monitors and evaluates continuously the Status of the Input Signals CinBkr52a-I and
CinBkr52b-I. These signals are validated based on the supervision timers »t-Move CLOSE« and »t-Move
OPEN« validation functions. As a result, the breaker position will be detected by the following signals:
• Pos CLOSE;
• Pos OPEN;
• Pos Indeterm;
• Pos Disturb; and
• Pos State (0, 1, 2 or 3).
CLOSE initiated (Supervision)

When a CLOSE command is initiated, the »t-Move CLOSE« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the
»POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end
position before the timer has elapsed, »POS CLOSE« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS
DISTURB« will become true.
OPEN initiated (Supervision)

When an OPEN command is initiated, the »t-Move OPEN« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the
»POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end
position before the timer has elapsed, »POS OPEN« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS
DISTURB« will become true.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a and 52b:
States of the Digital Inputs Validated Breaker Positions

CinBkr52a-I CinBkr52b-I Pos CLOSE Pos OPEN Pos Indeterm Pos Disturb Breaker
State
0 0 0 0 1 0 0
(while a Moving timer (while a Moving timer Intermediate
is running) is running)
1 1 0 0 1 0 0
(while a Moving timer (while a Moving timer Intermediate
0 1 0 1 0 0 1
OPEN
1 0 1 0 0 0 2
CLOSE
0 0 0 0 0 1 3
(Moving timer (Moving timer elapsed) Disturbed
elapsed)
1 1 0 0 0 1 3
(Moving timer (Moving timer elapsed) Disturbed
elapsed)
If for any reason only one breaker contact (52a or 52b) is wired, the Single Contact Indication can be used.
Single Contact Indication
The moving time supervision works only in one direction. If the 52a signal is connected to the device, only the
“CLOSE command” can be supervised and if the 52b signal is connected to the device, only the “OPEN
command” can be supervised.
If the single contact indication is used, the »SI SINGLECONTACTIND« will become true.
www.eaton.com 275
IM02602007E EDR-5000
NOTICE: In case of single contact indication, the protective device can monitor
either the 52a or the 52b contact only. In case of the 52a, the device will monitor /
supervise the CLOSE command. In case of the 52b, the device will monitor /
supervise the OPEN command.
Single Contact Indication – 52a only
If only the 52a signal is used for the Status Indication of an “CLOSE command”, the switch command will also
start the moving time, the position indication indicates an INTERMEDIATE position during this time interval.
When the switchgear reaches the end position indicated by the Pos CLOSE signal, the moving time will be
terminated. If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the end position, the switching
operation was not successful and the Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB.
An OPEN command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive an open signal by the
breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in open position after the moving time has elapsed.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a only:
States of the Digital Input Validated Breaker Positions

State
0 Not wired 0 0 1 0 0
(while t-Move CLOSE (while t-Move CLOSE Intermediate
0 Not wired 0 1 0 0 1
OFF
1 Not wired 1 0 0 0 2
ON
1 Not wired 0 0 0 1 3
(after t-Move CLOSE (after t-Move CLOSE Disturbed
is elapsed) is elapsed)
Single Contact Indication – 52b only
If only the 52b signal is used for the monitoring of the “OPEN command”, the switch command will start the
moving timer. The Position Indication will indicate an INTERMEDIATE position. If the moving time elapsed
before the switchgear has reached the OPEN position, the switching operation was not successful and the
Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB.
A CLOSE command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive a close signal by the
breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in close position after the moving time has elapsed.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52b only:

State
Not wired 0 0 0 1 0 0
(while t-Move OPEN is (while t-Move OPEN is Intermediate
running) running)
Not wired 0 0 1 0 0 1
OFF
276 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Not wired 1 1 0 0 0 2
ON
Not wired 1 0 0 0 1 3
(after t-Move OPEN is (after t-Move OPEN is Disturbed
elapsed) elapsed)
General Settings
In the menu [Control/Breaker/General Settings], the moving times for opening and closing of the breaker can be
set.
Trip Manager
In the Trip Manger all tripping commands are combined by an “OR” logic. The actual tripping command to the
breaker is exclusively given by the Trip Manager. This means, that only tripping commands which are assigned
in the Trip Manager lead to an operation of the breaker. In addition to that, the User can set the minimum hold
time of the tripping command within this module and define whether the tripping command is latched or not.
Tripable Elements:
Name Description
-.- No assignment
50P[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
27M[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
27A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
www.eaton.com 277
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
59N[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
46[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
32V[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
ZI.TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
278 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
S ig n a l B re a k e r C L O S E B re a k e r O P E N C o m m a n d
S ig n a l B re a k e r O P E N B re a k e r C L O S E C o m m a n d
S ig n a l B re a k e r R e a d y P ro te c tio n T rip C o m m a n d
B re a k e r
T rig g e[x]r
T rig g e[x]r P o s itio n In d ic a: tio n

O P E ,NC L O S, E
T rig g e[x]r In d e te rm in a, te
D is
d tu rb e d
HMI
T rip C o m m a5 n0P[x]
d SCADA
I P r o te c tio n M o d u le
T rip C o m m a5 n1P[x]
d
A u to re c lo s uCre
LO SE
T rip C o m m a n [x]
d XX
T rip C o m m a2 n7[x]
d
V P ro te c tio n M o d u le
T rip C o m m a5 n9[x]
d
T rip C o m m a n [x]
d XX
www.eaton.com 279
280
IM02602007E
Bkr.Trip Bkr
Name =Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.
Name.TripCmd
15
OR
Name.TripCmd
15
Name.TripCmd
15 . Bkr.t-TripCmd
. 1
. OR t
. Bkr.Trip Bkr
OR 11
Name.TripCmd
15
Name.TripCmd
15
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
Bkr.Latched
AND S Q
Active
R Q
Inactive
Acknowledge -HMI
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List

OR Counter
Acknowledge-Comm
+ TripCmd Cr
Bkr.Res TripCmdCr
R
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Interlockings
There are three interlocking inputs for each switching direction (OPEN/CLOSE) available. Switching into the
corresponding switching direction can be inhibited via these inputs. Please note: The Protection Trip commands
and the reclosure command of the auto reclosure module will be issued without interlocking. In cases when the
breaker must not be opened, the protection trip command has to be inhibited by a separate blocking signal.
Bkr.TripCmd
41
42
Bkr.OPEN Cmd
Bkr.Prot CLOSE
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd
AND
AND
Trip command Interlockings

assigned and
configured within the
Trip manager
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Bkr CLOSE Cmd

Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Bkr OPEN Cmd
Bkr OPEN Cmd
Bkr OPEN Cmd

Protection issues Trip
Command (e.g. 50P)
Release by synchronizing unit
(Automatic Switch Command)
Switch command request via

(Manual Switch Command)

Communication issues the
Auto reclosure issues the
HMI issues the following

following commands:
following commands:
Digital Input:
commands:
15
15
15
www.eaton.com 281
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Ex OPEN/CLOSE
If the breaker should be opened or closed by an external signal, the User can assign one signal that will trigger
the CLOSE and one signal that will trigger the OPEN command (e.g.: digital inputs or output signals of the
Logic).
An applied CLOSE command will be overwritten by an upcoming OPEN command. An applied OPEN command
will not be overwritten by an upcoming CLOSE command, that means, the OPEN command is dominant.
Synchronous Switching
If a signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the closing of the switchgear will be performed only when this
signal gets active during the maximum allowed waiting time »t-MaxSyncSuperv«.
If no signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the synchronism release is permanent.
Direct Commands of the Switchgear/Breaker

Res Bwear Sl Resetting the slow breaker alarm Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Breaker Active /Reset]
Ack TripCmd Acknowledge Trip Command Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Switchgear/Breaker

CinBkr-52a The breaker is in CLOSE-position if the 1..n, Dig Inputs DI-8P X1.DI 5 [Control
state of the assigned signal is true (52a). /Bkr
/Pos Indicators wiring]
CinBkr-52b The breaker is in OPEN-position if the state 1..n, Dig Inputs DI-8P X1.DI 6 [Control
of the assigned signal is true (52b). /Bkr
Ready Breaker is ready for operation if the state of 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Control
the assigned signal is true. This digital /Bkr
input can be used by some protective /Pos Indicators wiring]
elements (if they are available within the
device) like Auto Reclosure (AR), e.g. as a
trigger signal.
Interl CLOSE1 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List Wired Inputs.Bkr [Control
Trouble-I /Bkr
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE2 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control
/Bkr
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE3 Interlocking of the CLOSE command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control
/Bkr
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN1 Interlocking of the OPEN command 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control
/Bkr
/Interlockings]
282 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Bkr
/Interlockings]
/Bkr
/Interlockings]
SC CLOSE Switching CLOSE Command, e.g. the state 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
of the Logic or the state of the digital input /Bkr
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE
Cmd]
SC OPEN Switching OPEN Command, e.g. the state 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Control
of the Logic or the state of the digital input /Bkr
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE
Cmd]
t-TripCmd Minimum hold time of the OPEN-command 0 – 300.00 s 0.2 s [Control
(Breaker, load break switch) /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
Latched Defines whether the Relay Output will be Inactive, Inactive [Control
Latched when it picks up. Active /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
Ack TripCmd Ack TripCmd 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Control
/Bkr
/Trip Manager]
Trigger1 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 50P[1].TripCmd [Control
of the assigned signal becomes true. /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger7 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 50X[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
www.eaton.com 283
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Trip Manager]
Trigger11 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 50R[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger15 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 27M[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger19 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 27A[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger23 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 59N[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
Trigger24 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 59N[2].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
Trigger25 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 46[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
284 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger33 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 32V[1].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
Trigger34 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds 32V[2].TripCmd [Control
/Trip Manager]
Trigger35 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds PF- [Control
of the assigned signal becomes true. 55D[1].TripCmd /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
of the assigned signal becomes true. 55D[2].TripCmd /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
of the assigned signal becomes true. 55A[1].TripCmd /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
of the assigned signal becomes true. 55A[2].TripCmd /Bkr
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Trigger40 Open Command to the Breaker if the state 1..n, Trip Cmds -.- [Control
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
www.eaton.com 285
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
/Trip Manager]
Synchronism Synchronism 1..n, In-SyncList -.- [Control
/Bkr
/Synchronous
Switching]
t- Synchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0 – 3000.00 s 0.2 s [Control
MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate. /Bkr
v Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM /Synchronous
working mode. Switching]
t-Move CLOSE Time to move to the CLOSE Position 0.01 – 100.00 s 0.1 s [Control
/Bkr
/General Settings]
t-Move OPEN Time to move to the OPEN Position 0.01 – 100.00 s 0.1 s [Control
/Bkr
/General Settings]
Switchgear/Breaker Input States

CinBkr-52a-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Control
Bkr (52a) /Bkr
286 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Control
Bkr. (52b) /Bkr
Ready-I Module Input State: Breaker Ready [Control
/Bkr
Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has [Control
to become true within the synchronization /Bkr
time. If not, switching is unsuccessful. /Synchronous Switching]
Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgment [Control
Signal (only for automatic /Bkr
acknowledgment). Module input signal /Trip Manager]
Interl CLOSE1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of [Control
the CLOSE command /Bkr
/Interlockings]
/Interlockings]
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of [Control
the OPEN command /Bkr
/Interlockings]
/Interlockings]
/Interlockings]
SC CLOSE-I State of the module input: Switching [Control
CLOSE Command, e.g. the state of the /Bkr
Logic or the state of the digital input /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd]
SC OPEN-I State of the module input: Switching OPEN [Control
Command, e.g. the state of the Logic or the /Bkr
state of the digital input /Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd]
Switchgear/Breaker Signals (Output States)
Name Description
SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions
cannot be detected.
Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
www.eaton.com 287
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feed-
back signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After
expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
State Signal: Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OPEN, 2 =
CLOSE, 3 = Disturbed)
Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
Interl CLOSE Signal: One or more IL_Close inputs are active.
Interl OPEN Signal: One or more IL_Open inputs are active.
CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position.
CES Fail TripCmd Command Execution Supervision: Command execution failed
because trip command is pending.
CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision respectively Switching Direction
Control: This signal becomes true, if a switch command is issued
even though the switchgear is already in the requested position.
Example: A switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched
OPEN again (doubly). The same applies to CLOSE commands.
CES CLOSE d OPEN Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
pending OPEN Command.
CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed because of field interlocking.
CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running.
Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module
TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm
Res Bwear Sl Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm
CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the
Prot module.
OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot
module.
CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
Sync CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
288 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Switching the Breaker at the Panel

Ctrl
Manually switching a switchgear at the device panel is possible at the following switching authorities:
• Local
• Local and Remote
Assumed the device displays the main screen:
1. Press the »Menu« softkey.
2. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey
button.
3. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey
button.
4. A symbol for the switchgear and its status (ON, OFF, intermediate or disturbed) is displayed.
5. Dependent on the status (ON/OFF), the switchgear can be switched ON or OFF by the corresponding
softkey.
The current position of the switchgear will be visualized by different symbols:
Breaker State Symbol

0
(Intermediate)
1
(Off)
2
(ON)
3
(Disturbed)
Direct Commands of the Switching Authority

Switching Switching Authority None, Local [Control
Authority Local, /General Settings]
Remote,
Local and Remote
www.eaton.com 289
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Signals of the Switching Authority
Name Description
Local Switching Authority: Local
Remote Switching Authority: Remote
Counters of the Switching Authority

CES SAuthority Command Execution Supervision: [Operation
Switching Command not executed. No /Status display
switching authority. /Ctrl]
CES DoubleOperating Command Execution Supervision: A second [Operation
switch command is in conflict with a /Status display
pending one. /Ctrl]
No. of rej. Com No. of rej. Com because Locked by []
ParaSystem
Breaker Wear
The protective relay offers the following Breaker Wear features:
• Monitoring of the accumulated interrupted currents.

• Slow breaker alarm
• Calculation of the Breaker Open Capacity »Bkr OPEN capacity«. 100% means that breaker
maintenance is mandatory now.
• Breaker Wear Curve
• Monitoring of total CLOSE/OPEN cycles and alarm for max allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles per hour.
Slow Breaker Alarm

An increase of the closing or opening time of the breaker is an indication for the maintenance need of this
switchgear. If the measured time exceeds the time »t-Move OPEN« or »t-Move CLOSE«, the signal »BWEAR
SLOW BREAKER« will be activated. This signal will be active until it is reset manually.
Breaker Wear Curve

In order to keep the breaker in good working condition, the breaker needs to be monitored. The breaker health
(operation life) depends above all on:
• The number of CLOSE/OPEN cycles and

• The amplitudes of the interrupting currents.
The User has to maintain the breaker accordingly to the maintenance schedule that is to be provided by the
manufacturer (breaker operation statistics). By means of up to ten points that the User can replicate the breaker
wear curve within menu [Control/Breaker/BWear]. Each point has two settings: the interrupt current in kilo
amperes and the allowed operation counts. The first point is always the number of allowed operations if no
current is flowing (zero current). No matter how many points are used, the operation counts the last point as
zero. The protective relay will interpolate the allowed operations based on the breaker wear curve. When the
interrupted current is greater than the interrupt current at the last point, the protective relay will assume zero
operation counts.
290 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Breaker Maintenance Curve for a typical 25kV Breaker
4
1× 10
0.0 1.2
10 00 0 10 00 0
3
1× 1 0
Number of Operations
8.0
15 0
1 00
2 0.0
10 12
2 0.0
1 0
0.1 1 10 100
Interrupted Current in kA per operation
Global Protection Parameters of the Breaker Wear Module

Operations Service Alarm, too many Operations 1 - 100000 9999 [Control
Alarm /Bkr
/Bwear]
Isum Intr Alarm Alarm, the Sum (Limit) of interrupting 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 100.00 kA [Control
currents has been exceeded. /Bkr
/Bwear]
Isum Intr ph Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 100.00 kA [Control
Alm interrupting currents has been exceeded. /Bkr
/Bwear]
www.eaton.com 291
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Bwear Curve The Breaker Wear Curve defines the Inactive, Inactive [Control
Fc maximum allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles Active /Bkr
depending on the brake currents. If the /Bwear]
breaker maintenance curve is exceeded, an
alarm will be issued. The breaker
maintenance curve is to be taken from the
technical data sheet of the breaker
manufacturer. By means of the available
points this curve is to be replicated.
WearLevel Breaker Wear curve Alarm 0.00 - 100.00% 80.00% [Control
Alarm /Bkr
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active /Bwear]
WearLevel Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level 0.00 - 100.00% 95.00% [Control
Lockout /Bkr
Current1 Interrupted Current Level #1 0.00 – 2000.00 kA 0.1 kA [Control
/Bkr
Count1 Open Counts Allowed #1 1 - 32000 10000 [Control
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
292 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
/Bkr
Breaker Wear Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
Isum Intr trip: IA Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IA
Isum Intr trip: IB Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IB
Isum Intr trip: IC Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IC
Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase.
Res TripCmdCr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands
Res Isum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
WearLevel Alarm Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm
WearLevel Lockout Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level
Res Bwear Curve Signal: Reset of the Breaker Wear maintenance curve.
Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has
been exceeded.
Res Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Reset of the Alarm, "the per hour Sum (Limit) of
interrupting currents has been exceeded".
www.eaton.com 293
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Breaker Wear Counter Values

TripCmd Cr Counter: Total number of trips of the 0 0 - 200000 [Operation
switchgear (breaker, load break /Count and RevData
switch…). Resettable with Total or /Bkr]
All.
Breaker Wear Values

Isum trip IA Summation of the tripping currents 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation
phase /Count and RevData
/Bkr]
Isum trip IB Summation of the tripping currents 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation
/Bkr]
Isum trip IC Summation of the tripping currents 0.00 A 0.00 – 1000.00 A [Operation
/Bkr]
Isum Intr per hour Sum per hour of interrupting 0.00 kA 0.00 – 1000.00 kA [Operation
currents. /Count and RevData
/Bkr]
Bkr OPEN capacity Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% means, 0.0% 0.0 - 100.0% [Operation
that the breaker is to be maintained. /Count and RevData
/Bkr]
Direct Commands of the Breaker Wear Module

Res TripCmdCr Resetting of the Counter: total number of Inactive, Inactive [Operation
trip commands Active /Reset]
Res Isum trip Reset summation of the tripping currents Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Res Isum Intr Sum per hour of interrupting currents. Inactive, Inactive [Operation
per hour Active /Reset]
Res Bkr OPEN Resetting of the Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% Inactive, Inactive [Operation
capacity means, that the breaker is to be maintained. Active /Reset]
Trigger Signals for Sync-check
NOTICE: The “Syn-check” function is not available on EMR-XXXX devices.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
294 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Sync.In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed
www.eaton.com 295
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
296 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 297
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
298 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 299
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
300 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 301
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
302 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Control - Example: Switching of a Breaker
The following example shows how to switch a breaker via the HMI at the device.
Change into the menu »Control« or alternatively push the »CTRL« button at the device
front.
Change to the control page by pushing the »right arrow« softkey.
www.eaton.com 303
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Information only: On the control page the current switchgear positions is displayed. By means of
the softkey »Mode« it can be switched to the menu »General Settings«. In this
menu switching authority and interlockings can be set.
By means of the softkey »SG« it can be switched to the menu »SG«. In this
menu specific settings for the switch gear can be done.
To execute a switching operation, change into the switching menu by pushing

the right arrow softkey button.
Executing a switching command via the devices HMI is only possible when the
switching authority is set to »Local«. If no switching authority is given, this has to
be set first to »Local« or »Local and Remote«.
With the softkey »OK« it can be switched back to the single line diagram page.
Pushing the softkey »Mode« leads to the menu »General Settings«.
In this menu the switching authority can be changed.
Select between »Local« or »Local and Remote«.
Now it is possible to execute switching commands at the HMI.
Push the »right arrow« softkey to get to the control page.
The breaker is opened, therefore it can be closed only.

After pushing the softkey »CLOSE« a confirmation window appears.
304 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
When you are sure to proceed with the switching operation, press the softkey
»YES«.
The switching command will be given to the breaker. The display shows the
intermediate position of the switchgear.
It will be shown on the display when the switchgear reaches the new end
position. Further possible switching operations (OPEN) will be displayed by
softkeys.
Notice: For the case, the switchgear does not reach the new end position within
the set supervision time the following Warning appears on the display.
www.eaton.com 305
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Protective Elements
Directional Feature – Phase Current
All elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done in the
»Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection it is mandatory, that the required voltages exceed
0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA.
For the case, that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the
operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection.
Overcurrent protection elements, time inverse or instantaneous or time delay, etc, can trip in a specified fault
current direction. When the trip direction is set to »Non-directional«, the direction detection takes no effect.
When it is set to »Forward«, a trip is only permitted in the forward direction where fault current lies within ± 90°
around the maximum torque angle »Phase MTA«. When it is set to »Reverse«, a trip is only permitted in
reverse direction where fault current lies within ± 90° around the opposite of the maximum torque angle.
In the case of a 3-phase nearly zero voltage fault, the memorized voltage, or prefault voltages, is used to
establish the correct fault direction.
306 www.eaton.com
Prot - Phase failure Direction Detection
Prot.I Phase MTA

EDR-5000
VA
φ
VB
VC Voltage memory
IA Prot.I dir fwd
AND
(Forward)
IB
www.eaton.com
IC VA
VAB
I1
Phase MTA
Prot.I dir rev
AND
(Reverse)
VBC
Prot.Phase Sequence
VCA
VB
VC Prot.I dir n poss
VBC
AND
(Not possible)
Reverse Forward
Prot.Pickup
IM02602007E
307
308
IM02602007E
Direction Decision Phase overcurrent
Name = I[1]...[n]
Device Planning
Name.Mode
Non- directio nal
For wa rd
EDR-5000
Reverse
www.eaton.com
Name. Fault in Projected Direction
AND OR 9
Prot.I dir fwd
(Forward)
Phase Directional Supervision Logic
AND
Prot.I dir rev
(Reverse)
Name.Nondir Trip at V=0
Inactive
Active
AND
Prot.I dir n poss
(Not possible)
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection

Available Elements
50P[1] ,50P[2] ,50P[3]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions
must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only
to devices which are equipped with Inrush protection)..
All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.
All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as

ANSI 50 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50 element wont
change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to
“directional”.
For each element the following characteristic is available:
• DEFT (definite time).
Explanation
t = Tripping delay
I = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded , the module /element starts to time out to trip .
This element offers a criterion setting. The criterion setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental
(Phasor) or RMS.
For Tripping curves, please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section.
www.eaton.com 309
310
IM02602007E
50P/67P[1]...[n]
Name = 50P[1]...[n] Name.IH2 Blo*

Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
4 Name.Pickup IA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) 24a
Name.Pickup IB
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent 25a
9 Name.Pickup IC
Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction 26a
Name.Pickup
Name.IH2 Blo
AND 14
Inactive
Name.Trip Phase A
Active AND
16a
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
5 IH2.Blo Phase A Name.Trip Phase B
AND 17a
AND
6 IH2.Blo Phase B Name.Trip Phase C
Name.Pickup
AND 18a
Name.t
EDR-5000
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* AND
7 IH2.Blo Phase C
φ
DEFT
Name.Criterion
www.eaton.com
OR t
AND OR
Name.Trip
0
Fund.
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection

Name.Pickup
RMS
IA
Based on above parameters,
tripping times and reset modes will
IB φ be calculated by the device.
AND
Name.TripCmd
IC
AND 15
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings

3 (Tripping command deactivated or blocked. )
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 50P/67P Module

Mode Mode 50P[1]: Non-directional, Non-directional [Device
Forward, Planning]
Reverse
50P[2]: Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
50P[3]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50P/67P Module

ExBlo1 External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Global Prot Para
and if the state of the assigned signal is /I-Prot
true. /50P[1]]
true. /50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
the module/the element, if blocking is /Global Prot Para
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /I-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /50P[1]]
true.
Rvs Blo Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Global Prot Para
true. /50P[1]]
AdaptSet 1 Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1 AdaptSet -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
www.eaton.com 311
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the 50P/67P Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, 50P[1]: Active [Protection Para
module/element. Active 50P[2]: Active /<1..4>
50P[3]: Inactive /I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
blocking of the module/element. This Active /<1..4>
parameter is only effective if a signal is /I-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /50P[1]]
Rvs Blo Fc Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
reverse blocking of the module/element. Active /<1..4>
This parameter is only effective if a signal is /I-Prot
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Blo TripCmd Permanent blocking of the Trip Command Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
of the module/element. Active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Fc blocking of the module/element. This Active /<1..4>
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Criterion Measuring method: fundamental or RMS Fundamental, True RMS [Protection Para
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.02 – 40.00 In 50P[1]: 2 In [Protection Para
module/element starts to time out to trip. 50P[2]: 2.5 In /<1..4>
50P[3]: 3.0 In /I-Prot
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT Or /50P[1]]
Characteristic = INV Minimum of the
setting range If: VRestraint = Active
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint
= Inactive
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 50P[1]: 0 s [Protection Para
50P[2]: 0.25 s /<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT 50P[3]: 0.25 s /I-Prot
/50P[1]]
312 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
50P/67P Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command /Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1 [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
50P/67P Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA
Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB
Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC
Pickup Signal: Pickup
www.eaton.com 313
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Active AdaptSet Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, Directional [ANSI 50P/67P]

Object to be tested:
• For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or
alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and these
are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can be ensured
that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the trip coil of the
Breaker).
Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total tripping time
is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay
output contacts!).
Total tripping time = tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection elements)
+ breaker operating time (about 50 ms)
Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in the
relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer.
Necessary means
• Synchronizable current and voltage sources
• Optional: ampere meters
• Timer
Procedure
Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be
tested by the angle between current and voltage.
Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Check then the
314 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
threshold values.
Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk (Brk tripping).
Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio

Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.
Successful test result

The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection

Available Elements
51P[1]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions
must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only to
devices which are equipped with Inrush protection).
All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.

ANSI 51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont change,
if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”.
For each element, the following characteristics are available:
• NINV (IEC/XInv);
• VINV (IEC/XInv);
• LINV (IEC/XInv);
• EINV (IEC/XInv);
• MINV (ANSI/XInv);
• VINV (ANSI/XInv);
• EINV (ANSI/XInv);
• Thermal Flat;
• Therm Flat IT;
• Therm Flat I2T; and
• Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (PHASE)” section.
www.eaton.com 315
316
51P/67P[1]...[n]
IM02602007E
Name = 51P/67P[1]...[n] Name.IH2 Blo*

4 Name.Pickup IA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) 24b
Name.Pickup IB
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent 25b
9 Name.Pickup IC
Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction 26b
Name.Pickup
Name.IH2 Blo
AND 14
Inactive
Name.Trip Phase A
Active AND
16b
AND
5 IH2.Blo Phase A Name.Trip Phase B
AND 17b
AND
6 Name.Curve Shape
IH2.Blo Phase B Name.Trip Phase C
Name.t-multiplier AND 18b

EDR-5000
AND Name.t-reset
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2* AND
7 IH2.Blo Phase C
Name.Reset Mode
φ
Name.Criterion INV
www.eaton.com
OR
Name.Trip

AND OR
Fund.
Name.Pickup
RMS
IA
IB φ
AND
Name.TripCmd
IC
Based on above parameters, AND 15

tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.
Imax Imax

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 51P/67P Module

Mode Mode Non-directional, Non-directional [Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51P/67P Module

true. /51P[1]]
true. /51P[1]]
true.
true. /51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51P/67P Module

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, Active [Protection Para
module/element. Active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
www.eaton.com 317
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.02 – 40.00 In 1.00 In [Protection Para
module/element starts to time out to trip. /<1..4>
/I-Prot
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint /51P[1]]
= Active Minimum of the setting range If:
VRestraint = Inactive
Curve Shape Characteristic IEC NINV, ANSI MINV [Protection Para
IEC VINV, /<1..4>
IEC EINV, /I-Prot
IEC LINV, /51P[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 1 [Protection Para
The setting range depends on the selected /<1..4>
tripping curve. /I-Prot
/51P[1]]
318 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Reset Mode Reset Mode Instantaneous, Calculated [Protection Para
t-delay, /<1..4>
Calculated /I-Prot
/51P[1]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures 0.00 – 60.00 s 0s [Protection Para
(INV characteristics only) /<1..4>
/I-Prot
Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /51P[1]]
51P/67P Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
www.eaton.com 319
IM02602007E EDR-5000
51P/67P Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, Non-directional [ANSI 51P/67P]

• For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or
alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and these
are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can be ensured
that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the trip coil of the
Breaker).
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total tripping time
is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay
output contacts!).
protection elements)
320 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Necessary means
• Synchronizable current and voltage sources
• Optional: ampere meters
• Timer
Procedure
Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to be
tested by the angle between current and voltage.

Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Check then the
threshold values.

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk (Brk tripping).
Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio


The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
51V – Voltage Restraint Overcurrent-Protection

The 51P[2] and 51P[3] elements can be used for Voltage Restraint if the Parameter »VRestraint« is set to
»active« within the Parameter Set.
51P[2] ,51P[3]
All voltage restraint overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.

ANSI 51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont change,
if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”.
The 51V element restrains operation which reduces pickup levels. This allows the User to lower the pickup
value of the 51V elements with the corresponding phase input voltage (phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground,
depending on the setting of »Main VT con« within the System Parameters). When the minimum fault phase
current is close to the load current, it may make the phase time overcurrent protection coordination difficult. In
this case, an undervoltage function may be used to alleviate this situation. When the voltage (RMS) is low, the
phase time overcurrent pickup threshold may be set low accordingly, so that the phase time overcurrent
protection may achieve adequate sensitivity and better coordination. The device uses a simple linear model to
determine the effective pickup by characterizing the relationship between the voltage and the phase time
www.eaton.com 321
IM02602007E EDR-5000
overcurrent pickup threshold.
Once the voltage restraint is activated, the effective phase time overcurrent pickup threshold will be the
calculated Pickup% times the phase time overcurrent pickup setting. The effective pickup threshold must be
within the setting range allowed and, if it is less, the minimum pickup value will be used.
Pickup%
100%
25%
25% VRestraint max VRestraint max

V
That means:
Vmin = 0.25*Vmax;
• Pickup%min = 25%;
• Pickup% = 25%, if V <= Vmin;
• Pickup% = 1/Vmax*(V - Vmin) + 25%, if Vmin < V < Vmax;
• Pickup% = 100%, if V >= Vmax;
•
For tripping curves, please refer to the“Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section.
If this element should be blocked in case of a Loss Of Potential, »LOP BLO« has to be set to »active«.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT

con".
In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta":
Vn=Main VT sec .
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye":
MainVT sec
Vn=
3
322 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
51V[1]...[n]
Name = 51V[1]...[n] Name .IH2 Blo*

Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings **
4 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals )
Name.Pickup IA
24b
Name.Pickup IB
25b
Name .Pickup IC
26b
Name .Pickup
Name.IH2 Blo
AND 14
Inactive
Name .Trip Phase A
Active AND
16b
AND
5 IH2.Blo Phase A Name .Trip Phase B
AND 17b
AND
6 IH2.Blo Phase B
Name.Curve Shape
Name .Trip Phase C
Name.t-multiplier AND 18b
AND Name.t-reset
AND
7 Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo Phase C
Name.Reset Mode
φ
INV
OR
OR
Name .Trip
AND
51V Pickup =
%Pickup * 51P
Pickup
IA
RMS
IB
AND
RMS Name .TripCmd
IC
RMS
Basedonaboveparameters
trippingtimesandreset modes will
, AND 15
becalculatedbythedevice .
Imax Imax
Name.LOP Blo
Inactive
Active
AND
38a
φ
Pickup %
VA
100%
RMS
VB
RMS
%Pickup
VC
25%
RMS V
25%
VRestraint max

3 (Trippingcommanddeactivatedor blocked .)
Device Planning Parameters of the 51V Module

Mode Mode Do not use, Non- [Device
Non-directional, directional Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
www.eaton.com 323
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Global Protection Parameters of the 51V Module

true. /51P[2]]
true. /51P[2]]
true.
true. /51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51V Module
In the case that Voltage Restraint is active (Vrestraint=active), the minimum

pickup that can be set is 0.1 In.
In the case that Voltage Restraint is inactive (Vrestraint=inactive), the minimum

pickup that can be set is 0.01 In.

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, 51P[2]: Active [Protection Para
module/element. Active 51P[3]: Inactive /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
324 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
module/element starts to time out to trip. /<1..4>
/I-Prot
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint /51P[2]]
= Active Minimum of the setting range If:
VRestraint = Inactive
IEC VINV, /<1..4>
IEC EINV, /I-Prot
IEC LINV, /51P[2]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 51P[2]: 2 [Protection Para
The setting range depends on the selected 51P[3]: 3 /<1..4>
/51P[2]]
www.eaton.com 325
IM02602007E EDR-5000

t-delay, /<1..4>
Calculated /I-Prot
/51P[2]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures 0.00 – 60.00 s 0s [Protection Para
/I-Prot
Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /51P[2]]
VRestraint Voltage Restraint Protection Inactive, Active [Protection Para

Active /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
VRestraint max Maximum voltage restraint level. Definition 0.04 – 1.30 Vn 1.00 Vn [Protection Para
of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System /<1..4>
Parameter setting of "Main VT con". When /I-Prot
the System Parameters "Main VT con" is /51P[2]]
set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ".
When the System Parameters "Main VT
con" is set to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT
sec/SQRT(3)".
Only available if: VRestraint = Active

LOP Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
Only available if: VRestraint = Active /I-Prot
/51P[2]]
51V Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
326 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
51V Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com 327
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Commissioning: Voltage Restraint [ANSI 51V]
Signals to be measured for Voltage Restraint element: the threshold values, total tripping time (recommended),
or alternatively tripping delays and the dropout ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total tripping
time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker (not at the relay
output contacts!).
protection stages)
Necessary means:
• Current source;
• Voltage Source;
• Current and Voltage meters; and
• Timer.
Procedure:

Feed %Pickup voltage. For each test performed, feed a current that is about 3-5% above the threshold value for
activation/tripping. Then check if the pickup values are %Pickup of the value according to 51P protection.

Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the breakers (breaker tripping).
Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output contact)

Measure the tripping times at the relay output contact.
Testing the dropout ratio


The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X

All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done
in the »Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages exceed 0.35
328 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the measured

sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA.
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be
selected by the parameter »IX Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as
follows:
• »IX 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be
used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault
element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be
either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0
Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu.
• »IX Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current
(Polarizing: V2/Operating: I2) will be used to detect direction. The monitored
current is still the measured residual current IX.
• »IX Dual«: For this method, the negative phase sequence voltage »V2« will be
used as polarizing quantity if »V2« and »I2« are available, otherwise 3V0 will be
used. The operating quantity is either I2 if »V2« and »I2« are available, else IX.
The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings.
50X/51X Direction Decision [System Para/ [System [System
by Angle Between: Direction] Para/Direction]: Para/Direction]:
The Following IX Dir Cntrl = 3V0 Source =

Angle Has to Be
Set:
Measured ground current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IX 3V0 Measured
IX, 3V0 (measured)
Measured ground current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IX 3V0 Calculated
IX, 3V0 (calculated)
Negative sequence voltage and current 90° + Phase MTA IX Neg N.A.
I2, V2
Negative phase sequence current and voltage If V2 and I2 are IX Dual Measured
(preferred), measured ground current and neutral available:
voltage (alternatively): 90° + Phase MTA
I2, V2 (if available)
or else: else:
IX, 3V0 (measured) Ground MTA
Negative phase sequence current and voltage If V2 and I2 are IX Dual Calculated
(preferred), measured ground current and neutral available:
voltage (alternatively): 90° + Phase MTA
I2, V2 (if available)
or else: else:
IX, 3V0 (calculated) Ground MTA
www.eaton.com 329
330
Prot - 50X/51X - Direction Detection
IM02602007E
System Para
3V0 Source
Measured
Calculated System Para
VR calc IX Dir Cntrl
3V0
IX 3V0
VX meas V2
IX Neg
V2*
IX Dual
50X/51X - Direction Detection
3V0
EDR-5000
*=Priority if available.
Prot.IX dir fwd

(Forward)
10b
polarizing
www.eaton.com
Forward
IG = IX meas Prot.IX dir rev
g (Reverse)
10b
I2 tin
era
operating op polarizing
If V2 and I2 are available, I2 is the operating quantity, else IX is the operating quantity
Prot.IX dir n poss
Reverse (Not possible)
10b
MTA
System Para
Ground MTA
90° + Phase MTA
If V2 and I2 are available, MTA = 90° +

Phase MTA, otherwise MTA = Ground
MTA
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection

Elements
50X[1] ,50X[2]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current protection
functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings.
All ground current elements are identically structured.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IG-Protection Module Setting in Option

ANSI 50X – Ground overcurrent protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
directional Setting: Non-directional
ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
directional Setting: Forward/Reverse VX Selection: measured/calculated
Criterion
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the
»Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
VX Selection
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the

voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e. Residual voltage and

the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding 4th
measuring input.
All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages.
This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)”
section.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only
possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
www.eaton.com 331
332
50X[1]...[n]
Name = 50X[1]...[n]
IM02602007E

4 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault

Name.IGH2 Blo*
10 Name.* Fault in Projected Direction
Name.Pickup
14 27a
Name.IGH2 Blo
Inactive
Active
AND AND
8 IH2.Blo IG
EDR-5000
Name.Pickup
Name.Criterion Name.t
www.eaton.com
φ
DEFT
Fund.

RMS t Name.Trip
Name.Pickup AND
0
IX Measured
φ
Name.TripCmd
Based on above parameters, AND 15 19a
tripping times and reset modes
will be calculated by the device.

3 (Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection

Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection

true. /50X[1]]
true. /50X[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /50X[1]]
true.
true. /50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection

/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
www.eaton.com 333
IM02602007E EDR-5000

assigned to the corresponding global /50X[1]]
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.02 – 20.00 In 50X[1]: 1 In [Protection Para
module/element will be started. 50X[2]: 2 In /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
(sensitive) module/element will be started. /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.5 s [Protection Para

/<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT /I-Prot
/50X[1]]
334 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR
Trip Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com 335
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50X/67X]

Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.
51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection

Elements
51X[1] ,51X[2]

ANSI 51X – Ground overcurrent protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
Criterion
VX Selection

voltage inputs.

measuring input.
336 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Thermal Flat;
• Therm Flat IT;
• Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section.
www.eaton.com 337
338
51X[1]...[n]
Name = 51X[1]...[n]
IM02602007E


Name.IGH2 Blo*
Name.Pickup
14 27b
Name.IGH2 Blo
Inactive
Active
AND AND
8 IH2.Blo IG
Name.Curve Shape
Name.t-multiplier
Name.t-reset
EDR-5000
Name.Reset Mode
φ
Name.Criterion INV
www.eaton.com
Fund.
RMS
Name.Trip
Name.Pickup AND
IX Measured
φ

Name.TripCmd
Based on above parameters, tripping
AND 15 19b
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection

Mode Mode 51X[1]: Non-directional, Non-directional [Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
51X[2]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection

true. /51X[1]]
true. /51X[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /51X[1]]
true.
true. /51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
www.eaton.com 339
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection

/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
module/element will be started. /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
(sensitive) module/element will be started. /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
340 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

IEC VINV, /<1..4>
IEC EINV, /I-Prot
IEC LINV, /51X[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 51X[1]: 1 [Protection Para
The setting range depends on the selected 51X[2]: 2 /<1..4>
/51X[1]]

t-delay, /<1..4>
Calculated /I-Prot
/51X[1]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures 0.00 – 60.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para
/I-Prot
Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /51X[1]]
51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
www.eaton.com 341
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51X/67X]

Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R

All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done
in the »Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages exceed 0.35
V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the measured
sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA.
342 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be
selected by the parameter »IR Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as
follows:
• »IR 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be
used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault
element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be
either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0
Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu.
• »IR IPol«: The measured neutral current (usually = IX) will be used as polarizing
quantity.
• »IR Dual«: For this method, the measured neutral current IPol=IX will be used as
polarizing quantity, if available, otherwise 3V0 will be used.
• »IR Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current
will be used to detect the direction. The monitored current is still the calculated
residual current IR.
Operating Quantity: For the directional IR elements, the operating quantity is in general the calculated neutral
current IR (except from »IR Neg« mode, where »I2« is the operating quantity).
The ground maximum torque angles (MTA) can be adjusted from 0° to 360°, except, if »IR IPol« is selected. In
this case it is set to 0° (fixed).
The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings.
50R/51R Direction Decision [System Para/ [System [System
by Angle Between: Direction] Para/Direction]: Para/Direction]:
The Following IR Dir Cntrl = 3V0 Source =

Angle Has to Be
Set:
Residual current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IR 3V0 Measured
IR, 3V0 (measured)
Residual current and neutral voltage: Ground MTA IR 3V0 Calculated
IR, 3V0 (calculated)
Residual current and neutral/ground current 0° (fixed) IR IPol N.A.
IR, IX
Residual current and neutral/ground current If Ipol (=IX) is IR Dual Measured
(preferred), residual current and neutral voltage available, MTA = 0°
(alternatively): (fixed); else
IR, IX (if available) MTA=Ground MTA
or else:
IR, 3V0 (measured)
Residual current and neutral/ground current If Ipol (=IX) is IR Dual Calculated
(preferred), residual current and neutral voltage available, MTA = 0°
(alternatively): (fixed); else
IR, IX (if available) MTA=Ground MTA
or else:
IR, 3V0 (calculated)
Negative sequence voltage and current 90° + Phase MTA IR Neg N.A.
I2, V2
www.eaton.com 343
344
Prot - 50R/51R - Direction Detection
IM02602007E
System Para
3V0 Source
Measured
Calculated System Para
VR calc IR Dir Cntrl
3V0
IR 3V0
VX meas
IX meas
IR IPol
IX meas*
IR Dual
3V0 50R/51R - Direction Detection
V2
IR Neg
EDR-5000
*=Priority if available.
polarizing
Prot.IR dir fwd
Forward 10a
(Forward)
www.eaton.com
I0 = IR calc
g
tin
era Prot.IR dir rev
operating op polarizing 10a
(Reverse)
I2
Reverse Prot.IR dir n poss

(Not possible)
10a
MTA
Prot.IR Neg dir fwd

System Para 10a
(Forward)
Ground MTA
Prot.IR Neg rev dir
(Reverse)
10a
0° (fixed)
Prot.IR Neg dir n poss
(Not possible)
10a
If IPol is available, MTA = 0°; else
MTA=Ground MTA
90° + Phase MTA

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection

Elements
50R[1] ,50R[2]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current protection
functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings.

ANSI 50R – Ground overcurrent protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
Criterion
VX Selection

voltage inputs.

measuring input.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated)”
section.
www.eaton.com 345
346
50R[1]...[n]
Name = 50R[1]...[n]
IM02602007E


Name.IGH2 Blo*
Name.Pickup
14 27c
Name.IGH2 Blo
Inactive
Active
AND AND
8 IH2.Blo IG
Name.Pickup
EDR-5000
Name.t
Name.Criterion
φ
DEFT
www.eaton.com
Fund. 0
t
t
RMS Name.Trip

Name.Pickup AND 0
IX Calculated
φ

times and reset modes will be calculated Name.TripCmd
by the device. AND 19c
15

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection

Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection

true. /50R[1]]
true. /50R[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /50R[1]]
true.
true. /50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection

/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
www.eaton.com 347
IM02602007E EDR-5000

assigned to the corresponding global /50R[1]]
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.02 – 20.00 In 50R[1]: 1 In [Protection Para
module/element will be started. 50R[2]: 2 In /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]

/<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT /I-Prot
/50R[1]]
50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
348 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com 349
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50R/67R]

Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent using the procedure for non-directional phase overcurrent
protection.
51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection

Elements
51R[1] ,51R[2]

ANSI 51R – Ground overcurrent protection, non- Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection, Device Planning menu Measuring Mode: Fundamental/True RMS
Criterion
VX Selection

voltage inputs.

measuring input.
• Thermal Flat;
• Therm Flat IT;
350 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

• Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section.
www.eaton.com 351
352
51R[1]...[n]
Name = 51R[1]...[n]
IM02602007E


Name.IGH2 Blo*
Name.Pickup
14 27d
Name.IGH2 Blo
Inactive
Active
AND AND
8 IH2.Blo IG
Name.Curve Shape
Name.t-multiplier
Name.t-reset
EDR-5000
Name.Reset Mode
φ
Name.Criterion INV
www.eaton.com
Fund.

RMS
Name.Trip
Name.Pickup AND
IX Calculated
φ
Name.TripCmd
AND 15 19d
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection

Mode Mode 51R[1]: Non-directional, Non-directional [Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
51R[2]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection

true. /51R[1]]
true. /51R[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /51R[1]]
true.
true. /51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
www.eaton.com 353
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection

/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Fc=active".
True RMS /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.02 – 20.00 In 51R[1]: 0.1 In [Protection Para
module/element will be started. 51R[2]: 0.5 In /<1..4>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]

IEC VINV, /<1..4>
IEC EINV, /I-Prot
IEC LINV, /51R[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
354 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

t-multiplier Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00 51R[1]: 1 [Protection Para
The setting range depends on the selected 51R[2]: 2 /<1..4>
/51R[1]]

t-delay, /<1..4>
Calculated /I-Prot
/51R[1]]
t-reset Reset time for intermittent phase failures 0.00 – 60.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para
/I-Prot
Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay /51R[1]]
51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
www.eaton.com 355
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51R/67R]

ZI - Zone Interlocking
Elements
ZI

The purpose of zone interlocking is to speed up tripping for some faults without sacrificing the coordination of the
system and interjecting nuisance trips into the system. Zone interlocking devices can communicate across
distribution zones to determine whether or not a device sees a fault condition.
Zone interlocking is a communication scheme used with breakers and protective relays to improve the level of
protection in a power distribution system. This is achieved through communication between the downstream
and upstream devices in a power system. The zones are classified by their location downstream of the main
circuit protective device which is generally defined as Zone 1.
By definition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting the trip unit pickup and time delay
settings, the breaker closest to the fault trips first. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) back-up
protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and
downstream breakers.
356 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers, it is ideal for the
upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by Zone Selective Interlocking.
The zone interlocking information can be transferred to or received from other compatible zone interlocking
devices by means of suitable communication cables. The single zone interlock terminal block, with its 3-wire
scheme, can be used for either phase zone interlocking, ground zone interlocking, or a combination of the two.
If phase and ground zone interlocking are combined, the potential consequences must be understood before
implementation.
Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power flow

varies, require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature.
The breaker failure pickup signal »BF.PICKUP« is implicitly connected to zone

interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the upstream
device if a breaker failure on a downstream device is detected.
Description of the Functions and Features

• Configurable protection functions to initiate the zone interlocking OUTPUT signal (start functions).
• Remove zone interlocking OUTPUT signal immediately after detection of a breaker failure.
• Reset time (about ten cycles - settable) to interrupt OUTPUT signal for durable trip signal.
• Small trip delay (about three cycles – settable) to wait for downstream devices interlocking signals.
• Zone interlocking trip signal only possible by absence of zone interlocking INPUT signals.
• Configurable zone interlocking trip functions (protective functions serve as zone interlocking trip
functions).
• Zone interlocking trip function pickup and tripping characteristic adaption using adaptive settings
controlled by the zone interlocking input signals.
Device Planning Parameters of the Zone Interlocking

Mode Mode Use Use [Device Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the Zone Interlocking

In the global parameter menu for zone interlocking, two external blocking inputs (»Ex Block1/Ex Block2«), as
with other protection modules, can be assigned to the input of the zone interlocking function so that the zone
interlock function can be blocked by an assigned function.
Via an external input signal, the zone interlocking can also be blocked if the parameter »ExtBlockTripCMD« is
assigned.
Breaker Failure Pickup flag BF.Pickup is implicitly connected to zone

interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the upstream
device if a breaker failure on downstream device is detected.
www.eaton.com 357
IM02602007E EDR-5000

and if the state of the assigned signal is /ZI]
true.
and if the state of the assigned signal is /ZI]
true.
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /ZI]
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Zone Interlocking

The zone interlocking Setting Group Parameters consists of three groups of setting to configure the zone
interlocking module to adapt to various application philosophies accordingly:
• General: This group comprises the settings used to control the general usage of the zone interlocking
module.
• OUTPUT: What should be assigned to the Zone Out?

- Phase,
- Ground, or
• - Both.
The OUTPUT group comprises the settings to configure the zone interlocking output logic. If the zone
interlocking application is used to a downstream device, the settings in OUTPUT group should be
programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for an upstream device (main
breaker or Zone 1), the setting ZoneInterlockOut within the OUTPUT group should be disabled.
• TRIP: Activate the Zone Trip.
The TRIP group comprises the settings used to configure the zone interlocking TRIP logic. If the zone
interlocking application is applied to an upstream device, (main breaker or Zone 1), the settings in the
TRIP group should be programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for a
downstream device (feeder breaker or Zone 2), the setting ZoneInterlockTrip in TRIP group should be
disabled.
Setting the above mentioned setting groups accordingly the zone interlocking module can be configured as:
• Downstream device application (using only OUTPUT logic);,
• Upstream device application (using only TRIP logic); or
• Midstream device application (using both OUTPUT and TRIP logic together).
The following menu and tables show the detailed information about the settings.
358 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Function Permanent activation or deactivation of Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
module/stage. The elements, that are Active /<1..4>
associated with Zone Interlocking depend /ZI
on the protective device. Transformer /General Settings]
relays: ZI[1]: 50P[1], 50P[2], 51P[1], 50X[1],
51X[1], 50R[1], 51R[1] ZI[2]: 50P[3],
50P[4], 51P[3], 50X[2], 51X[2], 50R[2],
51R[2]. All other Protective Devices: ZI:
50P[1], 50P[2], 51P[1], 50X[1], 50X[2],
51X[1], 50R[1], 50R[2], 51R[1].
parameter is only effective if a signal is /ZI
assigned to the corresponding global /General Settings]
/ZI
/General Settings]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /ZI
Fc=active".
ZI OUT Fc Zone Interlocking Out activate (allow) / Inactive, Active [Protection Para
inactivate (disallow) Active /<1..4>
/ZI
/Zone Out]
Fault Type Fault Type Phase, Both [Protection Para
Ground, /<1..4>
Both /ZI
/Zone Out]
Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Inactive, Active [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/ZI
/Zone Trip]
Fault Type Fault Type Phase, Both [Protection Para
Ground, /<1..4>
Both /ZI
/Zone Trip]
Zone Interlocking Output Logic [X2]
The following current protective function elements serve as the Phase Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions:
• 51P[1];
• 50P[1]; and
• 50P[2].
www.eaton.com 359
IM02602007E EDR-5000
The following current protective function serves as the Ground Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions:
• 51X[1];
• 50X[1];
• 50X[2];
• 51R[1];
• 50R[1] and
• 50R[2].
Zone Interlocking OUTPUT Logic Timing
51P[1].Pickup
t
51P[1].Trip
Reset Timer
10 Cycles
1
ZI.Bkr Blo
ZI.OUT
t
STATE
TRANSFER
STANDBY STARTED TRIPPED RESET STANDBY
360 www.eaton.com
ZI.Zone Out
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings

50P[1].Pickup
50P[2].Pickup
OR
51P[1].Pickup
OR AND
t 166 ms ZI.Phase OUT

AND AND
50P[1].TripCmd
50P[2].TripCmd OR
51P[1].TripCmd
ZI OUT Fc
EDR-5000
Fault Type
BF.Trip ZI.OUT
Both Active
OR
Phase Inactive (Hardware Output)
Ground
www.eaton.com
ZI.Bkr Blo
OR
AND ZI.Ground OUT

50X[1].Pickup AND
50X[2].Pickup
51X[1].Pickup OR
50R[1].Pickup
t 166 ms
50R[2].Pickup AND
51R[1].Pickup
50X[1].TripCmd
50X[2].TripCmd
51X[1].TripCmd OR
50R[1].TripCmd
50R[2].TripCmd
51R[1].TripCmd
IM02602007E
361
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking Trip Logic [X2]
The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Phase Zone-Interlock trip functions:
• 1.5 * 51P[1];
• 50P[1]; and
• 50P[2].
The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Ground Zone Interlock trip functions:
• 51X[1];
• 50X[1];
• 50X[2];
• 51R[1];
• 50R[1], and
• 50R[2].
Zone Interlocking TRIP Logic Timing
51P[1].Pickup
ZI.IN
Trip Delay Timer
3 Cycles
1
ZI.Pickup
ZI.Trip
1
t
0
STANDBY STARTED TRIPPED STANDBY INTERLOCKED STANDBY

STATE
TRANSFER
362 www.eaton.com
ZI.Zone Trip

50P[1].Pickup
50P[2].Pickup ZI.Phase Pickup

OR
1.5*51P[1].Pickup 14
OR AND
ZI.Phase Trip
t 50 ms
AND
ZI.Trip
OR
ZI.IN
EDR-5000
Fault Type Trip

Hardware Input ZI.TripCmd
Both Active
Inactive AND 15
Phase
Ground
www.eaton.com
ZI.Ground Trip
t 50 ms
OR AND
AND
50X[1].Pickup
50X[2].Pickup
ZI.Ground Pickup
51X[1].Pickup OR 14
50R[1].Pickup
50R[2].Pickup
51R[1].Pickup ZI.Pickup
OR 14

IM02602007E
363
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking Input States

/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
/ZI]
Zone Interlocking Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Bkr Blo Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
TripCmd Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
Zone Interlocking Wiring

The ZI Outputs are for use with connection to electronic inputs only.
The zone interlocking connection between relays is done by means of a twisted shielded cable. Downstream
zone interlock outputs may be paralleled from up to ten devices (FP-5000 or DT-3000 or a combination of both)
for connection to upstream zone interlocked relays.
364 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Zone 1
FP-X000
J3
Out 1
In 4
Com 2
Zone 2
EDR -X000
FP-X000
X2 J3
Shield 13 Out 1
Out 14 In 4
Com 15 Com 2
Shield 16
In 17
Com 18
Zone 3
DT-3000 EDR -X000 FP-X000
Out 13 J3
Ground X2
In 14 Out 1
Out 15 Shield 13
Phase In 4
In 16 Out 14
Com 2
Com 18 Com 15
Shield 16
In 17
Com 18
Hardware Terminals for Zone Interlocking
By means of the zone interlocking terminals, the device can be connected to other Eaton protective devices such
as an FP5000, DT3000, etc.
As an upstream device, the terminals - Phase/Ground IN should be connected to the OUT terminals of up to ten
downstream device(s) by means of a dedicated cable wired in parallel. As a downstream device, the terminals -
Phase/Ground OUT should be connected to the IN terminals of an upstream device by means of a dedicated
cable.
www.eaton.com 365
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-3000
X?.
1 IRIG-B+
2 IRIG-B-
3
RO1
4
5
RO2
6
7
8 RO3
9
10
11 SC
12
13
14 OUT
15 COM
16
17 IN
18 COM
366 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-4000, EDR-5000, EMR-4000, EMR-5000, EGR-4000 and EGR-5000
X? .
1 Do not use
2 Do not use
3
RO1
4
5
RO2
6
7
8 RO3
9
10
11 RO4
12
13
14 OUT
15 COM
16
17 IN
18 COM
79 - Automatic Reclosure
AR
The autoreclosure is used to minimize outages on overhead lines. The majority1 (>60% in medium voltage and
>85% in high voltage) of faults (arc flash over) on overhead lines are temporary and can be cleared by means of
the autoreclosure element.
De-select the autoclosure element within the device planning menu if the
protective device is used in order to protect cables, generators, or transformers.
Features
The autoreclose function is designed with diverse, very comprehensive yet flexible features which meet all
requirements of different utility concepts and technical applications.
The available features of the autoreclose function can be summarized as follows.
• Flexible assignment of initiate functions for individual shots.
• Maximum of six autoreclose shots.
1: Protective Relaying: Principles and Applications, ISBN 978-0824799182
www.eaton.com 367
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Dynamic adjustment of protection setting values (e.g.: pickup, time delay tripping curve, etc.) during
autoreclose process via adaptive set concept.
• Reclose shots per hour limit.
• Autorecloser wear monitor with maintenance alarm.
• Programmable reclosing blocking feature.
• Auto zone coordination with downstream reclosers.
• Automatic manual-breaker-close blocking feature.
• Manual/Auto reset lockout (panel, contact input, communications, etc.).
• Autoreclose with Sync-check (Only in conjunction with internal Sync-check and Control modules).
• External AR shot counter increment is possible.
• Automatic autoreclose result evaluation (successful/unsuccessful).
• Separate counters to register total, successful/unsuccessful reclosing numbers.
Via the pre shot (fast trip), the AR-module is able to trip the breaker ahead of the
protection stage that has activated the AR-module. As a general rule, a fast trip is
either issued before the first reclosure attempt or after the last permitted
reclosure attempt.
1. At the beginning of the sequence, a “Pre shot” (Fast trip) is executed

before the time overcurrent protection element of any device on the line
completely times out. Purpose: to clear the fault before any of the circuit
protection trips or blows open. A short time after the pre-shot occurs, the
breaker can be re-closed into the line and all circuits connected on the
line will still be energized. 80%-90% of the faults are not permanent. After
a period from 0.5 up to 1 sec., the line is probably no longer faulty and the
complete line can be re-energized. If the line is still faulty, segments of
the line will be switched off selectively by the time over-current protection
module as a result of the system coordination.
2. A Pre shot (Fast trip) at the end of the reclosure sequence occurs after
the last permitted reclosure shot. Purpose: To prevent unnecessary
damage from the electrical equipment in case of permanent faults. If the
last reclosure attempt is executed and the fault is still present, then the
breaker can be tripped quickly before the time overcurrent protection
module has completely timed out.
368 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
The following table gives a folder (structure) overview.
AR Menu Folder Purpose
AR Within this menu, external blockings, external lockings, external shot increments
and external resets can be assigned. Those external events can only become
Path: effective, if they have been activated (allowed) within the General Settings.
[Protection Para\Global Prot Para\AR] Please see table row below.
General Settings Within this menu several general settings can be activated: the function itself,
external blocking, zone coordination, external locking, and external shot increment
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\General can be set to active. The corresponding trigger events (e.g.: digital inputs)
Settings] have to be assigned within the corresponding global protection parameters.
Please see table row above.
Furthermore, this menu contains some timers, the number of permitted reclosure
attempts, the alarm mode (trip/alarm), and the reset mode can be set
Shot Manager In Shot manager setting menu, the control logic between individual shots and
protective functions will be specified. For each shot (inclusive the pre shot), the
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\Shot trigger (start) events can be assigned.
Manager] For each shot, a maximum of four initiate functions (protective functions which are
dedicated to start this shot) can be selected from a list of available protective
functions.
When the autoreclosure process is running in the shot X stage, the corresponding
protection and control settings will be used to control the operation during this stage.
In addition, the dead times have to be set. For each shot, its dead time will be set
individually, except for the shot 0, for which no dead timer setting is necessary. The
shot 0 is just a virtual state to define the time before the first shot is to issue. Each
dead timer specifies the time duration which has to be expired before the reclosure
command for this shot can be issued.
AR Wear Supervision In this setting menu two Service Alarms can be set as well as the number of
permissible reclosure attempts per hour.
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\AR
Wear Superv]
BlockFct This group of settings specifies the protection functions by which the autoreclosure
function must be blocked even if the autoreclosure function is already initiated.
Path: [Protection Note the difference between the protection function which can be blocked by
Para\Set[x]\AR\BlockFct] autorecloser and the function(s) here to block the autorecloser.
AR States
The following diagram shows the state transitions between the various states of the autoreclosure function. This
diagram visualizes the run time logic and timing sequence according to the state transition direction and the
events which trigger the transitions.
www.eaton.com 369
IM02602007E EDR-5000
State transition diagram.
Initiate AR
1
Standby
& t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed
& t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed

Bkr=Pos OPEN
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
Bkr=Pos OPEN
t-Reset Lockout=timer elapsed

Ready
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
Lock=True
Blo=False
InitiateFc=True
successful
4
AR Cycle
2 6
Start
Blo=True
t-ManualCloseBlock Lock=True Lockout

t-dead
t-Run2Ready
Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
Reset Lockout =True
Blo=True
5 7
Blocked t-Reset Lockout
370 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
In general, the autoreclosure function is only active (will be initiated) when all of the following conditions are met:
• Autoreclosure function is enabled (In AR General Setting: Function =active);
• Breaker contact(s) (52a or/and 52b) is (are) installed and has (have) been programmed; and
• Autoreclosure is not blocked by the blocking inputs (ExBlo1/2).
1 Standby
The autoreclosure is in this state when the following conditions are met:
• The breaker is in the open position;

• The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and
• No external or internal AR blocking signals are present.
No autoreclose shot operation is possible if the autoreclose function is within

Standby state.
2 t-manual close block
Suppose that the breaker is open and the AR state is in Standby state. Then the breaker is closed manually.
The event “Bkr. Pos On” starts a Manual-Close-Blocking timer and results in a state transition from »STANDBY« to
a transit state - »T-BLO AFTER BKR. MAN ON«. The autoreclosure function changes into the »READY« state only as
the Manual-Close-Blocking timer elapses and the breaker is closed. By means of the manual close blocking
timer, a faulty starting of the autoreclose function in case of a Switch-OnTo-Fault condition is prevented.
3 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are
true:
• The breaker is in closed position;
• The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation;
An autoreclose start is only possible if the autoreclose function is in Ready state.
4 Run (Cycle)
The »RUN« state can only be reached if the following conditions are fulfilled:
www.eaton.com 371
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• The autoreclose was in »READY« state before;
• The breaker was in closed position before;
• No external or internal AR Blocking signals exist; and
• At least one of the assigned initiate functions is true (triggers the Autoreclosure).
A complete autoreclose process with multi-shot reclosing will be accomplished

inside the Run state.
If the autoreclose gets into the »RUN« state, the autoreclose function transfers its control to a »RUN« state control
automatically with several subordinate states which will be described in detail in the next section (AR Cycle).
5 Blocked
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »BLOCKED« state when one of the assigned blocking functions is
true.
The autoreclose function exits the »BLOCKED« state if the assigned blocking signal is no longer present.
6 Lockout
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »LOCKOUT« state when one of the following conditions is true:
• An unsuccessful autoreclose is detected after all programmed autoreclose shots. The fault is of
permanent nature;
• Reclose failure (incomplete sequence);
• Autoreclose rate per hour exceeds the limit;
• Breaker failure during AR starting;
• Manual breaker close operation during autoreclose process;
• At least one protective function is still tripping before the reclose command is issued; or
The autoreclose function exits the »LOCKOUT« state if the programmed lockout reset signal asserts and
programmed Lockout Reset timer elapses.
A Service Alarm (Service Alarm 1 or Service Alarm 2) will not lead to a lockout of
the AR function.
AR Cycle (Shot)
372 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
4 Run (Cycle)
The following drawing shows the state transitions in detail inside an AR run cycle.
11
Ready
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip

-----------------------------------
tCB-Open start
13
AR.Lock=True
Waiting Bkr Open
AR.Blo=True
Bkr=Pos OPEN
------------------
t-D: timer started
14
AR.Lock=True
AR.Blo=True t-dead
tD=OUT&
CB=OFF&
CB_READY=TRUE&
Trip
------------------------------------
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip
=False
&&(ShotCounter<set)
---------------------------------------------
t-CB open start
Shot=Shot+1 &
tCI start& Shot=Shot+ 1 &
tCI start& CB_CLOSE=True
15
AR.Lock=True
Reclosing
AR.Blo=True
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
-----------------------------------------
tR2R start&
CB_CLOSE=False
16
AR.Lock=True
t-Run2Ready
AR.Blo=True
tR2R=OUT&&
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
--------------------------
AR.successful
11
Ready
www.eaton.com 373
IM02602007E EDR-5000
11 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are
true:
• The breaker is in closed position;
• The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation;
13 Waiting Bkr Open
While in the »W AITING BKR OPEN« state, the autoreclosure supervises if the breaker is really tripped (open) after
receiving the trip flag of the initiate protection function within a pre-set breaker supervision time (200 ms). If this
is the case, the autoreclosure starts the programmed dead timer and goes to the dead timing state »t-dead«.
14 t-dead
While in the dead timing state »t-dead«, the pre-set dead timer for current AR shot is timing and cannot be
interrupted unless there are any blocking or lockout conditions coming.
After dead timer elapses, the autoreclosure issues the breaker reclosing command and goes into the next state:
»RECLOSING«, only if the following conditions are met:
• The breaker is in open position;

• The breaker is ready for next reclosing operation (if the Bkr. Ready logic input is used);
• No pickup from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s);
• No trip from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s); and
• No general tipping command.
Before issuing the breaker reclosing command, the current shot counter will be incremented. This is very
important for the shot-controlled initiate and blocking functions. Before entering into the »RECLOSING« state, the
pre-set breaker reclosing supervision timer (»t-Brk-ON-cmd«) will also be started.
15 Reclosing
If there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and the breaker is closed while the breaker reclosing
supervision timer is timing, the autoreclosure starts the »t-Run2Ready« timer and goes into the state:
»T-RUN2READY«.
16 t-Run2Ready
Successful Autoreclosure:
While in »T-RUN2READY« state, if there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and no more faults detected
within the »t-Run2Ready« timer, the autoreclosure logic will leave the »RUN« state and goes back to the »READY«
state. The flag “successful” is set.
374 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Unsuccessful Autoreclose:
If a fault is detected again (the shot-controlled initiate function is triggering) while »t-Run2Ready« timer is still
timing, the autoreclosure control again transfers to the »RUNNING« state. For a permanent fault, the process
described before will be repeated until all programmed shots were operated and the autoreclose process
changes into the »LOCKOUT« state. The flag “failed” is set.
Timing Diagrams
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for unsuccessful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot.
Fault
Inception 1
Clearance 0
t
Protection
50P[1]. AdaptSet1 50P[1].DefaultSet 51P[1]
Pickup 1
Reset 0
t
Protection
50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip 51P[1].Trip
Trip 1
Reset 0
t
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
Reclosing
1
t-D1 t-D2 t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2
AR.Running
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready Running Lockout
www.eaton.com 375
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for successful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot.
Fault
Inception 1
Clearance 0
t
Protection
50P[1]. AdaptSet1 50P[1].DefaultSet
Pickup 1
Reset 0
t
Protection
50P[1].Fasttrip 50P[1].Trip
Trip 1
Reset 0
t
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
Reclosing
1
t-D1 t-D2 t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot Shot 1 Shot 2
AR.Running
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready Running Ready
Auto Reclosing States during manual breaker closing.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
Manual Breaker Close
1
t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
AR - Module states
Standby t-Man Close Blo Ready
Protection Trip while Manual Close Blocking time is Timing
What happens if while the timer manual close block time is timing down the protective device gets a trip signal?
While the timer manual close block time is timing, any trip during this time period trips the breaker. The manual
close block timer does not care about that and timing continues until it times out.
376 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
After it times out, the AR-module looks at the breaker status again and sees that the breaker is open. The AR
goes to the »STANDBY« state, no autoreclosure is possible. Note: The AR Does Not go to »LOCKOUT«
state!)
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
0
t
Protection Trip
0
t
t-ManualCloseBlock
AR - Module states
Standby t-Man Close Blo Standby
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming before manual breaker closed.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
1
t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
Lockout Reset Time
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout t-Reset Lockout Standby t-Man Close Blo Ready
www.eaton.com 377
IM02602007E EDR-5000
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming after manual breaker closed.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
t-Lock2Ready t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout t-Reset Lockout t-Man Close Blo Ready
Zone Coordination
General Description
What does Zone Coordination mean?
Zone Coordination means that the upstream protection device is doing a virtual autoreclosure while the
downstream protective device is doing a “real” autoreclosure. By means of the zone coordination, selectivity can
be kept even if a downstream protective device changes its tripping characteristic after a reclosure cycle. The
virtual autoreclosure of the upstream device follows the downstream autoreclosure.
What application can be realized by means of Zone Coordination?
A radial distribution system is protected by an upstream protective device (with a breaker) and a downstream
protective device with a reclosure and fuse. By means of the zone coordination, a “fuse saving scheme” might
be realized. In order to “save fuses”, the downstream protective device might trip for the first reclosure attempt
at low tripping values (under grade the fuse, trying to avoid a damaging of the fuse). If the reclosure attempt
fails, the tripping values might be raised (over grade the fuse) for the second reclosure attempt (using higher
tripping values/characteristics).
What is essential?
The triggering thresholds of the upstream and the downstream devices have to be the same but the tripping
times have to be selectively.
How is Zone Coordination activated?
The zone coordination function is part of the autoreclosure element and it can be enabled by setting the
parameter »Zone coordination« as »active« within the [Protection Para/AR/General Settings] menu for an
upstream feeder protection device.
How does the Zone Coordination work (within the upstream protection device)?
When the zone coordination function is enabled, it works similar to a normal autoreclose function with the same
setting parameters: maximum reclosure attempts, dead timer for each shot, initiate functions for each shot, and
other timers for autoreclose process, but with the following zone coordination features to coordinate with the
downstream reclosers.
• The corresponding dead timer for each shot will be started even if the breaker of the upstream feeder
relay is NOT tripped from the assigned initiate protective functions.
378 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• The dead timer begins timing once the autoreclose senses a drawback of the assigned overcurrent
protection pickup signal. This exhibits that the fault current was tripped by the downstream recloser
opening.
• The shot counter of an enabled zone coordination will be incremented after the dead timer elapses, even
there is no breaker reclosing command issued. Meanwhile, the »T-RUN2READY« timer is started.
• If a permanent fault exists after the downstream recloser is reclosed, the fault current makes the
upstream overcurrent protection pick up again, but with the pickup thresholds or operating curves
controlled by the incremented shot number. In this way, the upstream feeder will “follow” the protective
settings of downstream recloser shot by shot.
• For a transient fault, the autoreclose with zone coordination will not be initiated again because of
absence of the fault current and will be reset normally after the expiration of the reset timer »t-
Run2Ready«.
Protective Shot 2
Device (triggered by: I [2])
Shot 1
(triggered by: I [1])
I
Shot 2
Recloser (triggered by: I [2])
Shot 1
(triggered by: I [1])
I
Tripping Curve of the Fuse
www.eaton.com 379
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module

Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR counters: Total Inactive, Inactive [Operation
unsuc number of AR, successful and unsuccessful Active /Reset]
no of AR.
Res ServiceCr Reset the Service Counters Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Reset Lock via Reset the AR Lockout via the panel. Inactive, Inactive [Operation
HMI Active /Reset]
Res Max Shots Resetting the Counter for the maximum Inactive, Inactive [Operation
/ h Cr allowed shots per hour. Active /Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

Mode Mode Do not use, Use [Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

and if the state of the assigned signal is /AR]
true.
and if the state of the assigned signal is /AR]
true.
Ex Shot Inc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
this external Signal. This can be used for /Global Prot Para
Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto /AR]
Reclosure devices).
Ex Lock The auto reclosure will locked out by this 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
external Signal (set into the lockout state). /Global Prot Para
/AR]
DI Reset Ex The Lockout State of the AR can be reset 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
Lock by a digital input. /Global Prot Para
/AR]
380 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Comm Reset The Lockout State of the AR can be reset -.-, -.- [Protection Para
Ex Lock by Communication. Modbus.Comm Cmd 1, /Global Prot Para
Modbus.Comm Cmd 2, /AR]
Modbus.Comm Cmd 3,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 4,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 5,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 6,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 7,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 8,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 9,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 10,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 11,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 12,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 13,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 14,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 15,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 16
Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure

/AR
/General Settings]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /AR
Zone Zone coordination: Sequence coordination Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
coordination is to keep upstream reclosers in step with Active /<1..4>
the downstream ones for fast and delay /AR
curve operation, thus avoiding over tripping. /General Settings]
Ex Shot Inc Fc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
this external Signal. This can be used for Active /<1..4>
Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto /AR
Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter /General Settings]
enables the functionality only. The
assignment has to be set within the global
parameters.
Ex Lock Fc The auto reclosure will locked out by this Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
external Signal. Note: This parameter Active /<1..4>
enables the functionality only. The /AR
assignment has to be set within the global /General Settings]
parameters.
www.eaton.com 381
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Reset Mode Reset Mode auto, auto [Protection Para
HMI, /<1..4>
DI, /AR
Comm, /General Settings]
HMI And Comm,
HMI And DI,
Comm And DI,
HMI And DI
Attempts Maximum number of permitted reclosure 1-6 1 [Protection Para
attempts. /<1..4>
/AR
/General Settings]
t-D1 Dead time between trip and reclosure 0.01 – 9999.00 s 1s [Protection Para
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase /<1..4>
or a ground fault. /AR
/Shot Manager
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /Shot 1]
/Shot Manager
/Shot Manager
/Shot Manager
/Shot Manager
/Shot Manager
Only available if: Attempts = 6 /Shot 6]
t- This timer will be started if the Breaker was 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para
ManualCloseBl switched on manually. While this timer is /<1..4>
ock running, AR cannot be started. /AR
/General Settings]
t-Lock2Ready This timer is started by the lockout reset 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para
signal, and before the timer expire the AR /<1..4>
cannot go to any other state. /AR
/General Settings]
382 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

t-Run2Ready Examination Time: If the Breaker remains 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para
after an reclosure attempt (shot) for the /<1..4>
duration of this timer in the Closed position, /AR
the AR has been successful and the AR /General Settings]
module returns into the ready state.
t-Block2Ready The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be 0.01 – 9999.00 s 10.0 s [Protection Para
delayed for this time, if there is no blocking /<1..4>
signal anymore. /AR
/General Settings]
t-AR AR Overall supervision time (> sum of all 1.00 – 9999.00 s 100.0 s [Protection Para
Supervision the timers used by AR) /<1..4>
/AR
/General Settings]
Service Alarm As soon as the AR-Counter exceeds this 1 - 65535 1000 [Protection Para
1 number of reclosure attempts, an alarm will /<1..4>
be given out (overhauling of the Bkr) /AR
/AR Wear Superv]
Service Alarm Too many auto reclosure attempts. If the 1 - 65535 65535 [Protection Para
2 configured number of AR cycles is reached, /<1..4>
an alarm will be given out. /AR
/AR Wear Superv]
Max AR/h Maximum Number of permitted 1 - 20 10 [Protection Para
Autoreclosure Cycles per hour. /<1..4>
/AR
/AR Wear Superv]
Initiate AR: Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function Start fct -.- [Protection Para
InitiateFc1 /<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
InitiateFc2 /<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
InitiateFc3 /<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
InitiateFc4 /<1..4>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
Shot 1: Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate Start fct -.- [Protection Para
InitiateFc1 Function /<1..4>
/AR
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6 /Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
www.eaton.com 383
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/AR
/Shot 1]
/AR
/Shot 1]
/AR
/Shot 1]
/AR
/Shot 2]
/AR
/Shot 2]
/AR
/Shot 2]
/AR
/Shot 2]
/AR
/Shot 3]
/AR
/Shot 3]
/AR
/Shot 3]
384 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/AR
/Shot 3]
/AR
/Shot 4]
/AR
/Shot 4]
/AR
/Shot 4]
/AR
/Shot 4]
/AR
/Shot 5]
/AR
/Shot 5]
/AR
/Shot 5]
/AR
/Shot 5]
/AR
Only available if: Attempts = 6 /Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
www.eaton.com 385
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/AR
/Shot 6]
/AR
/Shot 6]
/AR
/Shot 6]
Module Automatic Reclosure Input States

/Global Prot Para
/AR]
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter [Protection Para
will be incremented by this external Signal. /Global Prot Para
This can be used for Zone Coordination (of /AR]
upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note:
This parameter enables the functionality
only. The assignment has to be set within
the global parameters.
Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout. [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout [Protection Para
state of the AR (if the resetting via digital /Global Prot Para
inputs has been selected). /AR]
Comm Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the Lockout [Protection Para
State of the AR by Communication. /Global Prot Para
/AR]
Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Standby Signal: Standby
386 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
t-Man Close Blo Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This
timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually.
While this timer is running, AR cannot be started.
Ready Signal: Ready to shoot
Running Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
Bkr CLOSE Cmd Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command
t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure
attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position,
the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the
ready state.
Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the
AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal
(e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected .
Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release (de-
blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no
blocking signal anymore.
successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision
Pre Shot Pre Shot Control
Shot 1 Shot Control
Shot 2 Shot Control
Shot 3 Shot Control
Shot 4 Shot Control
Shot 5 Shot Control
Shot 6 Shot Control
Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations
Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been
exceeded.
Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR,
successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking
Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has
been reset.
ARRecCState Signal: AutoReclosing states defined by IEC61850:1=Ready/2=In
Progress/3=Successful
www.eaton.com 387
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Automatic Reclosure Module Values

AR Shot No. Counter - Auto Reclosure Attempts 0 0-6 [Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Total number Cr Total number of all executed 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
Automatic Reclosures Attempts /Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr successful Total number of successfully 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
executed Automatic Reclosures /Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr failed Total number of unsuccessfully 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
executed automatic reclosure /Count and RevData
attempts /AR]
Cr Service Alarm1 Remaining numbers of ARs until 1000 0 - 1000 [Operation
Service Alarm 1 /Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr Service Alarm2 Remaining numbers of ARs until 65536 0 - 65536 [Operation
Service Alarm 2 /Count and RevData
/AR]
Max Shots / h Cr Counter for the maximum allowed 0 0 - 65536 [Operation
shots per hour. /Count and RevData
/AR]
Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions

Assignment: 1 Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the BlockFct -.- [Protection Para
assigned signal is true. If the state of this /<1..4>
function is true the AR will be aborted. /AR
/BlockFct]
/BlockFct]
/BlockFct]
/BlockFct]
/BlockFct]
388 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/BlockFct]
AR Abort Functions
Name Description
-.- No assignment
www.eaton.com 389
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
AR Start Functions
Name Description
-.- No assignment
390 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
46 - Current Unbalance Protection

Elements:
46[1] ,46[2]
This is the 46 device Current Unbalance setting, which works similar to the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting.
The positive and negative sequence currents are calculated from the 3-phase currents. The Threshold setting
defines a minimum operating current magnitude of either I1 or I2 for the 46 function to operate, which insures
that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a current unbalance trip. The »%(I2/I1)« setting is the unbalance trip
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current »%(I2/I1)« for
ABC rotation and »%(I1/I2)« for ACB rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the
Phase Sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above.
This function requires positive or negative sequence current magnitude above the threshold setting and the
percentage current unbalance above the »%(I2/I1)« setting before allowing a current unbalance trip. Therefore,
both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates
a trip for current unbalance.
All elements are identically structured.
www.eaton.com 391
392
IM02602007E
46[1]...[n]
Name = 46[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup
14

EDR-5000
Name.t
Name.Threshold
t Name.Trip
AND
0
www.eaton.com
I2
IA
IB PPS
AND
NPS
Name.TripCmd
IC Filter AND 15
Name.%(I2/I1)
%(I2/I1)

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

Use Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Unbalance-Prot
true. /46[1]]
true. /46[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Unbalance-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /46[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module

/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Unbalance-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /46[1]]
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 393
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Threshold The Threshold setting defines a minimum 0.01 – 4.00 In 0.1 In [Protection Para
operating current magnitude of I2 for the 46 /<1..4>
function to operate, which ensures that the /Unbalance-Prot
relay has a solid basis for initiating a current /46[1]]
unbalance trip. This is a supervisory
function and not a trip level.
Only available if:CurrentBase = Protected

Object Rating
%(I2/I1) The %(I2/I1) setting is the unbalance trip 2 - 40% 46[1]: 40% [Protection Para
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of 46[2]: 20% /<1..4>
negative sequence current to positive /Unbalance-Prot
sequence current (% Unbalance=I2/I1). /46[1]]
Phase sequence will be taken into account
automatically.
Only available if: %(I2/I1) = Use

t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 46[1]: 10 s [Protection Para
46[2]: 20 s /<1..4>
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT /Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Current Unbalance Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Current Unbalance Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
Trip Signal: Trip
394 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Commissioning: Current Unbalance Module

Test of the unbalanced load protection function.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase current source with adjustable current unbalance; and
• Timer.
Procedure:
Check the phase sequence:
• Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters.
• Feed-in a three-phase nominal current.
• Change to the »Measuring Values« menu.
• Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for
»I2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).
If the displayed magnitude for I2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced
nominal currents fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the
currents seen by the relay is reversed.
• Now turn-off phase A.
• Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values«
menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should now be 33%.
• Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B.
• Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current I2 Fund. in the »Measuring Values«
menu. The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2 Fund.« should be again 33%.
• Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C.
• Again check the measuring value of unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values« menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should still be 33%.
Testing the trip delay:
• Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents).
• Switch off IA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »I2 Fund.« must be below 33%).
• Measure the tripping time.
The present current unbalance »I2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase current displayed.
www.eaton.com 395
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Testing the threshold values
• Configure minimum »%(I2/I1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.).
• For testing the threshold value, a current has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the
adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.).
• Feeding only phase A results in »%(I2/I1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(I2/I1) >= 2%« is always
fulfilled.
• Now increase the phase A current until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out ratio must not be
higher than 0.97 times the threshold value.
Testing %(I2/I1)
• Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.) (0.01 x In) and set »%(I2/I1)« greater or
equal to 10%.
• Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents). The measuring value of »%(I2/I1)«
should be 0%.
• Now increase the phase A current. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.)
should be reached before the value »%(I2/I1)« reaches the set »%(I2/I1)« ratio threshold.
• Continue increasing the phase 1 current until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of %(I2/I1)
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out of »%(I2/I1)« has
to be 1% below the »%(I2/I1)«setting.
Successful test result:
The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection

SOTF
In case a faulty line is energized (e.g.: when an grounding switch is in the CLOSE position), an instantaneous trip
is required. The SOTF module is provided to generate a permissive signal for other protection functions such as
overcurrents to accelerate their trips. The SOTF condition is recognized according to the User’s operation mode
that can be based on:
• The breaker state;

• No current flowing;
• Breaker state and no current flowing;
• Breaker switched on manually; and/or
396 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• An external trigger.
This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules. The module can be
started via a digital input that indicates that the breaker is manually closed.
This module issues a signal only (the module is not armed and does not issue a
trip command).
In order to influence the trip settings of the overcurrent protection in case of

switching onto a fault, the User has to assign the signal “SOTF.ENABLED“ to an
Adaptive Parameter Set. Please refer to Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets
sections. Within the Adaptive Parameter Set, the User has to modify the trip
characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to the User's needs.
www.eaton.com 397
398
SOTF
IM02602007E
Name = SOTF

SOTF.I<
Bkr.Prot CLOSE
41
SOTF.Mode
Bkr State
EDR-5000
SOTF.
I< t-en abl e
t SOTF.enabled
OR
Bkr State And I< AND
0 T
OR
Bkr manual CLOSE
Ext SOTF
www.eaton.com
SOTF.I<
IA
AND
IB
AND
IC
Bkr[x].Ex Man CLOSE Cmd
Ext SOTF
AR.Running* SOTF.AR Blo *
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Use Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

Mode Mode Bkr State, Bkr manual [Protection Para
I<, CLOSE /Global Prot Para
Bkr State And I<, /SOTF]
Bkr manual CLOSE,
Ext SOTF
and if the state of the assigned signal is /SOTF]
true.
true.
true.
Ext SOTF External Switch Onto Fault 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
Only available if: Mode = Ext SOTF /SOTF]
Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module

/SOTF]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /SOTF]
This parameter is only effective if a signal is /SOTF]
www.eaton.com 399
IM02602007E EDR-5000

I< The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the 0.01 – 1.00 In 0.01 In [Protection Para
measured current is less than this /<1..4>
parameter. /SOTF]
t-enable While this timer is running, and while the 0.10 – 10.00 s 2s [Protection Para
module is not blocked, the Switch Onto /<1..4>
Fault Module is effective (SOTF is armed). /SOTF]
Switch Onto Fault Module Input States

ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Ext SOTF-I Module Input State: External Switch Onto [Protection Para
Fault Alarm /Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States)
Name Description
enabled Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
I< Signal: No Load Current.
Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault [ANSI 50HS]

Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the configured operating mode:
• I< (No current);

• Bkr state (Breaker position);
• I< (No current) and Bkr state (Breaker position); and
• Bkr manual CLOSE.
400 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Necessary means:
• Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current);

• Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and
• Timer.
Test Example for Mode Bkr Manual CLOSE
Mode I< (In order to test the effectiveness): Initially, do not feed any current. Start
the timer and feed with an abruptly changing current that is distinctly greater
than the I<-threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Mode I< and Bkr state: Simultaneously, manually switch on the breaker and feed
with an abrupt change current that is distinctly greater than the I<-threshold.
Mode Bkr state: The breaker has to be in the OFF position. The signal
„SOTF.ENABLED“=0 is false. If the breaker is switched on, the signal
„SOTF.ENABLED“=1 becomes true as long as the timer t-effective is running.
• The breaker has to be in the OPEN position. There must be no load current.
• The status display of the device shows the signal "SOTF.ENABLED“=1.
Testing:
• Manually switch the breaker to the CLOSE position and start the timer at the same time.
• After the hold time t-enable is expired, the state of the signal has to change to "SOTF.enabled“=0.
• Write down the measured time.
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Tech-
nical Data section.
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup

Available Elements:
CLPU
When manually or automatically closing a breaker after it has been open for a prolonged time, a greater than
normal load current may be experienced due to the load inrush . This high starting current causes some
overcurrent elements to unnecessarily trip the breaker. The cold load pickup (CLPU) function prevents this from
happening.
The cold load pickup function detects a warm-to-cold load transition according to the four selectable cold load
detection modes:
• Breaker state;
• Undercurrent (I<);
www.eaton.com 401
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Breaker state AND undercurrent; and

• Breaker state OR undercurrent.
After a warm-to-cold load transition has been detected, a specified load-off timer will be started. This User-
settable load-off timer is used in some cases to make sure that the load is really “cold” enough. After the load-
off timer times out, the CLPU function issues an “enable” signal »CLPU.ENABLED« that can be used to block User-
selected, sensitive protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent elements, current unbalance, or
power protection elements. Using this enable signal, some User-selected time inverse overcurrent elements
may also be desensitized by means of activating adaptive settings of the corresponding overcurrent elements.
When a cold load condition is finished (a cold-to-warm load condition is detected) due to, for example, breaker
closing or load current injection, a load inrush detector will be initiated that supervises the coming and going of
the load inrush current process. A load inrush is detected if the coming load current exceeds a User-specified
inrush current threshold. This load inrush is considered as finished if the load current is decreased to 90% of the
inrush current threshold.
After the inrush current is diminished, a settle timer starts. The cold load pickup enable signal can only be reset
after the settle timer times out. Another max-Block timer, which is started parallel with the load inrush detector
after a cold load condition is finished, may also terminate the CLPU enable signal if a load inrush condition is
prolonged abnormally.
The cold load pickup function can be blocked manually by external or internal signal at the User´s choice. For
the devices with the Auto-Reclosing function, the CLPU function will be blocked automatically if auto-reclosure is
initiated (AR is running).
This module issues a signal only (it is not armed).
In order to influence the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection, the User
has to assign the signal “CLPU.ENABLED“ to an adaptive parameter set. Please
refer to the Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets section. Within the adaptive
parameter set, the User has to modify the tripping characteristic of the
overcurrent protection according to the needs.
Please be aware of the meaning of the two delay timers.
t load Off (Pickup Delay): After this time expires, the load is no longer diversified.
t Max Block (Release Delay): After the starting condition is fulfilled (e.g.: breaker
switched on manually), the “CLPU.enabled” signal will be issued for this time.
That means for the duration of this time, the tripping thresholds of the
overcurrent protection can be desensitized by means of adaptive parameters
(please refer to the Parameters section). This timer will be stopped if the current
falls below 0.9 times of the threshold of the load inrush detector and remains
below 0.9 times of the threshold for the duration of the settle time.
402 www.eaton.com
Example Mode: Breaker Position
CLPU
Name = CLPU
1
CinBkr-52a
0
EDR-5000
1
0 CLPU.detected
www.eaton.com
1
0 Cold Load
t-Max Block t-Load Off

IM02602007E
403
404
IM02602007E
CLPU
Name = CLPU

Bkr[x].Pos OPEN
CLPU.I<
CLPU.detected
CLPU.Mode
CLPU.I<
IA Bkr State
IB t-Load Off
AND I<
EDR-5000
OR S Q
IC CLPU.enabled
0
Bkr State And I< AND
AND Bkr State Or I< R1 Q
www.eaton.com
Load Inrush Detector
OR
1.0 * Threshold 0
t-Max Block
OR
1.0 * Threshold Settle Time
Imax AND
0
0.9 * Threshold
0
0.9 * Threshold Settle Time+e
AR.Running*
CLPU.Settle Time
CLPU.Load Inrush
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module

Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Cold Load Pickup Module

Mode Mode Bkr State, Bkr State [Protection Para
I<, /Global Prot Para
Bkr State Or I<, /CLPU]
Bkr State And I<
and if the state of the assigned signal is /CLPU]
true.
true.
true.
Set Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module

/CLPU]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /CLPU]
This parameter is only effective if a signal is /CLPU]
t-Load Off Select the outage time required for a load to 0.00 – 7200.00 s 10 s [Protection Para
be considered cold. If the Pickup Timer /<1..4>
(Delay) has run out, a Cold Load Signal will /CLPU]
be issued.
www.eaton.com 405
IM02602007E EDR-5000

t-Max Block Select the maximum amount of time 0.00 – 300.00 s 10 s [Protection Para
allowed for cold load pickup to be active; if /<1..4>
the time has elapsed a warm load signal will /CLPU]
be issued.
I< The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the 0.01 – 1.00 In 0.01 In [Protection Para
measured current is less than this /<1..4>
parameter. /CLPU]
Threshold Set the load current inrush threshold. 0.10 – 4.00 In 1.2 In [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/CLPU]
Settle Time Select the time for the cold load inrush. 0.00 – 300.00 s 1.00 s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/CLPU]
States of the Inputs of the Cold Load Pickup Module

/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Signals of the Cold Load Pickup Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
enabled Signal: Cold Load enabled
detected Signal: Cold Load detected
AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
I< Signal: No Load Current.
Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush
Settle Time Signal: Settle Time
406 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module

Testing the Cold Load Pickup module according to the configured operating mode:
• I< (No current);

• Bkr state (Breaker position);
• I< (No Current) and Bkr state (Breaker position); and
• I< (No Current) or Bkr state (Breaker position).
Necessary means:
• Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current);

Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and
• Timer.
Test Example for Mode Bkr State (Breaker Position)
Mode I<: In order to test the tripping delay, start the timer then feed with an
abruptly changing current that is distinctly less than the I<-threshold. Measure
the tripping delay. In order to measure the drop-out ratio, feed an abruptly
changing current that is distinctly above the I<-threshold.
Mode I< and Bkr state: Combine the abruptly changing current(switching the
current ON and OFF) with the manual switching ON and OFF of the breaker.
Mode I< or Bkr state: Initially carry out the test with an abruptly changing current
that is switched ON and OFF (above and below the I<-threshold). Measure the
tripping times. Finally, carry out the test by manually switching the breaker ON
and OFF.
• The breaker has to be in the OFF position. There must not be any load current.
• The Status Display of the device shows the signal "CLPU.ENABLED“=1.
• The Status Display of the device shows the signal ”CLPU.I<“=1.
Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio:
• Manually switch the breaker ON and simultaneously start the timer.
• After the the »t Max Block (Release Delay)« timer has expired, the signal "CPLU.Enabled “=0 has to be
false.
• Manually switch the breaker OFF and simultaneously start the timer.
• After the »t load Off« timer has expired, the signal ”CPLU.ENABLED “=1 has to become true.
www.eaton.com 407
IM02602007E EDR-5000
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Tech-
nical Data section.
27M - Undervoltage Protection

Available elements:
27M[1] ,27M[2]
M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in

the System Configuration.
All undervoltage elements are identically structured.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of

"Main VT con".
Vn=Main VT sec .
MainVT sec
Vn=
3
This is the 27 device undervoltage setting for the main three phase VT. This function consists of a Phase, a
Pickup, a Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select at which phase (any one, any two, or all)
the undervoltage function operates. The Pickup setting is the magnitude at which the undervoltage element
operates. The Delay setting is the time period an undervoltage must occur before the device initiates a trip.
Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works based on phase-to-phase (»Open-
Delta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate depending on the phase setting: if any
one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase setting drop(s) below the set point. This
element works based on RMS values.
An undervoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage drops below the UV Threshold setting. The
undervoltage trip is set when the voltage stays below the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the
number of phases specified by the phase setting). The undervoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage
rises above the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the undervoltage protection.
If the element should be blocked in the event of a “Loss of Potential”, the »LOP BLO« parameter must be set to
»active«.
408 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output side,
the following has to be taken into account.
When disconnecting the line, it has to be ensured by an »External Blocking« that

undervoltage tripping cannot happen. In order to block the 27M element in case
that the breaker is open:
• Assign the »Bkr.POS OPEN« signal to a blocking input (»ExBlo1« or

»ExBlo2« within the Global Parameters) of the 27M element,
and
• »ExBlo Fc« has to be set to “active” within the parameter sets of the the
27M element.
When the auxiliary voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not yet
been applied, undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an »External
Blocking«. Otherwise a continuous tripping would occur, disabling the ability to
energize again.
If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system
parameter »Main VT Con« is set to »Wye«, the messages issued by the voltage
protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as follows:
»27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage

»VA«.
»27M[1].PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VB«.
»27M[1].PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VC«.
However, if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system
parameter »Main VT Con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should
be interpreted as follows:
»27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase

voltage »VAB«.
»27M[1]. PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase
voltage »VBC«.
»27M[1]. PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase
voltage »VCA«
www.eaton.com 409
410
IM02602007E
27M[1]...[n]
Name = 27M[1]...[n]

Name.Pickup Phase A
Name.LOP Blo
28
Inactive
Name.Pickup Phase B
29
Active
Name.Pickup Phase C
30
AND
LOP. LOP Blo Name.Pickup
38a 14
Name.Trip Phase A
EDR-5000
AND 20
Name.Trip Phase B
Name.Phases
www.eaton.com
AND 21
any one
AND any two

Name.Trip Phase C
all
V< AND 22
Name.t
VA
t
RMS
0
AND φ
VB
RMS Name.Trip
VC
RMS
AND Name.TripCmd
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings AND 15

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Main-V-Prot
true. /27M[1]]
true. /27M[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Main-V-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /27M[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module

/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Main-V-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /27M[1]]
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 411
IM02602007E EDR-5000

True RMS /<1..4>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Phases Indicates if one, two of three or all phases any one, any one [Protection Para
are required for operation any two, /<1..4>
all /Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 27M[1]: 0.80 Vn [Protection Para
module/element will be started. Definition of 27M[2]: 0.90 Vn /<1..4>
Vn: Vn is dependent on the System /Main-V-Prot
Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case /27M[1]]
that within the System Parameters "Main
VT con" is set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main
VT sec ". In case that "Main VT con" is set
to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)".
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode

= V<
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 27M[1]: 10 s [Protection Para
27M[2]: 2.00 s /<1..4>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
LOP Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Inactive, Active [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Undervoltage Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Undervoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
412 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C
Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [27M]

This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection 59M (by using the related undervoltage
values).
Please consider the following deviations:
• For testing the threshold values, the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated.
•
• For detection of the dropout ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to achieve more than
103% of the trip value. At 103% of the trip value, the relay is to dropout at the earliest moment.
59M - Overvoltage Protection

Available elements:
59M[1] ,59M[2]
M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in

the System Configuration.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of

"Main VT con".
Vn=Main VT sec .
MainVT sec
Vn=
3
www.eaton.com 413
IM02602007E EDR-5000
This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Main VT. This element consists of a Phase, a Pickup, and a
Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select which phase (any one, any two, or all) the
Overvoltage function operates. Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works
based on phase-to-phase (»Open-Delta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate
depending on the phase setting: if any one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase
setting rise(s) above the set point. This element works based on RMS values.
An overvoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage rises above the overvoltage Threshold setting. The
overvoltage trip is set when the voltage stays above the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the
number of phases specified by the phase setting). The overvoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage
falls below the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the overvoltage protection.
If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system
parameter »Main VT con« is set to »Wye«, the messages issued by the voltage
protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as follows:
»59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage

»VA«.
»59M[1].PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VB«.
»59M[1].PICKUPC« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VC«.
However,if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system
parameter »Main VT con« is set to »Wye«, then the messages should be
interpreted as follows:
»59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line

voltage »VAB«.
»59M[1]. PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »VBC«.
»59M[1]. PICKUP C« or »59M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »VCA«
414 www.eaton.com
59M[1]...[n]
Name = 59M[1]...[n]

Name.Pickup Phase A
28
Name.Pickup Phase B
29
Name.Pickup Phase C
30
Name.Pickup
14
Name.Trip Phase A
EDR-5000
AND 20
Name.Mode
Name.Trip Phase B
www.eaton.com
any one AND 21
any two
all
AND Name.Trip Phase C
V> AND 22
VA
AND
RMS
AND AND Name.t
VB
RMS t Name.Trip
OR
VC 0
RMS AND
AND OR Name.TripCmd

IM02602007E
415
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module

true. /59M[1]]
true. /59M[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Main-V-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /59M[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module

/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Fc=active".
416 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

True RMS /<1..4>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Phases Indicates if one, two of three or all phases any one, any one [Protection Para
are required for operation any two, /<1..4>
all /Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Pickup If the pickup value is exceeded, the 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 59M[1]: 1.20 Vn [Protection Para
module/element will be started. Definition of 59M[2]: 1.1 Vn /<1..4>
Vn: Vn is dependent on the System /Main-V-Prot
Parameter setting of "Main VT con". In case /59M[1]]
that within the System Parameters "Main
VT con" is set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main
VT sec ". In case that "Main VT con" is set
to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)".
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode

= V>
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 59M[1]: 10 s [Protection Para
59M[2]: 2.00 s /<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode /Main-V-Prot
= V> Or V< /59M[1]]
Overvoltage Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Overvoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B
www.eaton.com 417
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C
Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [59M]

Test of the overvoltage protection elements, 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase (for each element).
Necessary means:
• Three phase AC voltage source;
• Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and
• Voltmeter.
Procedure (3 x single-phase, 1 x three-phase, for each element)
Testing the threshold values:

For testing the threshold values and drop-out values, the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is activ-
ated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the per-
missible tolerances.

For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is
started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.
Testing the drop-out ratio:

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only drop-out at a minimum of
97% of the trip value.

The measured threshold values, trip delays, and drop-out ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment
list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
418 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection

Available elements:
27A[1] ,27A[2]
This is the 27A device Undervoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as
the 27M except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input. The Alarm Delay is the
time period a LOP must occur before the device initiates a »LOP BLO« signal that can be used to block other
elements like 51V (Voltage Restraint).
www.eaton.com 419
420
IM02602007E
27A[1]...[n]
Name = 27A[1]...[n]

EDR-5000
Name.Pickup
14 31
www.eaton.com
Name.t
Name.V<
t Name.Trip
AND
V 0
RMS
Name.TripCmd
AND 15 23
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Aux-V-Prot
true. /27A[1]]
true. /27A[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Aux-V-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /27A[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module

/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Aux-V-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /27A[1]]
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 421
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Pickup Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 27A[1]: 0.8 Vn [Protection Para
voltage of the aux VT. 27A[2]: 0.9 Vn /<1..4>
/Aux-V-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode /27A[1]]
= V<
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 27A[1]: 10 s [Protection Para
27A[2]: 2.00 s /<1..4>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Aux. Undervoltage Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Aux. Undervoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Aux. Undervoltage

Aux. undervoltage protection elements.
Necessary components:
• One-phase AC voltage source;
• Voltmeter.
422 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Procedure (for each element):

For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has
to be decreased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter,
the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.
Testing the trip delay

started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is reached and it is stopped when the relay trips.

Increase the measuring quantity to more than 103% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a
maximum of 103% of the trip value.

The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection

Available elements:
59A[1] ,59A[2]
This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as the
59M, except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input (this element works based on
True RMS).
www.eaton.com 423
424
IM02602007E
59A[1]...[n]
Name = 59A[1]...[n]

EDR-5000
Name.Pickup
14 31
www.eaton.com
Name.t
Name.Pickup
t Name.Trip
AND
V 0
RMS
Name.TripCmd
AND 15 23
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module

true. /59A[1]]
true. /59A[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Aux-V-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /59A[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module

/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 425
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Pickup Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 59A[1]: 1.2 Vn [Protection Para
voltage of the aux VT. 59A[2]: 1.1 Vn /<1..4>
/Aux-V-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode /59A[1]]
= V>
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 59A[1]: 10 s [Protection Para
59A[2]: 2.00 s /<1..4>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Aux. Overvoltage Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Aux. Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Aux. Overvoltage

Aux. Overvoltage protection elements.
• Voltmeter.
426 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be in-
creased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the devi-
ation must be within the permissible tolerances.

For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of

59N - Neutral Overvoltage

Available elements:
59N[1] ,59N[2]
This is the 59 device for the Neutral Overvoltage settings (this element works based on fundamental).
www.eaton.com 427
428
IM02602007E
59N[1]...[n]
Name = 59N[1]...[n]

EDR-5000
Name.Pickup
14 31
www.eaton.com
Name.t
Name.Pickup
t Name.Trip
AND
VX 0
Fund.
Name.TripCmd
AND 15 23
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Neutral-V-Prot
true. /59N[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /Neutral-V-Prot
true. /59N[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Neutral-V-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /59N[1]]
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module

/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Neutral-V-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /59N[1]]
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Neutral-V-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /59N[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 429
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Pickup Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 59N[1]: 0.4 Vn [Protection Para
voltage of the aux VT. 59N[2]: 0.3 Vn /<1..4>
/Neutral-V-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode /59N[1]]
= V>
t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 59N[1]: 5.00 s [Protection Para
59N[2]: 2.00 s /<1..4>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Neutral Overvoltage Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Neutral Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Neutral Overvoltage Protection

Neutral overvoltage protection elements.
• Voltmeter.
430 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be in-
creased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the devi-
ation must be within the permissible tolerances.


Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of

25 - Sync-check
Available Elements:
Sync
The sync-check function can be bypassed by external sources. In this case,

synchronization has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before
breaker closing!
The Bus voltages are to be measured by the first three measuring inputs of the
voltage measuring card (VA/VAB, VB/VBC, VC/VCA). The line voltage is to be
measured by the fourth measuring input of the voltage measuring card (VX). In
the menu [System Para/General Settings/V Sync] the User has to define to which
phase the fourth measuring input is compared.
Sync-check
The sync-check function is provided for the applications where a line has two-ended power sources. The sync-
check function has the abilities to check voltage magnitude, angle differences, and frequency difference (slip
frequency) between the bus and the line. If enabled, the sync-check may supervise the closing operation
manually, automatically, or both.. This function can be overridden by certain bus-line operation conditions and
can be bypassed with an external source.
Voltage Difference ΔV
The first condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their voltage phasors have the same magnitude.
This can be controlled by the generator's AVR.
www.eaton.com 431
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Bus VA Line VA
Bus VA
Line VA
Bus f
Line f
Bus
BusVC
VC
LineVB
Line VB LineLine
VC VC
BusBus
VB VB
Frequency Difference (Slip Frequency) ΔF
The second condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their frequencies are nearly equal. This can be
controlled by the generator's speed governor.
Line VA
Bus VA
Bus f
Line f
Bus VC
Line VB Line VC
Bus VB
If the generator frequency fBus is not equal to the mains frequency fLine, it results in a slip frequency
ΔF = |fBus -fLine| between the two system frequencies.
∆ v(t)
432 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Voltage Curve with Enlarged Resolution.
v(t)Line
v(t)Busbar
v(t)
∆ v(t)
Angular or Phase Difference.
Even if the frequency of both systems is exactly identical, usually an angular difference of the voltage phasors is
the case.
Line VA
Bus VA
Angle Diff
Bus f = Line f
Bus VC
Line VB Line VC
Bus VB
At the instant of synchronization, the angular difference of the two systems should be nearly zero because,
otherwise, unwanted load inrushes occur. Theoretically, the angular difference can be regulated to zero by
giving short pulses to the speed governors. When paralleling generators with the grid, in practice,
synchronization is requested as quick as possible and so usually a slight frequency difference is accepted. In
such cases, the angular difference is not constant but changes with the slip frequency ΔF.
By taking the breaker closing time into consideration, a lead of the closing release impulse can be calculated in a
way that breaker closing takes place at exactly the time when both systems are in angular conformity.
Basically the following applies:
Where large rotating masses are concerned, the frequency difference (slip frequency) of the two systems should
possibly be nearly zero, because of the very high load inrushes at the instant of breaker closing. For smaller
rotating masses, the frequency difference of the systems can be higher.
www.eaton.com 433
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Synchronization Modes
The sync-check module is able to check the synchronization of two electrical systems (system-to-system) or
between a generator and an electrical system (generator-to-system). For paralleling two electrical systems, the
station frequency, voltage, and phase angle should be exactly the same as the utility grid. Whereas the
synchronization of a generator to a system can be done with a certain slip-frequency, depending on the size of
the generator used. Therefore the maximum breaker closing time has to be taken into consideration. With the
set breaker closing time, the sync-check module is able to calculate the moment of synchronization and gives
the paralleling release.
When paralleling two systems, it has to be verified that the system-to-system

mode is selected. Paralleling two systems in generator-to-system mode can
cause severe damage!
Working Principle Sync-check (Generator-to-System)
(Please refer to the block diagram on next page.)
The sync-check element measures the three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three
phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«, and »VCA« of the generator busbar. The line voltage Vx is measured
by the fourth voltage input. If all synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency],
and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous. An
advanced Close Angle Evaluator function takes the breaker closing time into consideration.
434 www.eaton.com
Sync=: SyncMode= Generator2System
SynchronRunTiming
AND
SyncMode=
Main VT con Generator2System t-MaxSyncSuperv
AND
BkrCloseInitiate 0
Open-Delta Bypass override
Wye Bypass= Active SynchronFailed

AND AND
MinLiveBusVoltage
Bus VA Bypass-I Bkr=Open
Bus VAB LBDL=Active

LB
AND AND SyncOverridden
OR
LBDL
Sync override
Bus VB LiveBus
Bus VBC MaxDeadBusVoltage

DBLL =
Active
DB t-VoltDead
AND AND
0
Bus VC
In-Sync Allowed
DBLL OR AND
Bus VCA
EDR-5000
LBLL
AND
MinLiveLineVoltage Ext. Blocked
LL LiveLine
www.eaton.com
Line VX
MaxDeadLineVoltage DBDL
t-VoltDead DL
AND
0
DBDL=Active
MaxVoltageDiff
VDiffTooHigh
AND
Voltage difference: Line to Bus
SlipTooHigh
MaxSlipFrequency
Frequency difference: Line to Sys-in-Sync
Bus AND AND
MaxAngleDiff
AngleDiffTooHigh
AND
Angle difference: Line to Bus
t-MaxBkrCloseDelay
Advanced Close AND
Angle Calculator
t Bkr=Open
IM02602007E
435
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Working Principle Sync-check (System-to-System)
The sync-check function for two systems is very similar to the sync-check function for generator-to-system
except there is no need to take the breaker closing time into account. The sync-check element measures the
three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«,
and »VCA« of the station voltage bus bar. The line voltage Vx is measured by the fourth voltage input. If all
synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the
limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous.
436 www.eaton.com
Sync=: SyncMode= System2System

Main VT con
Open-Delta Bypass override
Wye Bypass= Active

AND
MinLiveBusVoltage
Bus VA Bypass-I
Bus VAB LBDL=Active

LB
AND AND SyncOverridden
OR
LBDL
Sync override
Bus VB LiveBus
Bus VBC MaxDeadBusVoltage

DBLL =
Active
DB t-VoltDead
AND AND
0
Bus VC
In-Sync Allowed
EDR-5000
DBLL OR AND
Bus VCA
LBLL
AND Ext. Blocked
MinLiveLineVoltage
www.eaton.com
LL LiveLine
Line VX
MaxDeadLineVoltage DBDL
t-VoltDead DL
AND
0
DBDL=Active
MaxVoltageDiff
VDiffTooHigh
AND
Voltage difference: Line to Bus
SlipTooHigh
MaxSlipFrequency
Frequency difference: Line to Sys-in-Sync
Bus AND AND
MaxAngleDiff
AngleDiffTooHigh
AND
Angle difference: Line to Bus
IM02602007E
437
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Sync-check Override Conditions
If enabled the following conditions can override the sync-check function:
• LBDL = Live Bus – Dead Line

• DBLL = Dead Bus – Live Line
• DBDL = Dead Bus – Dead Line
Also the sync-check function can be bypassed by an external source.
When the sync-check function is overridden or bypassed, synchronization has to

be secured by other synchronizing systems before breaker closing!
Device Planning Parameters of the Sync-check Module

Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Sync-check Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Sync]
true.
and if the state of the assigned signal is /Sync]
true.
Bypass The Sync-check will be bypassed if the 1..n, DI-LogicList -.- [Protection Para
state of the assigned signal (logic input) /Global Prot Para
becomes true. /Sync]
BkrCloseInitiate Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism 1..n, SyncRequestList -.- [Protection Para
check from any control sources (e.g. HMI / /Global Prot Para
SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal /Sync]
becomes true, a Breaker Close will be
initiated (Trigger Source).
Set Parameters of the Sync-check Module

/Sync
/General Settings]
438 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

parameter is only effective if a signal is /Sync
Bypass Fc Allowing to bypass the Sync-check, if the Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
state signal that is assigned to the Active /<1..4>
parameter with the same name within the /Sync
Global Parameters (logic input) becomes /General Settings]
true.
SyncMode Sync-check mode: GENERATOR2SYSTEM System2System, System2System [Protection Para
= Synchronizing generator to system Generator2System /<1..4>
(breaker close initiate needed). /Sync
SYSTEM2SYSTEM = Sync-Check between /Mode / Times]
two systems (Stand-Alone, no breaker info
needed).
t- Maximum breaker close time delay (Only 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.05 s [Protection Para
MaxBkrCloseD used for GENERATOR-SYSTEM working /<1..4>
elay mode and is critical for a correct /Sync
synchronized switching) /Mode / Times]
Only available if: SyncMode =

System2System
t- Synchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0.00 – 3000.00 s 30.00 s [Protection Para
MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate. /<1..4>
v Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM /Sync
working mode. /Mode / Times]
Only available if: SyncMode =

System2System
MinLiveBusVolt Minimum Live Bus voltage (Live bus 0.10 – 1.30 Vn 0.65 Vn [Protection Para
age detected, when all three phase bus voltages /<1..4>
are above this limit.) /Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxDeadBusV Maximum Dead Bus voltage (Dead bus 0.01 – 1.00 Vn 0.03 Vn [Protection Para
oltage detected, when all three phase bus voltages /<1..4>
are below this limit.) /Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MinLiveLineVol Minimum Live Line voltage (Live line 0.10 – 1.30 Vn 0.65 Vn [Protection Para
tage detected, when line voltage above this /<1..4>
limit.) /Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxDeadLineV Maximum Dead Line voltage (Dead Line 0.01 – 1.00 Vn 0.03 Vn [Protection Para
oltage detected, when line voltage below this limit.) /<1..4>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
t-VoltDead Voltage dead time (A Dead Bus/Line 0.000 – 300.000 s 0.167 s [Protection Para
condition will be accepted only if the voltage /<1..4>
falls below the set dead voltage levels /Sync
longer than this time setting). /DeadLiveVLevels]
www.eaton.com 439
IM02602007E EDR-5000

MaxVoltageDiff Maximum voltage difference between bus 0.01 – 1.00 Vn 0.24 Vn [Protection Para
and line voltage phasors (Delta V) for /<1..4>
synchronism (Related to bus voltage /Sync
secondary rating). /Conditions]
MaxSlipFreque Maximum frequency difference (Slip: Delta 0.01 – 2.00 Hz 0.20 Hz [Protection Para
ncy f) between bus and line voltage allowed for /<1..4>
synchronism. /Sync
/Conditions]
MaxAngleDiff Maximum phase angle difference (Delta-Phi 1 - 60° 20° [Protection Para
in degree) between bus and line voltages /<1..4>
allowed for synchronism /Sync
/Conditions]
DBDL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Dead-Line Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
synchronism overriding Active /<1..4>
/Sync
/Override]
DBLL Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Live-Line Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
/Sync
/Override]
LBDL Enable/disable Live-Bus AND Dead-Line Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
/Sync
/Override]
States of the Inputs of the Sync-check Module

/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
BkrCloseInitiate-I State of the module input: Breaker Close [Protection Para
Initiate with synchronism check from any /Global Prot Para
control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the /Sync]
state of the assigned signal becomes true,
a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger
Source).
Signals of the Sync-check Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
440 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Voltage is below the LiveBus
threshold
LiveLine Signal: Live Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Voltage is below the
LiveLine threshold
SynchronRunTiming Signal: SynchronRunTiming
SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s
when the breaker is still open after the Synchron-Run-timer has
timed out.
SyncOverridden Signal:Synchronism Check is overridden because one of the
Synchronism overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met.
VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too
high.
Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
system synchronism criteria.
In-Sync Allowed Signal: In-Sync Allowed
Sync-check Statistic Values

Slip Freq Slip frequency [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Volt Diff Voltage difference [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Diff Angle difference [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
f Bus Bus frequency [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
f Line Line frequency [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Bus Bus Voltage [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Line Line Voltage [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Bus Bus Angle (Reference) [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
www.eaton.com 441
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Angle Line Line Angle [Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Sync-check Breaker Close Initiate Signals

These Signals can be used for a Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism check from any control sources (e.g.
HMI / SCADA). If the state of the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger
Source).
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Bkr.Sync CLOSE request Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
442 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 443
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
444 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 445
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
446 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 447
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
448 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 449
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
450 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection

Available elements:
47[1] ,47[2]
This is the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting, which consists of the Threshold, %(V2/V1), and Delay settings.
The voltage unbalance function is based on the Main VT system 3-phase voltages.
The positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated from the 3-phase voltages. The Threshold setting
defines a minimum operating voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the 47 function to operate, which ensures
that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a voltage unbalance trip. This is a supervisory function and not a trip
level.
The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence voltage
to positive sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1), or %(V2/V1) for ABC rotation and %(V1/V2) for ACB
rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the Phase Sequence setting in the
System Configuration group described above.
This function requires positive or negative sequence voltage magnitude above the threshold setting and the
percentage voltage unbalance above the %(V2/V1) setting before allowing a voltage unbalance trip. Therefore,
both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates
a trip for voltage unbalance.
The voltage unbalance pickup and trip functions are reset when the positive and negative sequence voltages V1
and V2 drop below the Threshold setting or (V2/V1) drops below the %(V2/V1) setting minus 1%.
www.eaton.com 451
452
47[1]...[n]
IM02602007E
Name = 47[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup

EDR-5000
Name.Threshold
PPS V1
Name.t
Filter
www.eaton.com
t Name.Trip
AND
VA 0 14
VB AND
VC
Name.%(V2/V1)
NPS V2
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
Filter

EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module

Mode Unbalance Protection: Supervision of the Do not use, Use [Device Planning]
Voltage System Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module

true.1 /47[1]]
true.2 /47[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Unbalance-Prot
true.
Parameter Set Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module

/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com 453
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Threshold The Threshold defines a minimum 0.01 – 1.30 Vn 0.2 Vn [Protection Para
operating voltage magnitude of either V1 or /<1..4>
V2 for the 47 function to operate, which /Unbalance-Prot
ensures that the relay has a solid basis for /47[1]]
initiating a voltage unbalance trip. This is a
supervisory function and not a trip level.
The meaning of Vn: Phase to Phase: Vn =
Main VT sec. Phase to Ground: Vn = Main
VT / SQRT(3).
Only available if: Device Planning: 47.Mode

= Threshold
%(V2/V1) The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip 2 - 40% 47[1]: 40% [Protection Para
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of 47[2]: 20% /<1..4>
negative sequence voltage to positive /Unbalance-Prot
sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1). /47[1]]
Phase sequence will be taken into account
automatically.
Only available if: %(V2/V1) = Use

t Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 47[1]: 10.0 s [Protection Para
47[2]: 20s /<1..4>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
LOP Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Voltage Unbalance Module

/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Signals of the Voltage Unbalance Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
454 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
Trip Signal: Trip
Commissioning: Voltage Unbalance Module

Test of the unbalanced load protection function.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase AC voltage source with adjustable voltage unbalance; and
• Timer.
Procedure:
Check the phase sequence:
• Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters.
• Feed-in a three-phase nominal voltage.
• Change to the [Measured Values/Voltage] menu.
• Check the measuring value for the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for
»V2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).
If the displayed magnitude for V2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced
nominal voltages fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the
voltages seen by the relay is reversed.
• Now turn-off phase A.
• Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured
Values/Voltage] menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should now be 33% of the nominal voltage.
• Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B.
• Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured
Values/Voltage] menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should be again
33%.
• Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C.
• Again check the measuring value of unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/Voltage]
menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should still be 33%.
www.eaton.com 455
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages).
• Switch off VA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »V2 Fund.« must be below 33% of the nominal
voltage Vn).
• Measure the tripping time.
The present voltage unbalance »V2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase voltage displayed.
• Configure minimum »%(V2/V1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.).
• For testing the threshold value, a voltage has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the
adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.).
• Feeding only phase A results in »%(V2/V1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(V2/V1) >= 2%« is always
fulfilled.
• Now increase the phase A voltage until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out ratio must not be
higher than 0.97 times the threshold value.
Testing %(V2/V1)
• Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.) (0.01 x Vn) and set »%(V2/V1)« greater or
equal to 10%.
• Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages). The measuring value of »%(V2/V1)«
should be approximately 0%.
• Now increase the phase A voltage. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.)
should be reached before the value »%(V2/V1)« reaches the set »%(V2/V1)« ratio threshold.
• Continue increasing the phase 1 voltage until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of %(V2/V1)
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out of »%(V2/V1)«
has to be 1% below the »%(V2/V1)«setting.
The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.
456 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection

Available elements:
81[1] ,81[2] ,81[3] ,81[4] ,81[5] ,81[6]
All frequency protective elements are identically structured.
Frequency - Measuring Principle
The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the three
phase frequencies. Only valid measured frequency values are taken into
account. If a phase voltage is no longer measurable, this phase will be excluded
from the calculation of the average value.
The measuring principle of the frequency supervision is based in general on the time measurement of complete
cycles, whereby a new measurement is started at each zero passage. The influence of harmonics on the
measuring result is thus minimized.
V(t) T
Frequency tripping is sometimes not desired by low measured voltages which, for instance. occur during
alternator acceleration. All frequency supervision functions are blocked if the voltage is lower 0.15 times Vn.
Frequency Functions
Due to its various frequency functions, the device is very flexible. That makes it suitable for a wide range of
applications where frequency supervision is an important criterion.
In the Device Planning menu, the User can decide how to use each of the six frequency elements.
f[1] to f[6] can be assigned as:
• 81U – Under-frequency;
• 81O – Over-frequency;
• 81R – Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
• 81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
• 81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
• 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval);
• 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval); and
• 78V – Vector Surge.
www.eaton.com 457
IM02602007E EDR-5000
81U – Under-frequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency falls below the set
pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains under the set pickup
threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in
general against under-frequency.
81O – Over-frequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency exceeds the set
pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains above the set pickup
threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in
general against over-frequency.
Working Principle
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If all of the three phase
voltages are below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81U or 81O), the phase voltages are compared to the set pickup threshold for over-
or under-frequency. If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if
there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping
delay timer is started. When the frequency still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold after the tripping
delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
458 www.eaton.com
81[1]...[n]:81U-Under Or 81O-Over
Name = 81[1]...[n]

Device Planning
Name.Pickup 81
Name.Mode
Name.Pickup
81U-Under: 81O-Over
81O-Over: 81U-Under
14
VA Name.f
(81O-Over|81U- Name.Trip 81
Name.t
Under)
VB Frequency Calculation t Name.Trip
f AND
0
VC
EDR-5000
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
www.eaton.com
<15%Vn
Name.Blo by V<
<15%Vn AND
<15%Vn

IM02602007E
459
IM02602007E EDR-5000
81R Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
Electrical generators running in parallel with the mains (e. g.: industrial internal power supply plants) should be
separated from the mains when failure in the intra-system occurs for the following reasons:
• Damage to electrical generators must be prevented when mains voltage is recovering asynchronously
(e. g.: after a short interruption).
• The industrial internal power supply must be maintained.
A reliable criterion of detecting mains failure is the measurement of the rate of change of frequency 81R (df/dt).
The precondition for this is a load flow via the mains coupling point. At mains failure, the load flow change
spontaneously leads to an increasing or decreasing frequency. At active power deficit of the internal power
station, a linear drop of the frequency occurs and a linear increase occurs at power excess. Typical frequency
gradients during application of "mains decoupling" are in the range of 0.5 Hz/s up to over 2 Hz/s.
The protective device detects the instantaneous frequency gradient 81R (df/dt) of each mains voltage period.
Through multiple evaluations of the frequency gradient in sequence, the continuity of the directional change (sign
of the frequency gradient) is determined. Because of this special measuring procedure, a high safety in tripping
and thus a high stability against transient processes (e. g.: switching procedure) are achieved.
The frequency gradient (rate of change of frequency [df/dt]) may have a negative or positive sign, depending on
frequency increase (positive sign) or decrease (negative sign).
In the frequency parameter sets, the User can define the kind of df/dt mode:
• Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency;

• Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and
• Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in
frequency.
This protection element provides a tripping threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency gradient df/dt
exceeds or falls below the set tripping threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency
gradient remains still above/below the set tripping threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping
command will be issued.
Working Principle
(Please refer to block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81R), the phase voltages are compared to the set frequency gradient (df/dt)
threshold. If in any of the phases, the frequency gradient exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold (acc. to
the set df/dt mode) and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued
instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency gradient still exceeds or is below the
set pickup threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
460 www.eaton.com
81[1]...[n]: 81R-Rate of Change
Name = 81[1]...[n]

Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Name.Pickup
14
Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT

Device Planning Name.t
Name.Mode t
Name.Trip
df/dt Mode AND
0
81R-Rate of Change
Positive df/dt
EDR-5000
Negative df/dt
Absolute df/dt
VA +df/dt 81R-Rate of Change
VB
www.eaton.com
df/dt Calculation -df/dt
VC
Idf/dtI Name.TripCmd
AND 15
<15%Vn
Name.Blo by V<
<15%Vn AND
<15%Vn

IM02602007E
461
IM02602007E EDR-5000
81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency falls below a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a frequency gradient
df/dt, and a tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:

frequency.
81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency exceeds a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a frequency gradient df/dt,
and a tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:

frequency.
Working Principle
set in the Device Planning (81UR & df/dt or 81OR & dt/dt), the phase voltages are compared to the set
frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency gradient (df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, both the
frequency and the frequency gradient exceed or falls below the set thresholds and if there are no blocking
commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started.
When the frequency and the frequency gradient still exceed or are below the set threshold after the tripping
delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
462 www.eaton.com
81[1]...[n]: 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt
Name = 81[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup 81
2 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Device Planning Name.Pickup

Name.Mode 14
81OR- Over & df/dt
81UR- Under & df/dt
81O-Over f
VA 81U-Under
VB Frequency Calculation
f f
VC Name.t
t
Name.Trip
df/dt Mode AND
0
Positive df/dt
EDR-5000
Negative df/dt
Absolute df/dt
+df/dt 81R-Rate of Change
www.eaton.com
df/dt Calculation -df/dt
Idf/dtI Name.TripCmd
AND 15
<15%Vn
Name.Blo by V<
<15%Vn AND
<15%Vn

3
(Tripping command deactivated or blocked. )
IM02602007E
463
IM02602007E EDR-5000
81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT
With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a threshold for the
absolute frequency difference (frequency decrease) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT
With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a threshold for the
absolute frequency difference (frequency increase) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
Working Principle
set in the Device Planning (81UR & DF/DT or 81OR & DF/DT), the phase voltages are compared to the set
frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency decrease or increase threshold DF.
If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking
commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously. At the same time the timer for the
supervision interval DT is started. When, during the supervision interval DT, the frequency still exceeds or is
below the set pickup threshold and the frequency decrease/increase reaches the set threshold DF, a tripping
command will be issued.
Working Principle of DF/DT Function
(Please refer to f(t) diagram after the block diagram.)
Case 1:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t1, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency
difference (decrease) does not reach the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired, no trip will occur.
The frequency element remains blocked until the frequency falls below the under-frequency threshold f< (81U)
again.
Case 2:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t4, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency
difference (decrease) reaches the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired (t5), a trip command is
issued.
464 www.eaton.com
81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODR- Over & DF/DT
Name = 81[1]...[n]

2 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals) Name.Pickup 81
Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT

Device Planning
Name.Pickup
Name.Mode
14
81ODR- Over & DF/DT
VA
81UDR- Under & DF/DT
VB 81O-Over f
Frequency Calculation DT
f 1
VC 81U-Under
AND t Name.Trip
AND
<name>.81+D
F
EDR-5000
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
www.eaton.com
Name.Blo by V<
<15%Vn
<15%Vn AND
<15%Vn

4
IM02602007E
465
466
IM02602007E
81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT

Name = 81[1]...[n]
Trip
f
Reset
Temporarily Blocking
fN
81U-Under
DF
DF
DF
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
t
DT DT
t1 t2 t3 t4 t6
t5
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
78V Vector Surge
The vector surge supervision protects synchronous generators in mains parallel operation due to very fast
decoupling in case of mains failure. Very dangerous are mains auto reclosings for synchronous generators. The
mains voltage returning typically after 300 ms can hit the generator in asynchronous position. A very fast
decoupling is also necessary in case of long time mains failures.
Generally there are two different applications.
• Only mains parallel operation - no single operation:

In this application, the vector surge supervision protects the generator by tripping the generator
breaker in case of mains failure.
• Mains parallel operation and single operation:

For this application, the vector surge supervision trips the mains breaker. Here it is insured that
the gen.-set is not blocked when it is required as an emergency set.
A very fast decoupling in case of mains failures for synchronous generators is very difficult. Voltage supervision
units cannot be used because the synchronous alternator, as well as the load impedance, support the
decreasing voltage.
In this situation, the mains voltage drops only after some 100 ms below the pickup threshold of the voltage
supervision and, therefore, a safe detection of mains auto reclosings is not possible with voltage supervision
only.
Frequency supervision is partially unsuitable because only a highly loaded generator decreases its speed within
100 ms. Current relays detect a fault only when short-circuit type currents exist, but cannot avoid their
development. Power relays are able to pickup within 200 ms, but they also cannot prevent the power from rising
to short-circuit values. Since power changes are also caused by sudden loaded alternators, the use of power
relays can be problematic.
Whereas the vector surge supervision of the device detects mains failures within 60 ms without the restrictions
described above because it is specially designed for applications where very fast decoupling from the mains is
required. Adding the typical operating time of a breaker or contactor, the total disconnection time remains below
150 ms.
Basic requirement for tripping of the generator/mains monitor is a change in load of more than 15 - 20% of the
rated load. Slow changes of the system frequency, for instance at regulating processes (adjustment of speed
regulator), do not cause the relay to trip.
Trippings can also be caused by short-circuits within the grid, because a voltage vector surge higher than the
preset value can occur. The magnitude of the voltage vector surge depends on the distance between the short-
circuit and the generator. This function is also of advantage to the Power Utility Company because the mains
short-circuit capacity and, consequently, the energy feeding the short-circuit is limited.
To prevent a possible false tripping, the vector surge measuring is blocked at a low input voltage <15% Vn. The
undervoltage lockout acts faster then the vector surge measurement.
Vector surge tripping is blocked by a phase loss so that a VT fault (e. g.: faulty VTs fuse) does not cause false
tripping.
www.eaton.com 467
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Measuring Principle of Vector Surge Supervision
Equivalent circuit at synchronous generator in parallel with the mains.
V = I 1 * j Xd I1 I2
VP V1 Grid
Voltage vectors at mains parallel operation.
V1
VP
V = I1* j Xd
Grid/Load
Generator
The rotor displacement angle between stator and rotor is dependent on the mechanical moving torque of the
generator shaft. The mechanical shaft power is balanced with the electrical fed mains power and, therefore, the
synchronous speed keeps constant.
468 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Equivalent circuit at mains failure.
V´ = I´ 1 * j Xd
I1
VP V´1 Grid
In case of mains failure or auto-reclosing, the generator suddenly feeds a very high load. The rotor
displacement angle is decreased repeatedly and the voltage vector V1 changes its direction (V1').
Voltage vectors at mains failure.
V1 V´1
VP
V´ = I´1* j Xd
Generator Load
www.eaton.com 469
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Voltage vector surge.
Voltage Vector Surge

V(t) V(t) V(t)`
Trip
t=0 t
78V vector surge
As shown in the voltage/time diagram, the instantaneous value of the voltage jumps to another value and the
phase position changes. This is called phase or vector surge.
The relay measures the cycle duration. A new measuring is started at each zero passage. The measured cycle
duration is internally compared with a reference time and from this the deviation of the cycle duration of the
voltage signal is ascertained. In case of a vector surge as shown in the above graphic, the zero passage occurs
either earlier or later. The established deviation of the cycle duration is in compliance with the vector surge
angle. If the vector surge angle exceeds the set value, the relay trips immediately.
Tripping of the vector surge is blocked in case of loss of one or more phases of the measuring voltage.
Working Principle
The vector surge element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the vector surge calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (78V), the phase voltages are compared to the set vector surge threshold. If in any of
the phases, the vector surge exceeds the set threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency
element, an alarm and a trip command is issued instantaneously.
470 www.eaton.com
81[1]...[n]: 78V vector surge
Name = 81[1]...[n]

Name.Pickup Vector Surge
Name.Pickup
Name.Trip Vector Surge

Device Planning
Name.Trip
Name.Mode
AND 14
78V vector surge
EDR-5000
VA Name.78V vector
surge
78V vector
VB
www.eaton.com
Delta phi Calculation surge
VC
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
<15%Vn
Name.Blo by V<
<15%Vn AND
<15%Vn

3
IM02602007E
471
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

Mode Mode Do not use, 81[1]: 81O-Over [Device Planning]
81U-Under, 81[2]: 81O-Over
81O-Over, 81[3]: 81U-Under
81UR- Under & df/dt, 81[4]: 81U-Under
81OR- Over & df/dt, 81[5]: 81R-Rate of Change
81UDR- Under & DF/DT, 81[6]: 81R-Rate of Change
81ODR- Over & DF/DT,
81R-Rate of Change,
78V vector surge
Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Freq-Prot
true. /81[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /Freq-Prot
true. /81[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Freq-Prot
true.
Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module

/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Freq-Prot
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
472 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

parameter is only effective if a signal is /Freq-Prot
Fc=active".
81O-Over Pickup value for over-frequency. 40.00 – 69.95 Hz 81[1]: 61.00 Hz [Protection Para
81[2]: 61.0 Hz /<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode 81[3]: 51.00 Hz /Freq-Prot
= 81O-Over Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Or 81[4]: 51.00 Hz /81[1]]
81ODR- Over & DF/DT 81[5]: 51.00 Hz
81[6]: 51.00 Hz
81U-Under Pickup value for under-frequency. 40.00 – 69.95 Hz 81[1]: 59.0 Hz [Protection Para
81[2]: 49.00 Hz /<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode 81[3]: 59.0 Hz /Freq-Prot
= 81U-Under Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81[4]: 59.0 Hz /81[1]]
81UDR- Under & DF/DT 81[5]: 59.0 Hz
81[6]: 59.0 Hz
/<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode /Freq-Prot
= 81U-Under Or 81O-OverOr 81OR- Over /81[1]]
& df/dt Or 81UR- Under & df/dt
81R-Rate of Measured value (calculated): Rate-of- 0.1 – 10.0 Hz/s 1.0 Hz/s [Protection Para
Change frequency-change. /<1..4>
/Freq-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode /81[1]]
= 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under &
df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt
t-df/dt Trip delay df/dt 0.00 – 300.00 s 1.00 s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
DF Frequency difference for the maximum 0.0 – 10.0 Hz 1.00 Hz [Protection Para
admissible variation of the mean of the rate /<1..4>
of frequency-change. This function is /Freq-Prot
inactive if DF=0. /81[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode

= 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODR-
Over & DF/DT
DT Time interval of the maximum admissible 0.1 – 10.0 s 1.00 s [Protection Para
rate-of-frequency-change. /<1..4>
/Freq-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode /81[1]]
= 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODR-
Over & DF/DT
www.eaton.com 473
IM02602007E EDR-5000

df/dt Mode df/dt Mode Absolute df/dt, Absolute df/dt [Protection Para
Positive df/dt, /<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode Negative df/dt /Freq-Prot
= 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under & /81[1]]
df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Only available
if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate
of Change Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or
81OR- Over & df/dt Only available if: Device
Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate of Change
78V vector Measured Value (Calculated): Vector Surge 1 - 30° 10° [Protection Para
surge /<1..4>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode /Freq-Prot
= 78V vector surge /81[1]]
Frequency Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequency-
change
Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi
474 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
Commissioning: Over-frequency [ANSI 81O]

All configured over-frequency protection stages.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase voltage source with variable frequency; and
• Timer
Procedure:

• Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated;
• Note the frequency value; and
• Disconnect the test voltage.

• Set the test voltage to nominal frequency and
• Now connect a frequency jump (activation value) and then start a timer. Measure the tripping time at the
relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio:

Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99.95% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). The relay must only drop-out
at 99.95% of the trip value at the earliest (or 0.05% fn).

Commissioning: Under-frequency [ANSI 81U]

For all configured under-frequency elements, this test can be carried out similar to the test for over-frequency
protection (by using the related under-frequency values).
Please consider the following deviations:
• For testing the threshold values, the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is
activated.
• For detection of the drop-out ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100.05% of
the trip value (or 0.05% fn). At 100.05% of the trip value the relay is to drop-out at the earliest (or 0.05%
fn).
www.eaton.com 475
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Commissioning: 81R Rate of Change (df/dt)

All frequency protection stages that are projected as df/dt.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase voltage source and
• Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.
Procedure:

• Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated and
• Note the value.

• Set the test voltage to nominal frequency:
• Now apply a step change (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: apply 3 Hz per
second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second); and
• Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Compare the measured tripping time to the configured
tripping time.

Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: 81U and Rate of Change (f< and -df/dt)

All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and -df/dt.
Necessary means:
Procedure:

• Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device:
• Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold: and
• Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is below the setting value (example: apply -1 Hz
per second if the setting value is -0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to
trip.

476 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Commissioning: 81O and Rate of Change (f> and df/dt)

All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and df/dt.
Necessary means:
Procedure:

• Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device;
• Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and
• Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply 1 Hz
per second if the setting value is 0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to
trip.

Commissioning: 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT

All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
• Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
Procedure:

• Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold; and
• Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a
frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay
has to trip immediately.

Commissioning: 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT

All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
• Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
www.eaton.com 477
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Procedure:

• Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and
• Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a
frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay
has to trip immediately.

Commissioning: Vector Surge 78V

All frequency protection stages that are projected as vector surge (78V).
Necessary means:
• Three-phase voltage source that can generate a definite step (sudden change) of the voltage pointers
(phase shift).
Procedure:

• Apply a vector surge (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: if the setting value is
10° apply 15°).

Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratio can be taken from the Technical Data.
32 - Power Protection
Available Elements:
32[1] ,32[2] ,32[3]
This is the 32 device Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings:
• Do Not Use;
• Over Forward Power (P>);
• Under Forward Power (P<);
• Over Reverse Power (Pr>); and
• Under Reverse Power (Pr<).
Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power
VAn.
Definition for VAn is as follows:

VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary
rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections.
The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes.
478 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
32 - Forward Power - Over and Under
No Trip Trip Region
Pickup P >
Trip Region No Trip
Pickup P <
www.eaton.com 479
IM02602007E EDR-5000
32 - Reverse Power - Over and Under
Trip Region No Trip
Pickup Pr >
No Trip Trip Region
Pickup Pr <
480 www.eaton.com
32[1]...[n]
Name = 32[1]...[n]

Name.LOP Blo Name.Pickup

14
Ina ctive
Active
Name.t
Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP
38a Name.Trip
t
OR AND AND
Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS 0
40
EDR-5000
Device Planning Name.TripCmd

PQS.Mode
AND 15
Pickup P>
Pickup P<
www.eaton.com
Pickup Pr> OR
Pickup Pr<
Name.Mode
Pickup P>, Pickup P<, Pickup Pr>, Pickup Pr<
Syst W RMS

IM02602007E
481
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Power Protection Module

Mode Mode Do not use, 32[1]: Over forward [Device Planning]
Over forward, 32[2]: Under forward
Under forward, 32[3]: Over reverse
Over reverse,
Under reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the Power Protection Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Power-Prot
true. /32[1]]
true. /32[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Power-Prot
true.
Parameter Set Parameters of the Power Protection Module

/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Power-Prot
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Fc=active".
482 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

LOP Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Voltage Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
CTS Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Current Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Pickup P> Over(load) Active Power Pickup Value. Can 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 1.20 VAn [Protection Para
be used for monitoring the maximum /<1..4>
allowed forward power limits of /Power-Prot
transformers or overhead lines. Definition /32[1]]
for VAn is as follows: VAn = SQRT(3) * VT
secondary rating * CT secondary rating
(I=1/5A) for wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary
rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating
(I=1/5A) for delta connections.
Only available if: Device Planning:

PQS.Mode = Pickup P>
Pickup P< Under(load) Active Power Pickup Value 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para
(e.g.: caused by idling motors). Definition /<1..4>
for VAn is as follows: VAn = SQRT(3) * VT /Power-Prot
secondary rating * CT secondary rating /32[1]]

PQS.Mode = Pickup P<
Pickup Pr> Over Reverse Definition for VAn is as 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 1.20 VAn [Protection Para
follows: VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary /<1..4>
rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for /Power-Prot
wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary /32[1]]

PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr>
Pickup Pr< Under Reverse Definition for VAn is as 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para
wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary /32[1]]

PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr<
/<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
www.eaton.com 483
IM02602007E EDR-5000
States of the Inputs of the Power Protection Module

/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Signals of the Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection
Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module

Testing the projected Power Protection Modules:
• P>;
• P<;
• Pr>; and
• Pr<.
Necessary means:
• 3-phase AC voltage source ;

• 3-phase AC current source; and
• Timer.
Procedure – Testing the wiring:
• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• Adjust the current pointers 30 degrees lagging to the voltage pointers.
484 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• The following measuring values have to be shown:

P=0.86 Pn;
Q=0.5 Qn; and
S=1 Sn.
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check the
wiring.
The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the tripping
values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard.
If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: P>), start at 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: P<), start at 120% of the
tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: P>), start a
timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 80%
of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: P<), start a timer
simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested from 120% of the
tripping value to 80% of the tripping value.
P>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
• Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn).
• In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
• In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
www.eaton.com 485
IM02602007E EDR-5000
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technic-
al Data section.
P<
Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured.
• In order to test the tripping delay feed, 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and
voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
nical Data section.
Pr>
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase angle between voltage and
current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Pn).
486 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
al Data section.
Pr<
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Pn).
al Data section.
www.eaton.com 487
IM02602007E EDR-5000
32V - Reactive Power Protection

Available Elements:
32V[1] ,32V[2] ,32V[3]
This is the 32V device Reactive Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings:
• Do Not Use;
• Over Forward Reactive Power (Q>);
• Under Forward Reactive Power (Q<);
• Over Reverse Reactive Power (Qr>); and
• Under Reverse Reactive Power (Qr<).
Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power
Van.
Definition for VAn is as follows:
VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye
or
VAn = 3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections.
The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes.
488 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
32V Forward Reactive Power - Over and Under
Trip Region
Pickup Q >
No Trip
No Trip
Pickup Q <
Trip Region
www.eaton.com 489
IM02602007E EDR-5000
32V Reverse Reactive Power - Over and Under
P
No Trip
Pickup Qr
>
Trip Region
Trip Region
Pickup Qr
<
No Trip
490 www.eaton.com
32V[1]...[n]
Name = 32V[1]...[n]

Name.LOP Blo Name.Pickup

14
Ina ctive
Active
Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP Name.t

38a Name.Trip
t
OR AND AND
Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS 0
40
EDR-5000
Device Planning Name.TripCmd

PQS.Mode
AND 15
Pickup Q>
Pickup Q<
www.eaton.com
Pickup Qr> OR
Pickup Qr<
Name.Mode
Pickup Q>, Pickup Q<, Pickup Qr>, Pickup Qr<
Syst VAr RMS

IM02602007E
491
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module

Mode Mode Do not use, 32V[1]: Over forward [Device Planning]
Over forward, 32V[2]: Under forward
Under forward, 32V[3]: Over reverse
Over reverse,
Under reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module

true. /32V[1]]
true. /32V[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Power-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /32V[1]]
true.
Parameter Set Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module

/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
assigned to the corresponding global /32V[1]]
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
assigned to the corresponding global /32V[1]]
Fc=active".
492 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

LOP Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Voltage Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
CTS Blo Measuring Circuit Supervision Current Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Active /<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Pickup Q> Over(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 1.20 VAn [Protection Para
Monitoring the maximum allowed reactive /<1..4>
power of the electrical equipment like /Power-Prot
transformers or overhead lines). If the /32V[1]]
maximum value is exceeded, a condensator
bank could be switched off. Definition for
VAn is as follows: VAn = SQRT(3) * VT
secondary rating * CT secondary rating

PQS.Mode = Pickup Q>
Pickup Q< Under(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value. 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para
Monitoring the minimum value of the /<1..4>
reactive power. If it falls below the set /Power-Prot
value, a condensator bank could be /32V[1]]
switched on. Definition for VAn is as follows:
VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT
secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or VAn =
3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT
secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta
connections.

PQS.Mode = Pickup Q<
Pickup Qr> Over Reverse Definition for VAn is as 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 1.20 VAn [Protection Para
wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary /32V[1]]

PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr>
Pickup Qr< Under Reverse Definition for VAn is as 0.02 – 10.00 VAn 0.80 VAn [Protection Para
wye or VAn = 3 * VT secondary /32V[1]]

PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr<
www.eaton.com 493
IM02602007E EDR-5000

/<1..4>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Reactive Power Protection Module

/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Signals of the Reactive Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection
Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
Commissioning Examples for the Reactive Power Protection Module

Testing the projected Power Protection Modules.
• Q>;
• Q<;
• Qr>; and
• Qr<.
Necessary means:
• 3-phase AC voltage source;

• 3-phase AC current source; and
• Timer.
494 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.

• P=0.86 Pn;
• Q=0.5 Qn; and
• S=1 Sn.
wiring.
The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the tripping
values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard.
If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q>), start at 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q<), start at 120% of the
tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: Q>), start a
If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: Q<), start a
Q>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1,1 Qn)
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degrees phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
• Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1. Qn).
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
www.eaton.com 495
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Set the pickup threshold (e.g. 1.1. Qn).
nical Data section.
Q<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
relay (PF=0).
• Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn).
relay (PF=0).
• Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn).
al Data section.
Qr>
• Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current
• The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
496 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Qn).
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 1.1 Qn).
al Data section.
Qr<
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Qn).
• Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 0.3 Qn).
www.eaton.com 497
IM02602007E EDR-5000
nical Data section.
55A and 55D - PF Protection

Available elements:
PF-55D[1] ,PF-55D[2] ,PF-55A[1] ,PF-55A[2]
Definition Apparent Power Factor 55A (RMS - Includes Harmonics):
The Apparent Power Factor is computed by dividing real power (watts) by volt-amperes. The apparent power
factor computation includes harmonics.
Watt
PF apparent =
VA
Definition Displacement Power Factor 55D (Fundamental):
The Displacement Power Factor is computed by dividing the fundamental watts by the fundamental volt-
amperes as shown below. This definition is only valid at the system fundamental operating frequency. The
Displacement Power Factor isolates the fundamental portion of the Power Factor from the effects of harmonics.
Watt
PF displacement =
Watt 2var2
These elements supervise the Power Factor within a defined area (limits).
The area is defined by four parameters:
• The Trigger Quadrant (lead or lag);

•
• The Threshold (Power Factor value);
•
• The Reset Quadrant (lead or lag); and
•
• The Reset Value (Power Factor value).
498 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Q
leading lagging
PF<0 PF>0
90°<phi<180° 0°<phi<90°
lagging leading
PF>0 PF<0
180°<phi<270° 270°<phi<360°
www.eaton.com 499
500
IM02602007E
PF[1]...[n]
Name = PF[1]...[n]

Apparent Power Factor 55A
Name.Pickup
14
Pickup Delay And Release Delay

Name.t-Pickup Comp
Name.t-Reset Comp
Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time

Name.Compensator
Name.Trigger-PF
EDR-5000
Name.t
PF RMS
t Name.Trip
S Q AND
0
www.eaton.com
Name.Reset-PF R1 Q
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
V
<20%Vn
Name.Impossible
OR
OR
Imax
<0.5%In

PF[1]...[n]
Name = PF[1]...[n]

Displacement Power Factor 55D
Name.Pickup
14
Pickup Delay And Release Delay

Name.t-Pickup Comp
Name.t-Reset Comp
Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time
Name.Compensator
Name.Trigger-PF
EDR-5000
Name.t
PF Fund.
t Name.Trip
S Q AND
0
www.eaton.com
Name.Reset-PF R1 Q
Name.TripCmd
AND 15
V
<20%Vn
Name.Impossible
OR
OR
Imax
<0.5%In

IM02602007E
501
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Power Factor Module

Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Power Factor Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Power Factor-Prot
true. /PF-55D[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /Power Factor-Prot
true. /PF-55D[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Power Factor-Prot
and if the state of the assigned signal is /PF-55D[1]]
true.
Set Parameters of the Power Factor Module

/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Power Factor-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /PF-55D[1]]
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Power Factor-Prot
assigned to the corresponding global /PF-55D[1]]
Fc=active".
502 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Trig Mode Trigger Mode. Should the Module be leading, lagging [Protection Para
triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to lagging /<1..4>
the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the /Power Factor-Prot
Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is /PF-55D[1]]
lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag?
Trigger-PF This is the power factor where the relay will 0.5 - 0.99 0.7 [Protection Para
pick up /<1..4>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Res Mode Trigger Mode. Should the Module be leading, lagging [Protection Para
triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to lagging /<1..4>
the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the /Power Factor-Prot
Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is /PF-55D[1]]
lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag?
Reset-PF This setting is the power factor, at which the 0.5 - 0.99 0.9 [Protection Para
relay will reset the power factor trip. It is like /<1..4>
setting a hysteresis for the Trigger setting. /Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
t-trip Tripping delay 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.00 s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
t-Pickup Comp Pre-trigger time for the Compensation 0.00 – 300.00 s 5.00 s [Protection Para
Signal. When this timer is elapsed the /<1..4>
compensation signal will be activated. /Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
t-Reset Comp Reset (Post-trigger) time of the 0.00 – 300.00 s 5.00 s [Protection Para
Compensation Signal. When this timer is /<1..4>
elapsed the compensation signal will be /Power Factor-Prot
deactivated. /PF-55D[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Power Factor Module

/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
www.eaton.com 503
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Signals of the Power Factor Module (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor
Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
Commissioning: Power Factor

• Testing the projected Power Factor Modules.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase AC voltage source;

• Three-phase AC current source; and
• Timer.
• Feed the rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
• Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.

• P = 0.86 Pn
• Q = 0.5 Qn
• S = 1 Sn
wiring.
In this example, the PF-Trigger is set to 0.86 = 30° (lagging) and the PF-Reset is
set to 0.86 = 30° (leading).
Carry out the test with the settings (trigger and reset) that fit the switchboard.
Testing the threshold values (Trigger) (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging):
• Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
• Adjust the angle between the voltage and current (current pointer lagging) until the relay picks up.
504 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Write down the pickup value.
Testing the Reset (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading):
• Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF = 1 (current pointer leading) until the alarm
drops off.
• Write down the reset value.
Testing the trip delay (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging):
• Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
• Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) with an abrupt change to
PF = 0.707 (45°) lagging.
• Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the
selected trip time.
The measured total tripping delays, threshold, and reset values correspond with those values specified in the ad-
justment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found the Technical Data section.
ExP - External Protection

Available elements:
ExP[1] ,ExP[2] ,ExP[3] ,ExP[4]
All elements of the external protection ExP[1]...[4] are identically structured.
By means of these elements, the protective device can detect and execute pickups and trips that are issued by
other external devices. This can be helpful, for logging purposes, if the other device is not equipped with an
event or waveform recorder. This might also be helpful if the other device has no communication (SCADA)
interface.
www.eaton.com 505
506
IM02602007E
ExP[1]...[n]
Name = ExP[1]...[n]
EDR-5000
Name.Trip-I
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings Name.Alarm-I

2 (Element is not deactivated
and no active blocking
www.eaton.com
signals)
Name.Alarm Name.Alarm
AND 14
Name.Trip Name.Trip
AND
Name.TripCmd
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the External Protection Module

Mode Mode Do not use, Do not use [Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the External Protection Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /ExP
true. /ExP[1]]
and if the state of the assigned signal is /ExP
true. /ExP[1]]
activated (allowed) within a parameter set /ExP
and if the state of the assigned signal is /ExP[1]]
true.
Alarm Assignment for External Alarm 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip External trip of the Bkr. if the state of the 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Protection Para
assigned signal is true. /Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the External Protection Module

/ExP
/ExP[1]]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /ExP
assigned to the corresponding global /ExP[1]]
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
www.eaton.com 507
IM02602007E EDR-5000

parameter is only effective if a signal is /ExP
assigned to the corresponding global /ExP[1]]
Fc=active".
External Protection Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip-I Module Input State: Trip [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
External Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Alarm Signal: Alarm
Trip Signal: Trip
508 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Commissioning: External Protection

• Test of the External Protection Module.
Necessary means:
• Dependent on the application.
Procedure:
Simulate the functionality of the External Protection (pickup, trip, and blockings) by (de-)energizing the digital
inputs.
All external pickups, external trips, and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device.
www.eaton.com 509
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Supervision
50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision
BF

The breaker failure (BF) protection is used to provide backup protection in the event that a breaker fails to oper-
ate properly during fault clearing. A breaker failure condition is recognized if current is still flowing through the
breaker after tripping or opening breaker commands have been issued for a specified time. The User can select
different trigger modes. In addition, up to three additional trigger events (trip commands) can be assigned from
all the protection modules.
Trigger Modes
There are three trigger modes for the breaker failure available. In addition, there are three assignable trigger
inputs available.
• All Trips: The Trip Command of the Breaker will be used to trigger the Breaker Failure.
• Current Trips: All current trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the
BF module. The list/section “Current Functions” shows all current trips in tabular form.
• External Trips: All external trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start
the BF module. The list/section “External Trips” shows all external trips in tabular form.
• In addition, the User can also select none (e.g.: if the User intends to use only one of the three
additional assignable trigger inputs).
Those trips can exclusively start the breaker failures that are assigned within the
breaker manager to the breaker that is to be supervised.
Select the winding side from which the measured currents should be taken in
case this protective device is a transformer differential protection.
In case, that an External Trip Module is used, this trip has to be assigned also
within the Trip Manager. Otherwise, this trip cannot trigger the BF-Failure
module.
510 www.eaton.com
BF
Name = BF

(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Trigger
BF.I-BF >
Bkr[x].TripCmd
11 All Trips
BF.t-BF
Current.TripCmd
15 Current Trips
ExtTrip[x].TripCmd
15 External Trips
EDR-5000
BF.Trigger1
1..n, Assignment List φ

OR
www.eaton.com
BF.Trigger2 BF.Pickup

BF.Trip
BF.Trigger3
14
1..n, 1..n, Assignment IA
List BF.Lockout
IB S 1
IC
R1 1
Reset Res Lockout
Res Lockout
BF.Trigger1-I
BF.Trigger2-I
BF.Trigger3-I
IM02602007E
511
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Explanation:
By triggering the BF element, a delay timer will be started. Once the timer is started, it will not be stopped if the
trigger falls back.
The timer will be stopped, if the current magnitudes fall below the set threshold. The BF function is now in the
rejected mode until the trigger falls back.
Once the delay timer has expired and if the current magnitudes of any of the three phase currents still exceed
the set threshold, the Breaker Failure signal will be issued (becomes active).
This signal will remain active as long as the current magnitudes exceed the set threshold. This signal will
become inactive (falls back) as soon as all current magnitudes fall below the set threshold, e.g. if the upstream
protective device has interrupted the current (OFF command to the upstream breaker) by processing the BF
signal of the downstream device.
Once a Breaker Failure is detected, the Breaker Failure signal will set a Lockout Signal. The Lockout Signal is a
persistent alarm and has to be acknowledged manually at the HMI.
Direct Commands

Res Lockout Reset Lockout Inactive, Inactive [Operation
Active /Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the BF Module

Mode Mode Use Use [Device Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the BF Module

and if the state of the assigned signal is /Supervision
true. /BF]
true. /BF]
Trigger Determining the trigger mode for the - . -, All Trips [Protection Para
Breaker Failure. All Trips, /Global Prot Para
Current Trips, /Supervision
ExP Fc /BF]
Trigger1 Trigger that will start the BF Trigger -.- [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
512 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Setting Group Parameters of the BF Module
In order to prevent a faulty activation of the BF Module, the pickup (alarm) time
must be greater than the sum of:
• The open time of the breaker (please refer to the technical data of the
manufacturer of the breaker);
• + The tripping delay of the device (please refer to the Technical Data
section);
• + The security margin; and
• + The operating time.

/Supervision
/BF]
parameter is only effective if a signal is /Supervision
assigned to the corresponding global /BF]
I-BF > Current level that needs to exist after Trip 0.02 – 0.10 In 0.02 In [Protection Para
Command has been given. /<1..4>
/Supervision
/BF]
t-BF If the delay time is expired, an BF alarm is 0.00 – 10.00 s 0.20 s [Protection Para
given out. /<1..4>
/Supervision
/BF]
www.eaton.com 513
IM02602007E EDR-5000
BF Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger1 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF [Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
BF Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
Lockout Signal: Lockout
Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout
Trigger Functions - All Trips

These signals will start the BF module if all trips have been selected as the trigger event.
In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent

protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be
displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51
element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional”
to “directional”.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
514 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 515
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
516 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 517
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
518 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 519
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
520 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 521
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
522 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 523
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
524 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Trigger Functions - Current Trips

These signals will start the BF module if current trips have been selected as the trigger event.
In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent

protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be
displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51
element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional”
to “directional”.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Trigger Functions - External Trips

These trips will start the BF module if external trips have been selected as the trigger event.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
www.eaton.com 525
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Commissioning: Breaker Failure Protection
The time that is configured for the BF MUST NOT be below the sum of breaker
control time + security margin + operation time of the protective device,
otherwise an unwanted operation of the BF is caused by any protective trip.
Object to Be Tested:
• Test of the breaker failure protection.
Necessary Means:
• Current source;
• Current meter; and
• Timer.
When testing, the applied test current must always be higher than the tripping
threshold »I-BF«. If the test current falls below the threshold while the the delay
timer is running, no pickup will be generated.
Procedure (Single-Phase):
For testing the tripping time of the BF protection, a test current has to be higher than the threshold value of one
of the current protection modules that are assigned to trigger the BF protection. The BF trip delay can be
measured from the time when one of the triggering inputs becomes active to the time when the BF protection trip
is asserted.
To avoid wiring errors, checked to make sure the breaker in the upstream system switches off.
The time, measured by the timer, should be in line with the specified tolerances.
Re-connect the control cable to the breaker!
Successful Test Result:
The actual times measured comply with the setpoint times. The breaker in the higher-level section switches off.
CTS – Current Transformer Supervision

CTS
Most functions of metering, protection, and control in the relay rely on correct current measurements. It is
important to make sure the CT connections and their operations are correct. The failures (including CT
secondary wire broken, insulation broken down, broken wiring between CT and relay, and mismatched
polarities) will cause the incorrect current measurements. The other CT errors (due to the magnetizing current
that is proportional to the primary current, CT saturation, and measuring circuit and quantization error) can also
cause inaccurate current measurements.
The CTS utilizes the Kirchhoff’s current law to detect a CT failure and can differentiate the wiring errors from the
measurement errors by adding biases to offset the measurement related errors. The biases include two terms,
one of which is related to the static error that accounts for CT magnetizing characteristic differences and current
measurement circuit calibration errors and other is the dynamic error that is proportional to the measured
526 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
maximum current due to CT transformation characteristics. The CTs are assumed to be used in the wye-
grounded winding sides. Under normal conditions, the mismatch between the calculated and the measured zero
sequence current should be less than the bias value. However, if there is a CT wiring error, such relationship
will not hold true. If the mismatch exceeds the bias for a specified time, an alarm will be generated.
The operating principle can be expressed in terms of CT secondary currents as follow:
IL1IL2IL3KI∗IG=3∗I 0KI∗  IG∆IKd∗Imax
KI is the ratio of the ground CT ratio over the phase CT ratio, and it is automatically calculated from the rated
system parameters.
∆I = The static error, a minimum mismatch allowed between the calculated and measured zero
sequence current.
Kd = The dynamic error factor, a restrain slope that defines a percentage error generated by a
high current.
Imax = maximum phase current.
Total bias value = ∆I + Kd x Imax.
The current transformer supervision operation can be graphically represented as follows.
Limit Value
Kd*Imax
Imax
If the current is measured in two phases only (for example only IA/IB) or if there is
no separate ground current measuring (e.g.: normally via a zero sequence CT),
the supervision function should be deactivated.
www.eaton.com 527
528
IM02602007E
CTS
Please Refer to Diagram:

Blockings
2 (Element is not deactivated and no active blocking
EDR-5000
signals)
IA
www.eaton.com
IB IX
Calculated CTS.
IC ΔI
Kd CTS. t
+ t CTS.Pickup
AND
0 40
Σ Phase or Ground Current Transformer Failure
IX
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

Mode Mode Do not use, Do not use [Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision

true. /CTS]
true. /CTS]
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision

/Supervision
/CTS]
assigned to the corresponding global /CTS]
ΔI In order to prevent faulty tripping of phase 0.10 – 1.00 In 0.50 In [Protection Para
selective protection functions that use the /<1..4>
current as tripping criterion. If the difference /Supervision
of the measured ground current and the /CTS]
calculated value I0 is higher than the pick
up value ΔI, an pickup event is generated
after expiring of the excitation time. In such
a case, a fuse failure, a broken wire or a
faulty measuring circuit can be assumed.
Pickup delay Pickup delay 0.1 – 9999.0 s 1.0 s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Supervision
/CTS]
Kd Dynamic correction factor for the evaluation 0.00 - 0.99 0.00 [Protection Para
of the difference between calculated and /<1..4>
measured ground current. This correction /Supervision
factor allows transformer faults, caused by /CTS]
higher currents, to be compensated.
www.eaton.com 529
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Current Transformer Supervision Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision
Preconditions:
1. Measurement of all three-phase currents (are applied to the measuring
inputs of the device).
2. The ground current is detected via a zero sequence transformer (not in
residual connection).
• Check of the CT Supervision (by comparing the calculated with the measured ground current).
Necessary Means:
• Three-phase current source.
Procedure, Part 1:
• Set the limiting value of the CTs to »delta I=0.1*In«.

• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
• Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs (the symmetrical feeding at the
secondary side has to be maintained).
• Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
Successful Test Result, Part 1:
The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
530 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Procedure, Part 2:
• Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
• Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the ground
current measuring input.
• Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring

TCM
The trip circuit monitoring is used for monitoring if the trip circuit is ready for opening operations. The monitoring
can be fulfilled by two ways. The first assumes only 52a is used in the trip circuit. The second assumes that, in
addition to 52a, 52b is also used for the circuit monitoring. Two options either 52a only (or breaker closed) or
both (52a and 52b) are provided for the User to select based on use of the breaker status in the trip circuit. With
52a only in the trip circuit, the monitoring is only effective when the breaker is closed while if both 52a and 52b
are used, the trip circuit will be monitored all time as long as the control power is on.
The trip circuit continuity is monitored through the digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the breaker status 52a or 52b
or both must be monitored through the other digital inputs. Note that the digital inputs used for this purpose must
be configured properly based on the trip circuit control voltage and also that the de-bouncing times must be set
to minimum. If the trip circuit is detected broken, an alarm will be issued with a specified delay, which must be
greater than a period from the time when a trip contact is closed to the time when the breaker status is clearly
recognized by the relay.
Slot 1 has two digital inputs, each of which has a separate root (contact
separation) for the trip circuit supervision.
In this case, the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply
voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly.
In order to identify a conductor failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil, the off-coil has to be
looped-in to the supervision circuit.
The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module.
www.eaton.com 531
IM02602007E EDR-5000
One Breaker Application Examples

Trip Circuit Monitoring for one Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a and 52b) in trip circuit.
Relay Control Voltage

V+
V- Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage
- DC
X1
1 PE TC
2 V+
3 V-
52a 52b
4
COM1 5 Trip
DI1 6
+DC
COM2 7
DI2 8
9
10
11
12
W1-52a
13
W1-52b
14
15
16
17
18
52a and 52b in Trip Circuit
DI-Threshold
X1
6 AND
5
t-TC M
TCM.Pickup
t
OR
0
DI-Threshold
X1
8 AND
7
532 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Trip Circuit Monitoring for One Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a Only) in Trip Circuit.
Relay Control Voltage

V+
V- Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage
- DC
X1
1 PE TC
2 V+
3 V-
52a 52b
4
COM1 5 Trip
DI1 6
+DC
7
8
9
10
11
12
W1-52a
13
W1-52b
14
15
16
17
18 52a only in Trip Circuit
DI-Threshold
X1
6 t-TCM
TCM.Pickup
5 AND
t
Bkr.Pos CLOSE
Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module

Mode Select if trip circuit is going to be monitored Closed, Closed [Protection Para
when the breaker is closed or when the Either /Global Prot Para
breaker is either open or close. /Supervision
/TCM]
Input 1 Select the input configured to monitor the 1..n, Dig Inputs DI-8P X1.DI 1 [Protection Para
trip coil when the breaker is closed. /Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
www.eaton.com 533
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Input 2 Select the input configured to monitor the 1..n, Dig Inputs -.- [Protection Para
trip coil when the breaker is open. Only /Global Prot Para
available if Mode set to “Either”. /Supervision
/TCM]
Only available if: Mode = Either
true. /TCM]
true. /TCM]
Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module

/Supervision
/TCM]
assigned to the corresponding global /TCM]
t-TCM Tripping delay time of the Trip Circuit 0.10 – 10.00 s 0.2 s [Protection Para
Supervision /<1..4>
/Supervision
/TCM]
Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Input States

CinBkr-52a-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Protection Para
Bkr (52a) /Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Protection Para
Bkr. (52b) /Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
534 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
Commissioning: Trip Circuit Monitoring for Breakers
For breakers that trip by means of little energy (e.g.: via an optocoupler), it has to
be ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not cause false
tripping of the breaker.
• Test of the trip circuit monitoring (with 52a and 52b contact).
Procedure, Part 1:
• Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits.

After expiration of »t-TCM« the trip circuit supervision, TCM of the device should signal an alarm.
Procedure, Part 2:
Simulate a broken cable in the breaker control circuit.

After expiration of »t-TCM«, the trip circuit supervision TCM of the device should signal an alarm.
LOP – Loss of Potential

Available elements:
LOP
LOP function detects the loss of voltage in any of the voltage input measuring circuits and uses the following
measured values and information to detect an LOP condition:
• Three-phase voltages;
• Ratio of negative-to-positive sequence voltages;
www.eaton.com 535
IM02602007E EDR-5000
• Zero sequence voltage;
• Three-phase currents;
• Residual current (I0);
• Pickup flags from all overcurrent elements; and
• Breaker status
Once an LOP condition is detected and it lasts longer than an adjustable minimum pickup time, the LOP Pickup
will be set. The LOP Block will only be set if the LOP-Block control setting is set to enabled (activated). The
LOP Pickup and LOP Block signals can both be used as logical signal to block the protective functions which
use the voltage information such as voltage restraint. The minimum pickup timer is used to prevent short time
incorrect operation of the LOP function during breaker switching-on operation.
536 www.eaton.com
LOP Name = LOP

LOP Blo Enable
V < 0.01xVn
Inactive
VA/VAB
Active
VB/VBC OR
VC/VCA
LOP.Pickup
%(V2/V1) > 40%
%(V2/V1)
0.0 9999 s 50 ms 100 ms LOP.LOP Blo
OR AND 38a
t-Pickup t-Min Hold 0
V0 < 0.01xVn AND 1
0 Time t-ResetDelay
Calculated
V0
Phase Voltage Transformer Failure
EDR-5000
I < 2 x In
IA
IB
www.eaton.com
AND
IC
3*I0 < 0.1 x In
Calculated
3*I0
IOC = Instantaneous Overcurrent
No IOC Pickup
No pickup of 50P[x] element
Bkr state = closed

From Breaker Module
IM02602007E
537
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the LOP Module

Use
Global Protection Parameters of the LOP Module

true. /LOP]
true. /LOP]
Setting Group Parameters of the LOP Module

/Supervision
/LOP]
assigned to the corresponding global /LOP]
LOP Blo Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow) Inactive, Inactive [Protection Para
Enable blocking by the module LOP. Active /<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]
t-Pickup Pickup Delay 0 – 9999.0 s 0.1 s [Protection Para
/<1..4>
/Supervision
/LOP]
LOP Module Input States

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
538 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
LOP Module Signals (Output States)
Name Description
Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements
Commissioning: Loss of Potential

Testing the LOP.
Necessary means:
• Three-phase current source and
• Three-phase voltage source.
Procedure part 1:
Examine if the output signals »LOP BLO « (200ms delay) and »LOP« only become true if:
• Any of the three-phase voltages becomes less 0.01*Vn Volt

and
• The residual voltage is less than 0.01*Vn Volt or the %V2/V1 ratio is greater 40%
and
• All three-phase currents are less than 2 * Ipu (rated current)
and
• The residual current is less than 0.1 Ipu (rated current)
and
• No pickup of an IOC element (No pickup of a 50P[x] element)
and
• The breaker is closed (Information from the Breaker module).
Successful test result part 1:
The output signals only become true if all the above mentioned conditions are fulfilled.
www.eaton.com 539
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Procedure part 2:
Assign the »LOP« or »LOP BLO« output signals to all protection element that should be blocked by LOP (e.g.:
Undervoltage Protection, Voltage Restraint...).
Test if those elements are blocked if the LOP modules issue a blocking signal.
Successful test result part 2:
All elements that should be blocked in case of LOP are blocked if the conditions (Procedure part 1) are fulfilled.
Self Supervision
The System-OK contact (SC relay, life-contact) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact
that picks up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay
(SC) remains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started (and protection is active),
the System Contact picks up and the System LED is activated accordingly.
The devices are continuously monitored and supervised by different methods during normal operation as well as
during the start-up phase.
Results of this supervision may be:
• Messages appearing within the event recorder;

• Indications within the display or PowerPort-E;
• Corrective measures;
• Restart of the device; or
• Any combination of the above results.
In case of failures that cannot be corrected immediately, 3 restarts within 20 minutes are accepted before the
device will be deactivated. In such a case, the device should be removed for service to ensure continuous
correct operation. The Eaton Customer Service contact information and address can be found at the front of this
manual.
In case of any failures, the recorders of the device should be left untouched to ensure an easy diagnosis and
proper repair at the factory. Besides the records and visible indications to the customer, there is internal
information about failures. These allow Eaton service personnel at the repair facility to make a detailed analysis
of files with failure reports.
Self supervision is applied by different functions at different cyclic or non-cyclic timings to the following parts and
functions of the device:
• Faultless cyclic execution of the software;

• Functional capability of memory boards;
• Consistency of data;
• Functional capability of hardware sub-assemblies; and
• Faultless operation of the measuring unit.
Faultless cyclic operation of the software is supervised by timing analysis and checking results of different
functions. Errors of the software (watchdog function) lead to restarting the device and switching off the System-
OK contact (life contact). In addition, the “System-OK” LED will blink red after 3 unsuccessful attempts to restart
the device within a time period of 20 minutes.
The main processor cyclically monitors the operation of the signal processor and initiates corrective actions or
restart of the device in case of faulty operation. Data and files are generally secured against unintended
overwriting or faulty changes by check-sums.
540 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
The measuring unit continuously checks the measured data by comparing received data with data from a
second channel sampled in parallel.
The auxiliary voltage is monitored continuously. If the voltage of one of the different supply circuits falls below a
certain threshold, a restart of the device is initiated. If the voltage staggers around the threshold, the device also
starts again after several seconds. Additionally the level of all internal supply voltage groups are continuously
monitored.
Independent of these separate monitoring functions, the intermediate voltage circuit is buffered until all important
and relevant operational and fault-data have been saved and the device initiates a restart.
Error Messages / Codes

After a reboot of the device, the reason for rebooting will be displayed under [Operation/Status
Display/Sys/Reboot]. For more information about the reboot reason, please refer to the information in this
section.
The reboot will also be logged within the event recorder. Rebooting causes an event named “Sys.Reboot”.
Numeric Reboot Codes
Error Messages/Codes
1. Reboot after clean switching off of the device - Normal reboot after clean shut-down of the
device.
2. Reboot by User command - User-initiated reboot through panel command.
3. Super reset - Reset to factory settings.
4. Restart by debugger - Eaton internally for system-analysis purposes.
5. Restart because of configuration changes.
6. General failure - Reboot without definite reason.
7. Reboot by “SW-system abort” (HOST-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by the
software (i.e.: wrong pointer, corrupted files, etc.).
8. Reboot by watchdog timeout (HOST-side) - Signaling if the protection-class-task hangs.
9. Reboot by system abort (DSP-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by software
(i.e.: wrong pointer, DSP-side).
10. Reboot by watchdog timeout (DSP-side) - Appears when DSP sequence needs too long for one
cycle.
11. Loss of auxiliary voltage or low voltage reboot after loss of auxiliary voltage or voltage dropping
below reboot level but not becoming zero.
12. Faulty memory access - Message of MMU (memory mapping unit) that prohibited memory
access has occurred.
www.eaton.com 541
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Programmable Logic
Available Elements (Equations):
Logic
General Description
The protective device includes programmable logic equations for programming inputs, outputs, blocking of
protective functions, and custom logic functions in the relay.
The logic provides control of the relay output contacts based on the state of the inputs that can be chosen from
the assignment list (protective function pickups, protective function states, breaker states, system alarms, and
module inputs). The User can use the output signals of a logic equation as inputs in higher equations (e.g.: the
output signal of logic equation 10 might be used as an input of logic equation 11).
Principle Overview.
Type of logic gate selectable Gate Out
IN1 Inverting settable Timer Out
Delay Timer
IN2 Inverting settable AND
OR Set Out
t-On Delay Inverting settable Q
S
NAND
IN3 Inverting settable NOR t-Off Delay

Reset Out inverted
R Q
IN4 Inverting settable
Reset Latched Inverting settable
If no signal is assigned to a logic gate (All inputs are "0"), then the output of the gate will be set as follows:
• "0" for an AND gate

• "1" for a NAND gate
• "0" for an OR gate
• "1" for a NOR gate
If at least one input signal is assigned to a gate all not assigned inputs are set to:
• "1" for AND / NAND gates

• "0" for an OR / NOR gates
542 www.eaton.com
LE[1]...[n]
LE[x].IN1

Gate Out
XOR
Inverting1
Active Gate
Timer Out
Inactive
AND
LE[x].IN2
OR
XOR NAND
Inverting2
Detailed Overview – Overall Logic Diagram.
Active
NOR
Inactive Delay Timer
LE[x].IN3 φ

t-On Delay
EDR-5000
AND
XOR OR Out
Inverting3
NAND t-Off Delay XOR S Q
Active NOR Out inverted
Inactive R Q
www.eaton.com
LE[x].IN4
Inverting Set
XOR
Inverting4
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
LE[x].Reset Latched
XOR
Inverting Reset
Active
Inactive
IM02602007E
543
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Available Gates (Operators)

Within the Logic Equation, the following Gates can be used.
Gate
AND AND OR OR
AND NAND OR NOR
Input Signals
The User can assign up to four Input signals (from the assignment list) to the inputs of the gate.
As an option, each of the four input signals can be inverted (negated).
Timer Gate (On Delay and Off Delay)

The output of the gate can be delayed. The User has the option to set an On and an Off delay.
Latching
The timer issues two signals: an unlatched and a latched signal. The latched output can optionally be inverted.
In order to reset the latched signal, the User has to assign a reset signal from the assignment list. Optionally,
the reset signal can also be inverted.
If no »Reset Latched« signal is assigned, then the »LATCH OUT «signal will be identical with the »TIMER OUT «
signal.
Cascading Logical Outputs

The device will evaluate output states of the logic equations starting from “Logic Equation 1” up to the logic
equation with the highest number. This evaluation cycle will be continuously repeated.
Cascading Logic Equations in an ascending sequence.
Cascading in an ascending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n” as
input of “Logic Equation n+1”. If the state of “Logic Equation n” changes, the state of the output of “Logic
Equation n+1” will be updated within the same cycle.
Cascading Logic Equations in a descending sequence.
Cascading in a descending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n+1” as
input of “Logic Equation n”. If the output of “Logic Equation n+1” changes, this change of the feed back signal at
the input of “Logic Equation n” will be delayed for one cycle.
544 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Cascading in Ascending Order

LE1.IN1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycle

LE1.IN2
Output of Logic Equation 1

Logic Equation1
LE1.IN3
LE2.IN2
LE1.IN4
Logic Equation2
LE2.IN3
LE2.IN4
LE1.IN1
U pdate within the sam e evaluation cycle

LE1.IN2

Logic Equation1
LE1.IN3
LE2.IN2
LE1.IN4
Logic Equation2
LE2.IN3
LE3.IN2
LE2.IN4
Logic Equation3
LE3.IN3
LE3.IN4
Cascading in Descending Order
LE2.IN1
U pdate within the same evaluation cycle
U pdate within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay)

LE2.IN2

Logic Equation2
LE2.IN3
LE1.IN2
LE2.IN4
Logic Equation1
LE1.IN3
LE1.IN4
LE3.IN1
U pdate within the same evaluation cycle

LE3.IN2
Update within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay )

Logic Equation3
LE3.IN3
LE2.IN2 U pdate within the next but one evaluation cycle (2 cycles
delay)
LE3.IN4
Logic Equation2
LE2.IN3
LE1.IN2
LE2.IN4
Logic Equation1
LE1.IN3
LE1.IN4
www.eaton.com 545
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Programmable Logic at the Panel
WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury or

damage the electrical equipment.
Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe functionality.
How to configure a logic equation?
• Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations.
• Call up the [Logic] menu.
• Select a Logic Equation that is to be set.
• Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them).
• If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«).
• If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input.
• Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic
equation.
In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of
descending sequences (Please refer to the Cascading Logical Outputs section).
By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified.
Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E
WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury or

damage the electrical equipment.
Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe functionality.
It is recommended to configure the logic via the PowerPort-E application.
How to configure a logic equation?
• Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations.
• Call up the [Logic] menu.
• Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them).
• If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«).
• If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input.
546 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
• Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic
equation.
In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of
descending sequences (Please refer to section: Cascading Logical Outputs).
By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified.
Device Planning Parameters of the Programmable Logic

No of Number of required Logic Equations: 0, 20 [Device Planning]
Equations: 5,
10,
20,
40,
80
Selection List for Logic Input Signals
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.Active Signal: Active
Prot.Available Signal: Protection is available.
Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
Prot.IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
Prot.IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
Prot.IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
Prot.IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Prot.IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
Prot.Pickup Signal: General Pickup
Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip
Bkr.SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
cannot be detected.
Bkr.Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Bkr.Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Bkr.Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
Bkr.Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Bkr.Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feed-
www.eaton.com 547
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Bkr.Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
Bkr.Interl CLOSE Signal: One or more IL_Close inputs are active.
Bkr.Interl OPEN Signal: One or more IL_Open inputs are active.
Bkr.CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
Bkr.CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
Bkr.CES Fail TripCmd Command Execution Supervision: Command execution failed
Bkr.CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision respectively Switching Direction
Bkr.CES CLOSE d OPEN Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
Bkr.CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
Bkr.CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
Bkr.CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
Bkr.Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module
Bkr.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Bkr.Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
Bkr.Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm
Bkr.Res Bwear Sl Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
Prot module.
Bkr.OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
module.
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
Bkr.OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
50P[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup
50P[1].Trip Signal: Trip
548 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
50X[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50X[1].Trip Signal: Trip
50R[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50R[1].Trip Signal: Trip
27M[1].Trip Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com 549
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
27A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
27A[1].Trip Signal: Trip
59N[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59N[1].Trip Signal: Trip
46[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
46[1].Trip Signal: Trip
81[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].Pickup 81 Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
550 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
81[1].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequency-
change
81[1].Pickup Vector Surge Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[1].Trip Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].Trip 81 Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[1].Trip Vector Surge Signal: Trip delta phi
change
change
change
www.eaton.com 551
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
change
change
32[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Protection
PF-55D[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55D[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
552 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
PF-55A[1].Pickup Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55A[1].Trip Signal: Trip Power Factor
ZI.Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
ZI.Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
ZI.Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
ZI.IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
ZI.OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
ZI.Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
ZI.Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
ZI.Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
ZI.Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
ZI.Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
SOTF.Active Signal: Active
SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush
CLPU.Settle Time Signal: Settle Time
ExP[1].Alarm Signal: Alarm
ExP[1].Trip Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com 553
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
BF.Lockout Signal: Lockout
BF.Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
BF.Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
TCM.Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
TCM.Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
CTS.Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
LOP.Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
AR.Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
AR.Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
AR.Ready Signal: Ready to shoot
AR.Standby Signal: Standby
AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
Sync.Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
Sync.LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Voltage is below the LiveBus
threshold
Sync.LiveLine Signal: Live Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Voltage is below the
LiveLine threshold
Sync.SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
Sync.SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s
timed out.
Sync.SynchronRunTiming Signal: SynchronRunTiming
Sync.SyncOverridden Signal:Synchronism Check is overridden because one of the
Sync.VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
SysA.Alm Current Demd Signal: Alarm Current demand value
SysA.Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
SysA.Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak
SysA.Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
554 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
SysA.Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak
SysA.Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
SysA.Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
SysA.Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value
SysA.Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value
SysA.Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak
SysA.Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value
SysA.Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak
SysA.Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
SysA.Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak
Wired Inputs.52a M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed
Wired Inputs.52b M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open
Wired Inputs.TOCa M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected
Wired Inputs.43/10 M1-I State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip
Wired Inputs.52a T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed
Wired Inputs.52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open
Wired Inputs.TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected
Wired Inputs.43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip
Wired Inputs.43 M-I State of the module input: System In Manual
Wired Inputs.43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto
Wired Inputs.43 P1-I State of the module input: Preferred Source 1
Wired Inputs.Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble
www.eaton.com 555
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
RO-6 X5.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
RO-4Z X2.RO 1 Signal: Relay Output
IEC61850.VirtOut1-I Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtInp1 Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
556 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 557
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
558 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 559
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
560 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 561
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
562 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 563
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
564 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Sys.Maint Mode Comm Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm Mode
Sys.Maint Mode DI Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode
Sys.MaintMode Manually Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode
Sys.Maint Mode-I Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch
Sys.Min. 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Sys.PS 1 Signal: Parameter Set 1
Sys.PS1-I State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PSS manual Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set
Sys.PSS via Comm Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication
Sys.PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function
www.eaton.com 565
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Sys.Res AlarmCr Signal:: Res AlarmCr
Sys.Res OperationsCr Signal:: Res OperationsCr
Sys.Res TotalCr Signal:: Res TotalCr
Sys.Res TripCmdCr Signal:: Res TripCmdCr
Global Protection Parameter of the Programmable Logic

LE1.Gate Logic gate AND, AND [Logic
OR, /LE 1]
NAND,
NOR
LE1.IN1 Assignment of the Input Signal 1..n, LogicList -.- [Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting1 Inverting the input signals. Inactive, Inactive [Logic
Active /LE 1]
Only available if an input signal has been
assigned.
/LE 1]
Active /LE 1]
assigned.
/LE 1]
Active /LE 1]
assigned.
/LE 1]
Active /LE 1]
assigned.
LE1.t-On Delay Switch On Delay 0.00 – 36000.00 s 0.00 s [Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay 0.00 – 36000.00 s 0.00 s [Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Reset Reset Signal for the Latching 1..n, LogicList -.- [Logic
Latched /LE 1]
LE1.Inverting Inverting Reset Signal for the Latching Inactive, Inactive [Logic
Reset Active /LE 1]
LE1.Inverting Inverting the Setting Signal for the Latching Inactive, Inactive [Logic
Set Active /LE 1]
566 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Programmable Logic Inputs

LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of [Logic
the Input Signal /LE 1]
LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for [Logic
the Latching /LE 1]
Programmable Logic Outputs
Name Description
LE1.Gate Out Signal: Output of the logic gate
LE1.Timer Out Signal: Timer Output
LE1.Out Signal: Latched Output (Q)
LE1.Out inverted Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com 567
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Commissioning
Before starting work on an open switchboard, it is required that the switchboard is de-energized and the following
five safety regulations have been met.
Safety precautions:
• Disconnect the power supply;
• Secure against reconnection;
• Verify that the equipment is de-energized;
• Connect to ground and short-circuit all phases; and
• Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts.
The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened during

operation. The prevailing high voltages can cause severe injury or death.
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off, it is likely that there are still
hazardous voltages at the component connections.
All locally applicable national and international installation and safety regulations
for working at electrical power installations MUST always to be followed.
Prior to the initial voltage connection, the following must be guaranteed:
• Correct grounding of the device;

• That all signal circuits are tested;
• That all control circuits are tested;
• Transformer wiring is checked;
• Correct rating of the CTs;
• Correct burden of the CTs;
• That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data;
• Correct rating of the transformer protection;
• Function of the transformer fuses;
• Correct wiring of all digital inputs;
• Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage; and
• Correct wiring of the analog inputs and outputs.
The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are

dependent on the Technical Data/Tolerances.
Commissioning/Protection Test
Commissioning/protection test must be carried out by authorized and qualified

personnel. Before the device is put into operation, the related documentation
MUST be read and understood.
568 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
With any test of the protection functions, the following has to be checked:
• Is activation/tripping saved in the event recorder?

• Is tripping saved in the fault recorder?
• Is tripping saved in the waveform recorder?
• Are all signals/messages correctly generated?
• Do all generally configured blocking functions work properly?
• Do all temporarily configured (via DI) blocking functions work properly?
• To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions, these have to be
provided with the relevant pickup (alarm) and tripping functions of the
respective protection functions/elements. This MUST be tested in
practical operation.
Check of all temporary blockings (via digital inputs).
• In order to avoid malfunctions, all blockings related to tripping/non-

tripping of protection function MUST be tested. The test can be very
complex and should therefore be performed by the same personnel
who set up the protection concept.
Check all general trip blockings. All general trip blockings MUST be tested.
Prior to the initial operation of the protection device, all tripping times and values
shown in the adjustment list MUST be confirmed by a secondary test.
Any description of functions, parameters, inputs, or outputs that does not match
the device in hand can be ignored.
Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay

Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection functionality. Ensure
that there is a back-up protection. If you are not aware of the consequences of
decommissioning the device – STOP! DO NOT start.
www.eaton.com 569
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Inform SCADA before you start.
Switch-off the power supply.
Ensure that the cabinet is de-energized and that there are no voltages that could
lead to injury of personnel.
Disconnect the terminals at the rear-side of the device. DO NOT pull any cable –
pull on the plug! If it is stuck, use a screw driver.
Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to ensure
that no accidental electrical connections are caused.
Hold the device at the front-side while removing the mounting nuts.
Remove the device carefully from the cabinet.
In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced, cover/close the cut-out in

the front-door.
Close the cabinet.
570 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Service and Commissioning Support

Within the service menu, various functions support maintenance and commissioning of the device.
General
Within the [Service/General] menu, the User can initiate a reboot of the device.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can be used to reduce arc flash levels. Refer to Std.
NFPA70E.
DO NOT attempt to install or perform maintenance on equipment while it is

energized. Severe personal injury or death can result from contact with
energized equipment. Verify that no voltage is present before opening doors of
the switchboard.
If maintenance will be performed on a device, special protective clothing and

equipment MUST BE USED and all industry standard procedures MUST BE
FOLLOWED. Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury or death.
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing
time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to
more sensitive settings via the HMI/panel, Communication, or via a Digital Input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury.
The status of the Maintenance Mode (active/inactive) is stored power fail-safe.
Manual activation is only possible via the HMI/panel (not via PowerPort-E).
The Maintenance Mode can be activated:
• Manually (only at the HMI/panel);

• Via communication; or
• Via a digital input.
Changing to another mode is only possible if there is no active Activation Signal

(e.g.: if the device is in the “Via Digital Input Mode” and while the assigned Digital
Input is “true”, the User cannot switch to the “Manual Mode”).
www.eaton.com 571
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Before Use
The sensitivity settings for the Maintenance Mode have to be calculated and
programmed into the device (according to Std. NFPA70E).
They are not part of the device by default.
When the Maintenance Mode is enabled and fault current causes its operation, the fault clearing time of the
associated breaker has to be very fast. Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E.
Program those sensitivity settings either into a setting group or into Adaptive Parameters.
How to Use the Maintenance Mode

Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E. Program those sensitivity settings either into a
setting group or into Adaptive Parameters.
The Maintenance Mode offers two output signals: “Maint Mode activated” and “Maint Mode not activated”.
The »Maint Mode.ACTIVATED« signal should be used to:
• Switch to another setting group (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within this setting group);
• Activate “Adaptive Parameters” (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within these adaptive
parameters); and/or
• Block or activate dedicated functions.
Please see the Adaptive Parameters section for more details.
The »Maint Mode.NOT ACTIVATED« signal should be used to:
• Switch back to the standard setting group when Maintenance Mode should not be used.
For fast access, the Maintenance Mode can be accessed by means of the »Softkey« Maint on the start screen
(root) of the device.
572 www.eaton.com
Sys
Maint Mode Sys.MaintMode Manually
Sys.Maint Mode Comm
Sys.Maint Mode DI
Sys.MaintMode Manually
Inactive
Sys.Maint Mode Mode
Active
Inactive
AND
Activation Manually
EDR-5000
Activation via Comm
Activation via DI
www.eaton.com
Comm Cmd Sys.Maint Mode Active
AND OR Sys.Maint Mode Inactive
AND
Sys.Maint Mode Activated by

Sys.Maint Mode-I
1..n, Dig Inputs
IM02602007E
573
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Forcing the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from Relay
Output Contacts section.

The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts operate normally
after maintenance is completed. If the relay output contacts do not operate
normally, the protective device WILL NOT provide protection.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, relay output contacts can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Force RO], relay output contacts can be
set by force:
• Permanent; or
• Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Force Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the relay will operate normally. If they are set as Permanent, they will keep the “Force Position”
continuously.
There are two options available:
• Forcing a single relay »Force Rox«; and

• Forcing an entire group of relay output contacts »Force all Outs«.
Forcing an entire group takes precedence over forcing a single relay output contact!
A relay output contact WILL NOT follow a force command as long as it is

disarmed at the same time.
A relay output contact WILL follow a force command:
• If it is not disarmed; and

• If the Direct Command is applied to the relay(s).
Keep in mind, that forcing all relay output contacts (of the same assembly group)
takes precedence over the force command of a single relay output contact.
Disarming the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from the
Relay Output Contacts section.
574 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED], entire groups of relay output
contacts can be disabled. By means of this test mode, contact outputs switching actions of the relay output
contacts are prevented. If the relay output contacts are disarmed, maintenance actions can be carried out
without the risk of taking entire processes off-line.
The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance is complete. If they are not armed, the protective device WILL NOT
provide protection.
Zone Interlocking Output and the Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED] entire groups of relay output
contacts can be disarmed:
• Permanent; or
• Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Disarm Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the relay output contacts will operate normally. If they are set Permanent, they will keep the “Disarm
State” continuously.
A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as:
• A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed if it is latched (and not yet
reset).
• A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as a running t-OFF-

delay timer is not yet expired (hold time of a relay output contact).
• If the Disarm Control is not set to active.
• If the Direct Command is not applied.
A relay output contact WILL be disarmed if it is not latched and:
• If there is no running t-OFF-delay timer (hold time of a relay output

contact); and
• If the DISARM Control is set to active; and
• If the Direct Command Disarm is applied.
Forcing RTDs*
* = Availability depends on ordered device.
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from
RTD/UTRD section.
www.eaton.com 575
IM02602007E EDR-5000
The User MUST ENSURE that the RTDs operate normally after maintenance is
completed. If the RTDs do not operate normally, the protective device WILL NOT
provide protection.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, RTD temperatures can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/URTD], RTD temperatures can be set by
force:
• Permanent; or
• Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Forced Temperature” only as long as this timer runs. If the
timer expires, the RTD will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced
Temperature” continuously. This menu will show the measured values of the RTDs until the User activates the
force mode by calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown values will be
frozen as long as this mode is active. Now the User can force RTD values. As soon as the force mode is
deactivated, measured values will again be shown.
Forcing Analog Outputs*

• = Availability depends on ordered device.
•
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from Analog
Output section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the Analog Outputs operate normally after
maintenance is completed. Do not use this mode if forced Analog Outputs cause
issues in external processes.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, Analog Outputs can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Analog Outputs], Analog Outputs can be
set by force:
• Permanent; or
• Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Forced Value” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the Analog Output will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced
Value” continuously. This menu will show the current value that is assigned to the Analog Output until the User
activates the force mode by calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown
values will be frozen as long as this mode is active. Now the User can force Analog Output values. As soon as
the force mode is deactivated, measured values will again be shown.
576 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Forcing Analog Inputs*

* = Availability depends on ordered device.
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from Analog
Inputs section.
The User MUST ENSURE that the Analog Inputs operate normally after
maintenance is completed.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, Analog Inputs can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Analog Inputs], Analog Inputs can be set
by force:
• Permanent; or
• Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Forced Value” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the Analog Input will operate normally. If they are set as »Permanent«, they will keep the “Forced
Value” continuously. This menu will show the current value that is fed to the Analog Input until the User activates
the force mode by calling up the »Function«. As soon as the force mode is activated, the shown value will be
frozen as long as this mode is active. Now the User can force the Analog Input value. As soon as the force
mode is deactivated, measured value will be shown again.
Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*

Available Elements:
Sgen
* = Availability depends on ordered device. This applies especially to the availability of voltage and current. Voltage simulation is only avail-
able in voltage relays, current simulation is only available in current relays.
For commissioning support and in order to analyze failures, the protective device offers the option to simulate
measuring quantities. The simulation menu can be found within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen] menu. The simulation cycle consists of three states:
• Pre-failure;
• Failure; and
• Post-failure State (Phase).
Within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Configuration] sub-menu, the
duration of each phase can be set. In addition; the measuring quantities to be simulated can be determined
(e.g.: voltages, currents, and the corresponding angles) for each phase (and ground). The simulation will be
terminated, if a phase current exceeds 0.1 times In. A simulation can be restarted, five seconds after the current
has fallen below 0.1 times In.
Setting the device into the simulation mode means taking the protective device
out of operation for the duration of the simulation. Do not use this feature during
operation of the device if the User cannot guarantee that there is a running and
properly working backup protection.
www.eaton.com 577
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Sgen
pre Failure Simulation post
PreFault FaultSimulation PostFault
The energy counters will be stopped while the failure simulator is running.
The simulation voltages are always phase to neutral voltages, irrespectively of

the mains voltage transformers' connection method (Phase-to-phase / Wey /
Open Delta).
578 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Application Options of the Fault Simulator**:
Stop Options Cold Simulation (Option 1) Hot Simulation (Option 2)
Do not stop Simulation without tripping Simulation is authorized to trip

the breaker: the breaker:
Run complete:
Blocking protective Trips to the How To?:
Pre Failure, Failure, Post Failure. Breaker. That means verifying if Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot
the protective device generates inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode a trip without energizing the trip wave gen/Process]
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave coil of the breaker (similar to
gen/Process] Trip Cmd Mode = Trip
disarm the relay output contact).
Ex Force Post = no assignment and
Press/Call up Start Simulation. How To?:

Stop by external signal Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine
Force Post: As soon as this signal becomes true, wave gen/Process]
the Fault Simulation will be forced to switch into the Trip Cmd Mode = No Trip
Post Failure mode.
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave
gen/Process]
Ex Force Post = Assigned Signal
Manual stop
As soon as this signal becomes true, the Fault

Simulation will be terminated and the device
changes back to normal operation.
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave
gen/Process]
Press/Call up Stop Simulation.
**Please note: Due to internal dependencies, the frequency of the simulation module is 0.16% greater than the rated one.
Device Planning Parameters of the Failure Simulator

Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Failure Simulator

PreFault Pre Fault Duration 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.0 s [Service
/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
www.eaton.com 579
IM02602007E EDR-5000

FaultSimulation Duration of Fault Simulation 0.00 – 10800.00 s 0.0 s [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
PostFault PostFault 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.0 s [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/Times]
TripCmd Mode Trip Command Mode No TripCmd, No TripCmd [Service
With TripCmd /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
Ex Start External Start of Fault Simulation (Using the 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Service
Simulation test parameters) /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
ExBlo External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List Bkr.Pos CLOSE [Service
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
and if the state of the assigned signal is /WARNING! Cont?
true. /Sgen
/Process]
Ex ForcePost Force Post state. Abort simulation. 1..n, Assignment List -.- [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
Voltage Parameter of the Failure Simulator

VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
State: Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
State: Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
580 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
State: Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.0 Vn [Service
State: VX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 240° [Service
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
Angle VC Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 120° [Service
Fund. Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Fund. Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase: VX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/VT]
VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
www.eaton.com 581
IM02602007E EDR-5000

VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.5 Vn [Service
State: Phase VX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
A /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
B /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Fund. Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
C /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
Fund. Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase: VX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/VT]
582 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

VA Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
Post phase: Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
VB Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
Post phase: Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
VC Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 1.0 Vn [Service
Post phase: Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
VX Fund. Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 2.00 Vn 0.0 Vn [Service
Post phase: Phase VX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Fund. Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
C /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
www.eaton.com 583
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Fund. Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
VX /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/VT]
Current Parameter of the Failure Simulator

IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service
State: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 240° [Service
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
584 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 120° [Service
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360° 0° [Service
Fund. Current Phasor during Pre Phase: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PreFault
/CT]
IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service
State: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
www.eaton.com 585
IM02602007E EDR-5000

Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
C /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
Fund. Current Phasor during Fault Phase: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/FaultSimulation
/CT]
IA Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
Post phase: Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
IB Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
Post phase: Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
IC Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 40.00 In 0.0 In [Service
Post phase: Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during 0.00 – 25.00 In 0.0 In [Service
Post phase: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
586 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase A /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase B /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase C /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
Fund. Current Phasor during Post phase: IX /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Configuration
/PostFault
/CT]
States of the Inputs of the Failure Simulator

Ex Start Simulation-I State of the module input:External Start of [Service
Fault Simulation (Using the test /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
parameters) /WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
ExBlo Module Input State: External Blocking [Service
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
Ex ForcePost-I State of the module input:Force Post state. [Service
Abort simulation. /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
www.eaton.com 587
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Signals of the Failure Simulator (States of the Outputs)
Name Description
Running Signal: Measuring value simulation is running
State Signal: Wave generation states: 0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault,
2=Fault, 3=Post, 4=InitReset
Direct Commands of the Failure Simulator

Start Start Fault Simulation (Using the test Inactive, Inactive [Service
Simulation parameters) Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
Stop Simulation Stop Fault Simulation (Using the test Inactive, Inactive [Service
parameters) Active /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sgen
/Process]
Failure Simulator Values

State Wave generation states: L1 L2 L3 Normal L1 L2 L3 Normal, [Service
0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault, 2=Fault, t-PreFault, /Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
3=Post, 4=InitReset t-FaultSimulation, /WARNING! Cont?
t-PostFault, /Sgen
Init Res /State]
588 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Technical Data
Use Copper conductors only, 75°C (167°F).
Conductor size AWG 14 [2.5 mm].
Climatic Environmental Conditions

Storage Temperature: -30°C to +70°C (-22°F to 158°F)
Operating Temperature: -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
Permissible Humidity at Ann. Average: <75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Permissible Installation Altitude: <2,000 m (6,561.67 ft) above sea level
If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed
classification of the operating and test voltages may be
necessary.
Degree of Protection EN 60529

HMI Front Panel with Seal: IP54
Rear Side Terminals: IP20
Routine Test
Insulation Test Acc. to IEC60255-5: All tests to be carried out against ground and other input and output circuits.
Aux. Voltage Supply, Digital Inputs, 2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
Current Measuring Inputs, Signal Relay Outputs:
Voltage Measuring Inputs: 3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
All Wire-Bound Communication Interfaces: 1.5 kV DC
Housing
Housing B2: Height / Width 183 mm (7.205 in.)/ 212.7 mm (8.374 in.)
Housing Depth (Incl. Terminals): 208 mm (8.189 in.)
Material, Housing: Aluminum extruded section
Material, Front Panel: Aluminum/Foil front
Mounting Position: Horizontal (±45° around the X-axis must be permitted)
Weight: Approx. 4.2 kg (9.259 lb)
Current and Ground Current Measurement

Plug-in Connector with Integrated Short-Circuiter
(Conventional Current Inputs)
Phase and Ground

Current Inputs:
Nominal Currents: 1A/5A

Max. Measuring Range: Up to 40 x In (phase currents)
Up to 25 x In (ground current standard)
www.eaton.com 589
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Phase and Ground

Current Inputs:
Capacity: 4 x In/continuously
Overcurrent Proof: 30 x In / 10 s
100 x In / 1 s
250 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave)
Power Consumption: Phase current inputs

At In = 1 A S = 25 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 120 mVA
Ground current input

At In = 1 A S = 25 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 120 mVA
Sensitive Ground Current

Inputs:
Nominal Currents: 1 A / 5 A with 50:0.025 core balance CT

Max. Measuring Range: Up to 2.5 x In
Capacity: 2 x In/continuously
Overcurrent Proof: 10 x In / 10 s
25 x In / 1 s
100 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave)
Power Consumption: At In = 1 A S = 170 mVA
At In = 0.1 A S = 1,7 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 540 mVA
At In = 0.5 A S = 5,4 mVA
Frequency Range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10%
Terminals: Screw-type terminals with integrated short-circuiters (contacts)
Screws M4, captive type acc. to VDEW
Connection Cross Sections: 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x AWG 14) with wire end ferrule
1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x AWG 12) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG 10) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
The current measuring board´s terminal blocks may be used as with 2

(double) conductors AWG 10,12,14 otherwise with single conductors only.
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement

Nominal Voltages: 60 - 520 V (can be configured)
Max. Measuring Range: 2 x nominal voltage or 800 V
Continuous Loading Capacity: 800 Vac
Power Consumption: at Vn = 100 V S = 22 mVA

at Vn = 110 V S = 25 mVA
at Vn = 230 V S = 110 mVA
at Vn = 400 V S = 330 mVA
Frequency Range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
590 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Nominal Voltages: 60 - 520 V (can be configured)
Terminals: Screw-type terminals
Frequency Measurement
Nominal Frequencies: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Voltage Supply
Aux. Voltage:
24 - 270 Vdc / 48 - 230 Vac (-20/+10%) ≂
Buffer Time in Case of Supply Failure: >= 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage
Interrupted communication is permitted.
Max. Permissible Making Current: 18 A peak value for <0.25 ms
12 A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:

• 2,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx. 0.2 x 0.8 in.) according to IEC 60127
• 3,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6,3 x 32 mm (approx. 0.25 x 1.25 in.) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption
Power Supply Range: Power consumption Max. Power Consumption
in Idle Mode
24 - 270 Vdc: Approx. 8 W Approx.13 W
48 - 230 Vac Approx. 8 W / 16 VA Approx.13 W / 21 VA
(For Frequencies of 50-60 Hz):
Display
Small Display Type: LCD with LED background illumination
Resolution - Graphics Display: 128 x 64 pixel
Large Display Type (Option): LCD with LED background illumination

Resolution - Graphics Display: 128 x 128 pixel
LED - Type: Two colored: red / green

Number of LEDs, Housing B2: 15
Front Interface RS232

Baud Rates: 115,200 Baud
Handshake: RTS and CTS
Connection: 9-pole D-Sub plug
Real Time Clock

Running Reserve of the Real Time 1 year min.
Clock:
www.eaton.com 591
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Digital Inputs
Max. Input Voltage: 300 Vdc / 259 Vac
Input Current: DC <4 mA

AC <16 mA
Reaction Time: <20 ms
Drop-out Time:
Shorted inputs <30 ms
Open inputs <90 ms
Open inputs Shorted inputs

L+ L+
L- L-
DI1 DI2 DI8 COM DI1 DI2 DI8 COM
(Safe State of the Digital Inputs)
Switching Thresholds: Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc,

110 Vac / dc, 230 Vac / dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Switching Threshold 1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
Switching Threshold 1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc
Un = 48 V / 60Vdc
Switching Threshold 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc
Switching Threshold 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc
Un = 110 / 120 Vac / dc
Switching Threshold 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc / 88.0 Vac
Switching Threshold 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc / 44.0 Vac
Un = 230 / 240 Vac / dc
Switching Threshold 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc / 184 Vac
Switching Threshold 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc / 92 Vac
Terminals: Screw-type terminal
Relay Outputs
Continuous Current: 5 A ac / dc
Max. Make Current: 25 A ac / 25 A dc for 4 s
30 A / 230Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
30 A / 250Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
592 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Max. Breaking Current: 5 A ac up to 240 Vac
5 A dc up to 30 V (resistive)
0.3 A dc at 250 V (resistive)
Max. Switching Voltage: 250 Vac / 250 Vdc
Switching Capacity: 1,250 VA
Contact Type: Form C or normally open contact
Supervision Contact (SC)

Max. Switch-on Current: 15 A ac / 15 A dc for 4 s
Max. Breaking Current: 5 A ac up to 250 Vac
5 A dc up to 30 Vdc (resistive)
0,25 A at 250 Vdc (resistive)
Max. Switching Voltage: 250 Vac / 250 Vdc
Switching Capacity: 1,250 VA
Contact Type: Form C
Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X

Nominal input voltage: 5V
Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
Zone Interlocking
Only for Zone Interlock Tripping Outputs (Zone Interlock, semiconductor output):
5 Vdc, <2mA for connection to electronic inputs only.
Zone Out:
Output voltage (High) 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
Output voltage (Low) 0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone In:
Nominal input voltage +5 Vdc
Max. input voltage +5.5 Vdc
Switching threshold ON min. 4.0 Vdc
Switching threshold OFF max. 1.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation 2.5 kV ac (to ground and other IO)

Connection: Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
RS485*
Master/Slave: Slave
Connection: 6 screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
The RS485 interface is realized via terminals. The communication cable has to be
shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the screw that is marked with the
ground symbol (rear side of the device).
www.eaton.com 593
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Fiber Optic*
Master/Slave: Slave
Connection: ST-Plug
*availability depends on device
URTD-Interface*
Connection: Versatile Link
*availability depends on device
Boot Phase
After switching on the power supply, the protection will be available in approximately 16 seconds. After
approximately 97 seconds, the boot phase is completed (HMI and Communication initialized).
594 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Standards
Approvals
• UL-listed file: E217753
Design Standards
Generic Standard EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-3
Product Standard IEC 60255-6
EN 50178
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment)
ANSI C37.90
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)

High Frequency Interference Test
IEC 60255-22-1 Within one circuit 1 kV/2 s
Class 3
Circuit to ground 2.5 kV/2 s
Circuit to circuit 2.5 kV/2 s
Insulation Voltage Test

IEC 60255-5 All circuits to other circuits and 2.5 kV (eff.)/50Hz, 1 min.
EN 50178 exposed conductive parts
Except interfaces 1.5 kV DC, 1 min.
Voltage measuring input 3 kV (eff.)/50 Hz, 1 min.
Impulse Voltage Test

IEC 60255-5 5 kV/0.5J, 1.2/50 µs
EMC Immunity Tests
Fast Transient Disturbance Immunity Test (Burst)

IEC 60255-22-4 Power supply, mains inputs ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
IEC 61000-4-4
Class 4
Other in- and outputs ±2 kV, 5 kHz (coupling network)
ANSI C37.90.1
±4 kV, 2.5 kHz (coupling clamp)
Surge Immunity Test

IEC 61000-4-5 Within one circuit 2 kV
Class 4
Circuit to ground 4 kV
Class 3 Communication cables to ground 2 kV
www.eaton.com 595
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Electrical Discharge Immunity Test

IEC 60255-22-2 Air discharge 8 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
Class 3
Contact discharge 6 kV
Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test

IEC 61000-4-3 26 MHz – 80 MHz 10 V/m
ANSI C37.90.2 80 MHz – 1 GHz 35 V/m
1 GHz – 3 GHz 10 V/m
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
Class 3
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test

IEC 61000-4-8 Continuous 30 A/m
Class 4
3 sec 300 A/m
EMC Emission Tests
Radio Interference Suppression Test

IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B
Radio Interference Radiation Test

IEC/CISPR11 Limit value class B
Environmental Tests
Classification:
IEC 60068-1 Climatic 20/060/56
Classification
IEC 60721-3-1 Classification of ambient conditions 1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2

(Storage) but min. -30°C (-22°F)
IEC 60721-3-2 Classification of ambient conditions 2K4/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2
(Transportation) but min. -30°C (-22°F)
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of ambient conditions 3K6/3B1/3C1/3S1/3M2
(Stationary use at weather protected but min. -20°C (-4°F) /max 60°C
locations) (140°F)
Test Ad: Cold

IEC 60068-2-1 Temperature -20°C (-4°F)
Test duration 16 h
Test Bd: Dry Heat

IEC 60068-2-2 Temperature 60°C (140°F)
Relative humidity <50%
Test duration 72 h
Test Cab: Damp Heat (Steady State)

Relative humidity 93%
596 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Test duration 12 h
Test Db: Damp Heat (Cyclic)

Relative humidity 95%
Cycles (12 + 12-hour) 2
Mechanical Tests
Test Fc: Vibration Response Test
IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 59 Hz) 0.0014 in. (0.035 mm)
IEC 60255-21-1 Displacement
Class 1
(59Hz – 150Hz) 0.5 gn
Acceleration
Number of cycles in each axis 1
Test Fc: Vibration Endurance Test

IEC 60068-2-6 (10 Hz – 150 Hz) 1.0 gn
IEC 60255-21-1 Acceleration
Class 1
Number of cycles in each axis 20
Test Ea: Shock Test

IEC 60068-2-27 Shock response test 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
IEC 60255-21-2 direction
Class 1
Shock resistance test 15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
direction
Test Eb: Shock Endurance Test

IEC 60068-2-29 Shock endurance test 10 gn, 16 ms, 1,000 impulses in
IEC 60255-21-2 each direction
Class 1
Test Fe: Earthquake Test

IEC 60068-3-3 Single axis earthquake vibration test 3 – 7 Hz: Horizontal 0.394 in. (10
KTA 3503 mm), 1 cycle each axis
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 2 7 – 35 Hz Horizontal: 2 gn,
1 cycle each axis
www.eaton.com 597
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Specifications
Specifications of the Real Time Clock
Resolution: 1 ms
Tolerance: <1 minute / month (+20°C [68°F])
<±1ms if synchronized via IRIG-B
Time Synchronization Tolerances

The different protocols for time synchronization vary in their accuracy:
Used Protocol Time drift over one month Deviation to time generator
Without time synchronization <1 min (+20°C) Time drifts

IRIG-B Dependent on the time drift of the time <±1 ms
generator
SNTP Dependent on the time drift of the time ±1 ms
generator
Modbus TCP Dependent on the time drift of the time Dependent on the network load
generator
Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition

Phase and Ground Current Measuring
Nominal current (In): 1A or 5A (separate terminal inputs)

Max measuring range: 40 A (25 A Ground or 2.5 A Ground sensitive)
Frequency Range: 50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10%
Accuracy: Class 0.5
Amplitude Error if I < In: ±0.5% of the rated value *
Amplitude Error if I > In: ±0.5% of the measured value *
Amplitude Error if I > 2 In: ±1.0% of the measured value *
Resolution: 0.01 A (0.001 A for earth current sensitive)
* For earth current sensitive the precision does not depend on the nominal value but is
referenced to 100 mA (with In =1 A) respectively
500 mA (with In = 5 A)
Harmonics: Up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±2%

Up to 20% 5th harmonic ±2%
Frequency Influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature Influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
598 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Phase-to-Ground and Residual Voltage Measurement
Nominal voltage (Vn): 60 ... 600 V in 1 V steps

Max measuring range: 800 V
Frequency range: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Precision: Class 0,5
Amplitude error for V<Vn (measured): ±0.5% of the rated value
Amplitude error for V<Vn (calculated): ±1.0% of the rated value
Amplitude error for V>Vn (measured): ±0.5% of the measured value
Amplitude error for V>Vn (calculated): ±1.0% of the calculated value
Resolution: 0.1 V
Harmonics: up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%, up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1%
Frequency influence: <±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature influence: <±1% within the range of 0°C up to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
Frequency Measurement
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Precision: ±0.05% of fn within the range of 40-70 Hz at voltages >50 V
Voltage dependency: frequency acquisition from 0.15 x Vn
Energy Measurement*
Energy counter error for 3% of Sn

VAh < Sn * 1h
Energy counter error for 3% of measured energy
VAh > Sn * 1h:
Power Measurement*
VA, W, VAr: <±3% of the measured value or 0.1% x Sn
Power Factor Measurement*
PF: ±0.01 of measured power factor or 1°

I > 30% x In
* Tolerance at 0.8 … 1.2xVn (with Vn=100V) , |PF|>0.5, symmetrically fed.

Units are selected automatically depending on CT and VT ratings for best fit.
Sn=1.73 * VT rating * CT rating
www.eaton.com 599
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Protection Elements Accuracy

The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip. The accuracy of
the operating time relates to the time between when the measured value has
exceeded the threshold until the protection element is picked-up.
Overcurrent Protection Elements: Range Step Accuracy

50P[x] / 67P[x]
Pickup 0.02 … 20.00 x 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In.
In
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x In
t 0.00 ... 300.00 s 0.01 s DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating Time <35 ms
Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I>
Disengaging Time <45 ms
Overcurrent Protection Elements: Range Step Accuracy

51P[x] / 67P[x]
Pickup 0.02 … 4.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In.
t-Multiplier 0.02 … 2.00 0.01 ±5%
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
0.02 … 20.00 0.01 ±5%
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Thermal Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Reset Mode Calculated, ±5%
(Instantaneous, IEC NINV
IEC VINV
t-delay) IEC EINV
IEC LINV
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
600 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
I4t
t-reset (Reset Mode = t-delay) 0.00 ... 60.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Ground Current Elements: Range Step Accuracy

50X[x] / 50R[x] / 67X[x] / 67R[x]
Pickup (measured ground current) 0.02 … 4.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value, Resp. 1% x In
Pickup (calculated ground current) ±2.0% of the setting value, Resp. 1.5% x
In
t 0.00 ... 300.00 s 0.01 s DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms

Starting from IE higher than 1.1 x
IE>
Ground Current Elements: Range Step Accuracy

51X[x] / 51R[x] / 67X[x] / 67R[x]
Pickup (measured ground current) 0.02 … 4.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value, Resp. 1% x In
Pickup (calculated ground current) ±2.0% of the setting value, Resp. 1.5% x
In
Starting from IE higher than 1.1 x
IE>
t-Multiplier 0.02 … 2.00 0.01 ±5%
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
0.02 … 20.00 0.01 ±5%
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Reset Mode Calculated, ±5%
(Instantaneous, IEC NINV
IEC VINV
t-delay) IEC EINV
IEC LINV
ANSI MINV
www.eaton.com 601
IM02602007E EDR-5000
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Directional Sensitivity (calculated ground current) Value: Release Level: Blocking Level:
3V0 (calculated) 1V 0.8 V
3V0 (measured) 1V 0.8 V
I2 10 mA 5 mA
IR 18 mA 11 mA
IX 10 mA 5 mA
IX (sensitive) 1 mA 0.5 mA
V2 0.35 V 0.25 V
Directional Sensitivity (measured ground current) Value: Release Level: Blocking Level:
3V0 (calculated) 0.35 V 0.25 V
3V0 (measured) 0.35 V 0.25 V
I2 10 mA 5 mA
IX 10 mA 5 mA
IX (sensitive) 1 mA 0.5 mA
V2 0.35 V 0.25 V
Voltage restraint: Range Step Accuracy

51V[x]
Pickup 0.04 … 1.30 x Vn 0.01 x Vn ±1.5% of the
setting value
resp. 1% x In.
Current unbalance: Range Step Accuracy

46[x]
Threshold 0.01 … 4.00 x In 0.01 x In ±2% of the setting value resp.1% In
I2/I1 ≥ 0.1 x In 2 … 40 % 1.00% ±1%
t 0 … 300 s 0.01 s DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Starting from I2/I1 ≥ 1.1 x In

Undervoltage and Overvoltage Range Step Accuracy

(Phase, Auxiliary, and Neutral)
27M[x] / 59M[x]
27A[x] / 59A[x] / 59N[x]
Pickup 0.01 … 2.00 x Vn 0.01 x Vn ±1.5% of the setting value
Resp. 1% x Vn
Dropout Ratio 97% or 0.5% x Vn
t 0 … 300 s 0.01 s DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
602 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E

Starting from V higher/lower than
1.1 x V> or V<
Voltage unbalance: Range Step Accuracy

47[x]
Threshold 0.01 … 1.30 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±2% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
V2/V1 ≥ 0.1 x Vn 2 … 40 % 1.00% ±1%
t 0 … 300 s 0.01 s DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Starting from V2/V1 ≥ 1.1 x Vn

Over Frequency Protection: Range Step Accuracy

81O[x]
Threshold 40.00 … 69.95 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 mHz at fn
Dropout ratio 99.95%
or 0.05% x fn
t 0.00 … 3600.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating time 40-50Hz <60 ms
50-70Hz <50 ms
Starting from f higher than f>+0.02
Hz
Disengaging time 40-50Hz <85 ms
50-70Hz <75 ms
Under Frequency Protection: Range Step Accuracy

81U[x]
Threshold 40.00 … 69.95 Hz 0.01 Hz 10 mHz at fn
Dropout ratio ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t 0.00 … 3600.00 s 0.01 s 100.05% or 0.05% x fn
Operating time 40-50Hz <60 ms
50-70Hz <50 ms
Starting from f lower than f<-0.02
Hz
Release time 40-50Hz <85 ms
50-70Hz <75 ms
V Block f ±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x Vn
Dropout ratio 103%
or 0.5% x Vn
Rate of Change of Frequency Range Step Accuracy

df/dt
Threshold 0.01 .. 10 Hz/s 0.01 Hz/s 100 mHz per Second

t 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating time <40 ms
Disengaging time <40 ms
www.eaton.com 603
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Rate of Change of Frequency Df/Dt Range Step Accuracy
Df 0.0 … 10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 100 mHz

Dt 0.1 … 10.0 0.1 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Disengaging time <40 ms
Vector surge: Range Step Accuracy

78V
Threshold 1 … 30 degrees 1 degree ±0,5° [1-30°] at Vn and fn
Power Factor: Range Step Accuracy

PF-55D/PF-55A
Trigger-PF 0.50 … 0.99 0.01 ± 0.01 (absolute)
Reset-PF 0.50 … 0.99 0.01 ± 0.01 (absolute)
t-trip 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
T-Pickup Comp 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
T-Reset Comp 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
PQ-protection: Range Step Accuracy

32[x]/32V[x]
Threshold 0.02 … 10.00 x VAn 0.01 x VAn ±3% or ±1.5% VAn
t 0.00 … 1100.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating time 75 ms
Disengaging time 75 ms
Dropout Ratio 97% for P>/Q> and 103% for P</Q<
Auto Reclosing: Range Step Accuracy

AR
t-ManualCloseBlock 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-Lock2Ready 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-Run2Ready 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-Block2Ready 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-Brk CLOSE Cmd 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-sync_AR 0.01 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-AR Supervision 1.00 … 9999.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Sync-Check: Range Step Accuracy

Sync
Operating time Max. 300 ms
t-MaxBkrCloseDelay 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-MaxSyncSuperv 0.00 … 3000.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
MinLiveBusVoltage 0.10 … 1.30 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x
Vn
MaxDeadBusVoltage 0.01 … 1.00 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x
Vn
MinLiveLineVoltage 0.10 … 1.30 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x
Vn
MaxDeadLineVoltage 0.01 … 1.00 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x
Vn
t-VoltDead 0.000 … 300.000 s 0.001 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
MaxVoltageDiff 0.01 … 1.00 x Vn 0.01 xVn ±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x
Vn, may be exceeded when open delta is
configured
MaxSlipFrequency 0.01 … 2.00 x Hz 0.01 Hz ±20 mHz at fn
MaxAngleDiff 1 … 60 x degrees 1 degree ±2°
604 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Switch onto Fault: Range Step Accuracy

SOTF
I< 0.01 … 1.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
t-enable 0.10 … 10.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Cold Load Pickup: Range Step Accuracy

CLPU
t-Load OFF 0.00 … 7200.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
t-Max Block 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
I< 0.01 … 1.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
Threshold 0.10 … 4.00 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
Settle Time 0.00 … 300.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Breaker Failure Protection: Range Step Accuracy

50BF
I-BF> 0.00 … 0.10 x In 0.01 x In ±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
t-BF 0.00 … 10.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Resetting Ratio 0.5% x In
Starting from I Higher than 1.3 x
I-BF>
Trip Circuit Monitoring: Range Step Accuracy

TCM
t-TCM 0.10 … 10.00 s 0.01 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
Current Transformer Range Step Accuracy

Supervision
CTS
ΔI 0.10 … 1.00 x In 0.01 x In ±2% of the setting value resp. 1.5% In
Pickup delay 0.1 … 9999.0 s 0.1 s ±1% resp. ± 10 ms
Kd – Correction factor 0.00 … 0.99 0.01
Dropout Ratio 94%
Loss of Potential: Range Step Accuracy

LOP
t-Pickup 0.0 … 9999.0s 0.1 s ±1% resp. ±10 ms
www.eaton.com 605
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Appendix
The following terms, abbreviations, and acronyms are used in this manual. Please refer to this section for their
meanings / definitions.
A Ampere(s), Amp(s)
AC Alternating current
A/D Analog to digital
Ack. Acknowledge
AMP Ampere(s), Amp(s)
AND Logical gate (The output becomes true if all Input signals are true.)
ANG Angle
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Automatic reclosure
AUX Auxiliary
AVG, avg Average
AWG American wire gauge
BF Breaker failure
BFI Breaker failure initiate
BKR, bkr Breaker
Blo Blocking(s)
°C Degrees Celsius
calc Calculated
Bkr. Circuit breaker
CD Compact disk
Char Curve shape
CHK Check
CHNL Channel
Cmd. Command
CMND Command
CMN Common input
COM Common input
Comm Communication
COMP Compensated, comparison
CONN Connection
CONT Continuous, contact
CPU Central processing unit
Cr. Counter(s)
CRT, CRNT Current
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CT Control transformer
Ctrl. Control
CTS Current transformer supervision
d Day
D/A Digital to analog
D-Sub-Plug Communication interface
DC, dc Direct current
DEFT Definite time characteristic (Tripping time does not depend on the height of the current.)
DFLT Default
DGNST Diagnostics
DI Digital Input
Diagn. Diagnosis
606 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Diagn Cr Diagnosis counter(s)

DIFF Differential
DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm
DIR, dir Directional
DMD Demand
DPO Dropout
DSP Digital signal processor
dt Rate of change
EINV Extremely inverse tripping characteristic
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN Europäische Norm
err. / Err. Error
EVTcon Parameter determines if the residual voltage is measured or calculated.
Ex External
ExBlo External blocking(s)
ExP External protection
EXT Extension, external
°F Degrees Fahrenheit
F Field
Fc Function (Enable or disable functionality = allow or disallow.)
FIFO First in first out
FIFO Principal First in first out
FLA Full load current
FO Fiber optic
FTP File transfer protocol
fund Fundamental (ground wave)
FWD Forward
G, g Generator
gn Acceleration of the earth in vertical direction (9.81 m/s2)
GND Ground
GPS Global positioning system
h Hour
HARM Harmonic / harmonics
HMI Human machine interface (Front of the protective relay)
HTL Manufacturer internal product designation
HTTP Hyper text transfer protocol
Hz Hertz
I Fault current
I Current
I0 Zero current (symmetrical components), Zero sequence current
I1 Positive sequence current (symmetrical components)
I2 Negative sequence current (symmetrical components)
IA Phase A current
IAB Phase A minus B current
IB Phase B current
IBC Phase B minus C current
I-BF Tripping threshold
IC Phase C current
IC's Manufacturer internal product designation
ICA Phase C minus A current
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IED Intelligent electronic device
www.eaton.com 607
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IG Ground current (not residual)
IG Fault current
Igd Differential ground current
IGnom Nominal ground current
IH1 Fundamental harmonic (1st harmonic)
IH2 2nd harmonic
IINV Inverse
in. Inch
incl. Include, including
Info. Information
Interl. Interlocking
INV Inverse characteristic (The tripping time will be calculated depending on the height of the
current)
I/O Input / output
IOC Instantaneous overcurrent
IOV Instantaneous overvoltage
IR Calculated ground current
IRIG Input for time synchronization (Clock), Inter-range instrumentation group
ISO International Standards Organization
IT Thermal Characteristic
I2T Thermal Characteristic
I4T Thermal Characteristic
IUV Instantaneous undervoltage
IX 4th measuring input of the current measuring assembly group (either ground or neutral current)
J Joule
kA Kiloampere
kg Kilogram
kHz Kilohertz
kV Kilovolt(s)
kVdc or kVDC Kilovolt(s) direct current
L1 Phase A
L2 Phase B
L3 Phase C
l/ln Ratio of current to nominal current.
LED Light emitting diode
lb-in Pound-inch
LINV Long time inverse tripping characteristic
LV Low voltage
m Meter
M Machine
mA Milliampere(s), Milliamp(s)
MAG Magnitude
MAN, man. Manual / manually
MAX, max. Maximum
meas Measured
MIN, min. Minimum
min. Minute
MINV Moderately Inverse Tripping Characteristic
MK Manufacturer Internal Product Designation Code
mm Millimeter
MMU Memory mapping unit
MRT Minimum response time
608 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
ms Milli-second(s)
MTA Maximum torque angle
MTR Motor
MV Medium voltage
mVA Milli volt amperes (Power)
MVA Mega volt-ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA A Mega volt-ampere (phase A)
MVA B Mega volt-ampere (phase B)
MVA C Mega volt-ampere (phase C)
MVAR Mega Var (total 3-phase)
MVAR A Mega Var (phase A)
MVAR B Mega Var (phase B)
MVAR C Mega Var (phase C)
MVARH Mega Var-Hour
MW Megawatt(s) (total 3-phase)
MW A Megawatt(s) (phase A)
MW B Megawatt(s) (phase B)
MW C Megawatt(s) (phase C)
MWH Megawatt-Hour(s)
N Neutral
N/A, n/a Not applicable
N.C. Not connected
NEG Negative
NINV Normal inverse tripping characteristic
Nm Newton-meter
No Number
N.O. Normal open (Contact)
NOM, Nom. Nominal
NT Manufacturer internal product designation code
O Over
OC, O/C Overcurrent
O/P, Op, OUT Output
OV Overvoltage
OVERFREQ Over-frequency
OVLD Overload
P Phase
Para. Parameter
PC Personal computer
PCB Printed circuit board
PE Protected Earth
PF Power factor (total 3-phase)
PF A Power factor (phase A)
PF B Power factor (phase B)
PF C Power factor (phase C)
Ph Phase
POS Positive
PRESS Pressure
PRI, pri Primary
PROT, Prot Protection Module (Master Module), protection
PS1 Parameter set 1
PS2 Parameter set 2
PS3 Parameter set 3
PS4 Parameter set 4
www.eaton.com 609
IM02602007E EDR-5000
PSet Parameter set

PSS Parameter set switch (Switching from one parameter set to another)
pu Per unit
PWM Pulse width modulated
PWR Power
R Reset
rec. Record
REF Reference
rel Relative
REM Remote
res Reset
ResetFct Reset function
REV Reverse
RevData Review data
RMS Root mean square
RO Relay Output
RO1 1st Relay Output
RO2 2nd Relay Output
RO3 3rd Relay Output
Rst Reset
RTD Resistance-temperature detector
RX (Rx) Receive, receiver
s Second
S Sensitive
SAT CT saturation
SC Supervision contact
Sca SCADA
SCADA Communication module, supervisory control and data acquistion
sec Second(s)
SEC, sec Secondary
SENS Sensitive
SEQ Sequence
Sig. Signal
SNTP Simple network time protocol
SRC Source
StartFct Start function
STATS Statistics
Sum Summation
SUPERV Supervision
SW Software
SYNC Sync-check, Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK Sync-check, Synchrocheck
Sys. System
t or t. Time
t Tripping delay
T Time, transformer
Tcmd Trip command
TCP Transmission control protocol
TCP/IP Communication protocol
TEMP, temp Temperature
THD Total harmonic distortion
TI Manufacturer internal product designation code
TOC Time overcurrent
610 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
TOV Time overvoltage

TRANS Transient
TripCmd Trip command
TX (Tx) Transmit, transmitter
txt Text
UC Undercurrent
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UMZ DEFT (definite time tripping characteristic)
URTD Universal resistance-temperature detector
USB Universal serial bus
V Volts
V0 Zero sequence voltage
V1 Positive sequence voltage
V2 Negative sequence voltage
VA Phase A voltage
VAB Phase A to B voltage
Vac / Vac Volts alternating current
VAG Phase A to ground voltage
VARH Var-hour voltage
VB Phase B voltage
VBA Phase B to A voltage
VBG Phase B to ground voltage
VC Phase C voltage
VCA Phase C to A voltage
VCG Phase C to ground voltage
Vdc / V dc Volts direct current
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnik
VDEW Verband der Elektrizitätswirtschaft
VE Residual voltage
V/Hz Volts per Hertz
VINV Very inverse tripping characteristic
VT Voltage transformer
VTS Voltage transformer supervision
W Watt(s)
WDC Watch dog contact (supervision contact)
WDG Winding
WH Watthour
www World wide web
X Reactance
XCT 4th current measuring input (ground or neutral current)
XInv Inverse characteristic
Z Impedance, zone
www.eaton.com 611
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)

Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
I = Fault current
DEFT
100
I
Pickup
0.01 40
10
t [s]
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1 10
I
Pickup
612 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Time Current Curves (PHASE)

The following characteristics are available:
• Thermal Flat;
• Therm Flat IT;
• Therm Flat I4T.
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor . The setting range

depends on the selected tripping curve .
I = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded , the module/element starts to time out to trip .
www.eaton.com 613
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IEC NINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available
. Resetting via characteristic
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
0.14 0.14
t= 2 *t-multiplier [s] t= 0.02 *t-multiplier [s]
I I
(Pickup) -1 (Pickup) -1
t [s] t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
614 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
IEC VINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available . Resetting via characteristic , delayed, and
instantaneous .
Reset Trip
13.5 13.5
t= *t-multiplier [s] t= *t-multiplier [s]
I 2 I
t [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup )
www.eaton.com 615
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IEC LINV
Notice!
. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
120 120
I 2 I
(Pickup)-1 ( Pickup)-1
t [s] t-multiplier
616 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
IEC EINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
80 80
t= 2
*t-multiplier [s] t= 2
*t-multiplier [s]
I I
t [s] t-multiplier
www.eaton.com 617
IM02602007E EDR-5000
ANSI MINV
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
I
4.85
(Pickup)
2
-1
*t-multiplier [s] t=
( 0.0515
I
0.02
(Pickup) -1
+ 0.1140
) *t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
618 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
ANSI VINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
21.6
I
(Pickup
2
)-1
( I
(Pickup)
19.61
2
-1
+ 0.491
)*t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
www.eaton.com 619
IM02602007E EDR-5000
ANSI EINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
29.1
I 2
(Pickup)-1
( I
(Pickup)
28.2
2
-1
+ 0.1217
)*t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
620 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Therm Flat
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 2
5*3 5*1
t= 0
*t-multiplier[s] t= 0
*t-multiplier[s]
I I
( In ) ( In )
t = 45 *t-multiplier[s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
1.0
t [s] 10
0.5 t-multiplier
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup

)
www.eaton.com 621
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IT
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 1
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-multiplier[s] t= *t-multiplier[s]
I 1
( In ) ( I
)
In
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
TM[s]=
t [s] t-multiplier
10
10
5
2
1
1.0
0.5
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup

)
622 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
I2T
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 2
5*3 5*3
t= *t-multiplier [s] t= 2 *t-multiplier [s]
I 0
I
( In ) ( In )
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
www.eaton.com 623
IM02602007E EDR-5000
I4T
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 4
5*3 5*3
t= 0 *t-multiplier [s] t= *t-multiplier [s]
I I
4
( In ) ( In )
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
624 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated)

The following characteristics is available:
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
IG = Fault current
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible
if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
DEFT
100
IR calc
Pickup
I/I>
0.01 20
40
10
t [s]
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1 10
IR calc
Pickup
www.eaton.com 625
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)
The following characteristics is available:
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
IX = Fault current
DEFT
100
IX
Pickup
I/I>
0.01 20
40
10
t [s]
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1 10
IX
Pickup
626 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Time Current Curves (Ground Current)
The following characteristics are available:
• Thermal Flat;
• Therm Flat IT;
• Therm Flat I4T.
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor . The setting range

depends on the selected tripping curve .
IG = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded , the module/element starts to time out to trip .
www.eaton.com 627
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IEC NINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
0.14 0.14
t= 2 *t-multiplier [s] t= 0.02 *t-multiplier [s]
IG IG
t [s] t-multiplier
628 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
IEC VINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
13.5 13.5
IG 2 IG
(Pickup)-1 (Pickup)-1
t [s]
t-multiplier
www.eaton.com 629
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IEC LINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
120 120
IG 2 IG
(Pickup)-1 (Pickup)-1
t [s] t-multiplier
630 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
IEC EINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
80 80
IG 2 IG 2
t [s] t-multiplier
www.eaton.com 631
IM02602007E EDR-5000
ANSI MINV
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
4.85
IG
2
(Pickup) -1
( 0.0515
IG
0.02
(Pickup) -1
+ 0.1140
) *t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
632 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
ANSI VINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
21.6
IG 2
(Pickup
)-1
( 19.61
IG
2
(Pickup) -1
+ 0.491
) *t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
www.eaton.com 633
IM02602007E EDR-5000
ANSI EINV
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
t=
29.1
IG 2
(Pickup )-1
( 28.2
IG
2
(Pickup) -1
+ 0.1217
) *t-multiplier [s]
t [s] t-multiplier
634 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Therm Flat
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2
5*1 5
IG 0 IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)
t = 5 *t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
t [s] 1.0 t-multiplier

10
0.5
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
www.eaton.com 635
IM02602007E EDR-5000
IT
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 1
5*1 5*1
IG IG
1
(IGnom) (IGnom)
1× 104
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10
TM[s]= t-multiplier
5
10
5 2
1
2
1.0
0.1 0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
636 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
I2T
Notice!
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 2
5*1 5*1
IG 0
IG
(IGnom) (IGnom)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10 t-multiplier
TM[s]=
1
10
0.1 2
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
www.eaton.com 637
IM02602007E EDR-5000
I4T
Notice!
, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset Trip
2 4
5*1 5*1
IG IG
4
(IGnom) (IGnom)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s] 10 t-multiplier
TM[s]=
1 10
5
2
0.1
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01 0.1 1 10 100
638 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Assignment List
The »ASSIGNMENT LIST« below summarizes all module outputs (signals) and inputs (e.g.: states of the
assignments).
Name Description
-.- No assignment
Prot.Available Signal: Protection is available.
Prot.Active Signal: Active
Prot.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Prot.Pickup Phase A Signal: General Pickup Phase A
Prot.Pickup Phase B Signal: General Pickup Phase B
Prot.Pickup Phase C Signal: General Pickup Phase C
Prot.Pickup IX or IR Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault
Prot.Pickup Signal: General Pickup
Prot.Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A
Prot.Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B
Prot.Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C
Prot.Trip IX or IR Signal: General Trip Ground Fault
Prot.Trip Signal: General Trip
Prot.Res Fault a Mains No Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
Prot.I dir fwd Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir rev Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.I dir n poss Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.IR dir fwd Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
Prot.IR dir rev Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
Prot.IR dir n poss Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
Prot.IX dir fwd Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
Prot.IX dir rev Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
Prot.IX dir n poss Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Prot.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
Prot.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
Ctrl.Local Switching Authority: Local
Ctrl.Remote Switching Authority: Remote
Bkr.SI SingleContactInd Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
cannot be detected.
Bkr.Pos not CLOSE Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Bkr.Pos CLOSE Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Bkr.Pos OPEN Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
Bkr.Pos Indeterm Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
www.eaton.com 639
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Bkr.Pos Disturb Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feed-
Bkr.Ready Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
Bkr.Interl CLOSE Signal: One or more IL_Close inputs are active.
Bkr.Interl OPEN Signal: One or more IL_Open inputs are active.
Bkr.CES succesf Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
Bkr.CES Disturbed Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
Bkr.CES Fail TripCmd Command Execution Supervision: Command execution failed
Bkr.CES SwitchgDir Command Execution Supervision respectively Switching Direction
Bkr.CES CLOSE d OPEN Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
Bkr.CES SG not ready Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
Bkr.CES Field Interl Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
Bkr.CES SyncTimeout Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
Bkr.Prot CLOSE Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module
Bkr.TripCmd Signal: Trip Command
Bkr.Ack TripCmd Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
Bkr.Bwear Slow Breaker Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm
Bkr.Res Bwear Sl Breaker Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
Prot module.
Bkr.OPEN Cmd Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
module.
Bkr.CLOSE Cmd manual Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
Bkr.OPEN Cmd manual Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
Bkr.CinBkr-52a-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr (52a)
Bkr.CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b)
Bkr.Ready-I Module Input State: Breaker Ready
Bkr.Sys-in-Sync-I State of the module input: This signals has to become true within
the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful.
Bkr.Ack TripCmd-I State of the module input: Acknowledgment Signal (only for
automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal
640 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Bkr.Interl CLOSE1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
Bkr.Interl OPEN1-I State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Bkr.SC CLOSE-I State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g. the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input
Bkr.SC OPEN-I State of the module input: Switching OPEN Command, e.g. the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input
Bkr.Operations Alarm Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
Bkr.Isum Intr trip: IA Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IA
Bkr.Isum Intr trip: IB Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IB
Bkr.Isum Intr trip: IC Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IC
Bkr.Isum Intr trip Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase.
Bkr.Res TripCmdCr Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands
Bkr.Res Isum trip Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
Bkr.WearLevel Alarm Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm
Bkr.WearLevel Lockout Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level
Bkr.Res Bwear Curve Signal: Reset of the Breaker Wear maintenance curve.
Bkr.Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of interrupting currents has
been exceeded.
Bkr.Res Isum Intr ph Alm Signal: Reset of the Alarm, "the per hour Sum (Limit) of
interrupting currents has been exceeded".
50P[1].Active Signal: Active
50P[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
50P[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
50P[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[1].Pickup IA Signal: Pickup IA
50P[1].Pickup IB Signal: Pickup IB
50P[1].Pickup IC Signal: Pickup IC
50P[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A
50P[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B
50P[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C
www.eaton.com 641
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
50P[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
50P[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50P[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50P[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
642 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 643
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
644 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
50X[1].Active Signal: Active
50X[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
50X[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
50X[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
www.eaton.com 645
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
50X[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
50X[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50X[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50X[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50X[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
646 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
50R[1].Active Signal: Active
50R[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
www.eaton.com 647
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
50R[1].Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
50R[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[1].DefaultSet Signal: Default Parameter Set
50R[1].AdaptSet 1 Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50R[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[1].Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50R[1].AdaptSet1-I Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
648 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 649
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
27M[1].Active Signal: Active
27M[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
27M[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27M[1].Pickup Phase A Signal: Pickup Phase A
27M[1].Pickup Phase B Signal: Pickup Phase B
27M[1].Pickup Phase C Signal: Pickup Phase C
27M[1].Trip Phase A Signal: General Trip Phase A
27M[1].Trip Phase B Signal: General Trip Phase B
27M[1].Trip Phase C Signal: General Trip Phase C
27M[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
650 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
27A[1].Active Signal: Active
27A[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
27A[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27A[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
www.eaton.com 651
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
59N[1].Active Signal: Active
59N[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
59N[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
652 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[2].Active Signal: Active
59N[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
59N[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[1].Active Signal: Active
46[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
46[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
46[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
46[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
www.eaton.com 653
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
81[1].Blo by V< Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
change
change
654 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
change
change
www.eaton.com 655
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
change
change
656 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
32[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[1].Active Signal: Active
32V[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
32V[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
www.eaton.com 657
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Active Signal: Active
PF-55D[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF-55D[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55D[1].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55D[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[2].Active Signal: Active
PF-55D[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF-55D[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
658 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
PF-55D[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55D[2].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Active Signal: Active
PF-55A[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF-55A[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55A[1].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55A[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Active Signal: Active
PF-55A[2].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
PF-55A[2].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Compensator Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55A[2].Impossible Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ZI.Active Signal: Active
ZI.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ZI.Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ZI.ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ZI.Bkr Blo Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
ZI.Phase Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
ZI.Phase Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
ZI.Ground Pickup Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
ZI.Ground Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
www.eaton.com 659
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
ZI.Pickup Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
ZI.Trip Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
ZI.Phase OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
ZI.Ground OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
ZI.OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
ZI.IN Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
ZI.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
ZI.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
ZI.ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
SOTF.Active Signal: Active
SOTF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
SOTF.Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
SOTF.AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
SOTF.I< Signal: No Load Current.
SOTF.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking
SOTF.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking
SOTF.Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
SOTF.Ext SOTF-I Module Input State: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm
CLPU.Active Signal: Active
CLPU.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.Rvs Blo Signal: Reverse Blocking
CLPU.detected Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.AR Blo Signal: Blocked by AR
CLPU.I< Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.Load Inrush Signal: Load Inrush
CLPU.Settle Time Signal: Settle Time
CLPU.Rvs Blo-I Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
ExP[1].Active Signal: Active
ExP[1].ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
ExP[1].Blo TripCmd Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
660 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
ExP[1].ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Alarm-I Module Input State: Alarm
ExP[1].Trip-I Module Input State: Trip
www.eaton.com 661
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
BF.Active Signal: Active
BF.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
BF.Pickup Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
BF.Trip Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
BF.Lockout Signal: Lockout
BF.Res Lockout Signal: Reset Lockout
BF.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
BF.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
BF.Trigger1 Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
TCM.Active Signal: Active
TCM.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
TCM.Pickup Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
TCM.Not Possible Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
TCM.CinBkr-52a-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr (52a)
TCM.CinBkr-52b-I Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b)
TCM.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
TCM.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
CTS.Active Signal: Active
CTS.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
CTS.Pickup Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
CTS.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
CTS.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
LOP.Active Signal: Active
LOP.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
LOP.Pickup Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
LOP.LOP Blo Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements
LOP.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
LOP.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
AR.Active Signal: Active
AR.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
AR.Standby Signal: Standby
AR.t-Man Close Blo Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This
timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually.
While this timer is running, AR cannot be started.
AR.Ready Signal: Ready to shoot
662 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
AR.t-dead Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
AR.Bkr CLOSE Cmd Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command
AR.t-Run2Ready Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure
attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position,
the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the
ready state.
AR.Lock Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
AR.t-Reset Lockout Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the
AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal
(e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected .
AR.Blo Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
AR.t-Blo Reset Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release
(de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no
blocking signal anymore.
AR.successful Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
AR.failed Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
AR.t-AR Supervision Signal: AR Supervision
AR.Service Alarm 1 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
AR.Service Alarm 2 Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations
AR.Max Shots / h exceeded Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been
exceeded.
AR.Res Statistics Cr Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR,
successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
AR.Res Service Cr Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking
AR.Reset Lockout Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
AR.Res Max Shots / h Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has
been reset.
AR.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
AR.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
AR.Ex Shot Inc-I Module input state: The AR Shot counter will be incremented by
this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of
upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables
the functionality only. The assignment has to be set within the
global parameters.
AR.Ex Lock-I Module input state: External AR lockout.
www.eaton.com 663
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
AR.DI Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the
resetting via digital inputs has been selected).
AR.Comm Reset Ex Lock-I Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by
Communication.
Sync.Active Signal: Active
Sync.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
Sync.LiveBus Signal: Live-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Voltage is below the LiveBus
threshold
Sync.LiveLine Signal: Live Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Voltage is below the
LiveLine threshold
Sync.SynchronRunTiming Signal: SynchronRunTiming
Sync.SynchronFailed Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for 5s
timed out.
Sync.SyncOverridden Signal:Synchronism Check is overridden because one of the
Sync.VDiffTooHigh Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
Sync.SlipTooHigh Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too
high.
Sync.Sys-in-Sync Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
Sync.ExBlo1-I Module Input State: External Blocking1
Sync.ExBlo2-I Module Input State: External Blocking2
Sync.Bypass-I State of the module input: Bypass
Sync.BkrCloseInitiate-I State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism
check from any control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the state of
the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated
(Trigger Source).
ECr.Cr Oflw VAh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net
ECr.Cr Oflw Wh Net Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net
ECr.Cr Oflw Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd
ECr.Cr Oflw Wh Rev Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev
ECr.Cr Oflw VArh Net Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net
ECr.Cr Oflw VArh Lag Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag
ECr.Cr Oflw VArh Lead Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead
ECr.VAh Net Res Cr Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter
ECr.Wh Net Res Cr Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter
ECr.Wh Fwd Res Cr Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter
ECr.Wh Rev Res Cr Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter
ECr.VArh Net Res Cr Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter
664 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
ECr.VArh Lag Res Cr Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter
ECr.VArh Lead Res Cr Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter
ECr.Res all Energy Cr Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
ECr.Cr OflwW VAh Net Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW Wh Net Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW Wh Fwd Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW Wh Rev Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW VArh Net Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW VArh Lag Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon
ECr.Cr OflwW VArh Lead Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon
SysA.Active Signal: Active
SysA.ExBlo Signal: External Blocking
SysA.Alarm Watt Power Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
SysA.Alarm VAr Power Signal: Alarm VArs peak
SysA.Alarm VA Power Signal: Alarm VAs peak
SysA.Alarm Watt Demand Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
SysA.Alarm VAr Demand Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
SysA.Alarm VA Demand Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
SysA.Alm Current Demd Signal: Alarm Current demand value
SysA.Alarm I THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Alarm V THD Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.Trip Watt Power Signal: Trip WATTS peak
SysA.Trip VAr Power Signal: Trip VArs peak
SysA.Trip VA Power Signal: Trip VAs peak
SysA.Trip Watt Demand Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
SysA.Trip VAr Demand Signal: Trip VARs demand value
SysA.Trip VA Demand Signal: Trip VAs demand value
SysA.Trip Current Demand Signal: Trip Current demand value
SysA.Trip I THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
SysA.Trip V THD Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
SysA.ExBlo-I Module Input State: External Blocking
www.eaton.com 665
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Wired Inputs.52a T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed
Wired Inputs.52b T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open
Wired Inputs.TOCa T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected
Wired Inputs.43/10 T-I State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip
Wired Inputs.43 M-I State of the module input: System In Manual
Wired Inputs.43 A-I State of the module input: System in Auto
Wired Inputs.Bkr Trouble-I Breaker Trouble
RO-6 X5.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
RO-6 X5.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and
hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
666 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
RO-4Z X2.DISARMED! Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
RO-4Z X2.Outs forced Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced and
hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
Event rec.Res all rec Signal: All records deleted
Waveform rec.Recording Signal: Recording
Waveform rec.Memory full Signal: Memory Full
Waveform rec.Clear fail Signal: Clear Failure in Memory
Waveform rec.Res all rec Signal: All records deleted
Waveform rec.Res record Signal: Delete Record
Waveform rec.Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Waveform rec.Start1-I State of the module input:: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Res record Signal: Delete Record
Fault rec.Man. Trigger Signal: Manual Trigger
Fault rec.Start1-I State of the module input:: Trigger event / start recording if:
Trend rec.Hand Reset Hand Reset
Modbus.Transmission Signal: Communication Active
www.eaton.com 667
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
668 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
IRIG-B.Active Signal: Active
IRIG-B.Inverted Signal: IRIG-B inverted
IRIG-B.Control Signal1 Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
SNTP.SNTP active Signal: If there is no valid SNTP signal for 120 sec, SNTP is
regarded as inactive.
Statistics.ResFc all Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power
Demand, Min, Max)
Statistics.ResFc I Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc P Demand Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc Max Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
Statistics.ResFc Min Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values
Statistics.StartFc 1-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics 1 (Update the
displayed Demand )
Statistics.StartFc 2-I State of the module input: Start of Statistics 2 (Update the
displayed Demand )
www.eaton.com 669
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Logic.LE1.Gate In1-I State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE1.Reset Latch-I State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
670 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 671
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
672 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 673
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
674 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 675
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
676 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 677
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
678 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 679
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
680 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 681
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
682 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 683
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
684 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 685
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
686 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 687
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
Sgen.Running Signal: Measuring value simulation is running
Sgen.Ex Start Simulation-I State of the module input:External Start of Fault Simulation (Using
the test parameters)
Sgen.ExBlo Module Input State: External Blocking
Sgen.Ex ForcePost-I State of the module input:Force Post state. Abort simulation.
Sys.PSS manual Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set
Sys.PSS via Comm Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication
Sys.PSS via Inp fct Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function
Sys.Min. 1 param changed Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Sys.Program Mode Bypass Signal: Short-period bypass of the Program Mode.
Sys.MaintMode Manually Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode
Sys.Maint Mode Comm Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm Mode
Sys.Maint Mode DI Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode
Sys.Ack LED Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment
Sys.Ack RO Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs
Sys.Ack Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication
Sys.Ack TripCmd Signal: Reset Trip Command
Sys.Ack LED-HMI Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :HMI
688 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
Sys.Ack RO-HMI Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :HMI
Sys.Ack Comm-HMI Signal: Acknowledge Communication :HMI
Sys.Ack TripCmd-HMI Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Sys.Ack LED-Comm Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :Communication
Sys.Ack RO-Comm Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :Communication
Sys.Ack Counter-Comm Signal: Reset of all Counters :Communication
Sys.Ack Comm-Comm Signal: Acknowledge Communication :Communication
Sys.Ack TripCmd-Comm Signal: Reset Trip Command :Communication
Sys.Ack LED-I Module Input State: LEDs Acknowledgment by Digital Input.
Sys.Ack RO-I Module Input State: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs.
Sys.Ack Comm-I Module Input State: Acknowledge Communication via Digital Input.
The replica that Communication has received from the device is to
be reset.
Sys.Maint Mode-I Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch
Special Assignment List for all Digital Input Signals and all Logic Outputs
Name Description
-.- No assignment
www.eaton.com 689
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
690 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 691
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
692 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 693
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
694 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 695
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
696 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Name Description
www.eaton.com 697
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Name Description
List of the Digital Inputs

The following list comprises all Digital Inputs. This list is used in various Protective Elements (e.g. TCS...).
The availability and the number of entries depends on the type of device.
Name Description
-.- No assignment
698 www.eaton.com
EDR-5000 IM02602007E
Notes:
www.eaton.com 699
IM02602007E EDR-5000
Instruction Leaflet IM02602007E EDR-5000

Effective 01/20/12
This instruction leaflet is published solely for information purposes

and should not be considered all-inclusive. If further information is
required, you should consult an authorized Eaton sales
representative.
The sale of the product shown in this literature is subject to the
terms and conditions outlined in appropriate Eaton selling policies
or other contractual agreement between the parties. This
literature
is not intended to and does not enlarge or add to any such
contract.
The sole source governing the rights and remedies of any
purchaser of this equipment is the contract between the
purchaser and Eaton.
NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR MERCHANTABILITY, OR WARRANTIES ARISING FROM
COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, ARE MADE
REGARDING THE INFORMATION, RECOMMENDATIONS,
AND DESCRIPTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN. In no event will
Eaton be responsible to the purchaser or User in contract, in tort
(including negligence), strict liability or otherwise for any special,
indirect, incidental or consequential damage or loss whatsoever,
including but not limited to damage or loss of use of equipment,
plant or power system, cost
of capital, loss of power, additional expenses in the use of
existing
power facilities, or claims against the purchaser or User by its
customers resulting from the use of the information,
recommendations and description contained herein.
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Group
1000 Cherrington Parkway
Moon Township, PA 15108
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
© 2011Eaton Corporation PowerChain Management is a registered
All Rights Reserved trademark of Eaton Corporation.
Printed in USA All other trademarks are property of their
Publication No. IM02602007E/66A2416 respective owners.
700 www.eaton.com

EDR 5000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDR 5000 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IM02602007E

EDR-5000 EATON DISTRIBUTION RELAY

EDR-5000 Application Overview

SNTP Zone Interlocking Breaker Wear Programmable Logic Trend recorder

Key Features, Functions and Benefits..........................................................................................8

Special Values of the System Module..........................................................................................................256

Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay..............................................................................569

Key Features, Functions and Benefits

Ground overcurrent elements

Breaker failure (50BF)

Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]))

Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])

Main 3-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])

Auxiliary single-phase under/overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])

Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2])

Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2])

Forward and Reverse Watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3])

Forward and Reverse Vars (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3])

Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)

Switch onto fault protection

Cold load pickup

Protection and Control Functions

Directional Overcurrent Protection

Voltage Restrained Overcurrent

Ground Voltage Protection

Flexible Phase Rotation

Monitoring and Metering

Sequence of Events Records

Integral User Interface

Comments on the Manual

The manual serves as reference document for:

• Engineers in the protection field;

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in

NOTICE is used to address information and practices not related to personal

Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified

• Transformer Protection and

The latest versions of most publications are available at this site.

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS

All electronic equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, some

Follow these precautions when working with or near the device.

1. Before performing maintenance on the electronic device, discharge the

3. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or Styrofoam

• Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the

© Eaton Corporation, 2012. All Rights Reserved.

What Is Included with the Device

Device Package Contents:

Setting Value: Option/features to be realised in the future. Bkr.Latched

Internal message <Name>.*int Alm L1

Parameter of a Module-Input (with <Name>

"inactive", the output 1 is active and 1..n,

expired, the output becomes t1 t1 t2

Quotient of Analog Values

Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module

Please Refer to Diagram: VTS

Please Refer to Diagram: VTS

selective general pickup (collective pickup).

Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.Ex FF VT

Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.Ex FF GVT

Please Refer to Diagram: CTS.Pickup

Please Refer to Diagram: Analog Values

[Paths are indicated by brackets.]

Software and Device names are written in italic .

1 2 3 Image References (Squares)